TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION

Transcription

TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION — 1
Group
21
TRANSMISSION
(TORQUE CONVERTER)
TORQUEFLITE
TRANSMISSION
CONTENTS
Paragraph
A c c u m u l a t o r Piston I n s t a l l a t i o n
Page
105
59
44
39
83
51
Back-Up L i g h t S w i t c h
12
26
Band Levers I n s t a l l a t i o n
94
55
41
38
9
22
Inspection
79
50
Installation—Kickdown
92
55
93
55
40
37
39
37
78
49
103
58
31
34
76
48
64 .
45
69
47
' 65
46
Removal
-
-
-
Inspection
Removal
Band Adjustments
..............................................................
Kickdown
Low-Reverse
Low-Reverse
Removal—Kickdown
Low-Reverse
Clutch — F r o n t — Assembly
Checking E n d Clearance—After Assembly
Before Disassembly............
Disassembly
..
Clutch O v e r r u n n i n g — Disassembly
-.
.-
Clutch — Rear — Piston Retainer
Assembly
Disassembly
Eccentric Dowel C h a r t
70
2— TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION
Paragraph
Extension Housing
-
Inspection
-
23
30
51
41
101
57
33
35
53
41
52
41
14
26
7
21
-
12
26
-
24
31
56
42
54
41
100
57
-
Installation
-
.
Removal
-
Extension Housing —
Page
Bushing
Installation
-
Removal
-
—-
Gearshift Control Cable
Removal
Installation
--
Gearshift Control Cable A d j u s t m e n t
Installation
Removal
Gearshift Control U n i t
.
Installation
Removal
Back-Up L i g h t Switch Replacement
.
Governor
-
—
Assembly
--
Disassembly
-
Installation
-
-
-
-
Removal ( U n i t out of Vehicle) ._
_
-
34
36
Servicing i n Vehicle
-
---
24
31
116
68
5
18
11
24
21
29
82
50
Housing Face and Bore Runout (Torque Converter)
Bore
Runout
Face Runout
H y d r a u l i c Control System
H y d r a u l i c Pressure — Checks and A d j u s t m e n t
Governor
Line
Lubrication
Throttle
T h r o t t l e Compensated
K i c k d o w n Piston
-
-
-
Removal
Installation
Inspection
-
Paragraph
Page
8
22
6
20
19
28
-----
107
60
--
29
34
19
28
-
89
53
-
85
52
45
39
25
32
99
56
34
36
Servicing i n Vehicle
25
32
Inspection
55
42
3
13
22
29
35
36
57
42
98
56
32
35
102
57
4
15
36
36
58
42
Neutral Starter Switch
Removal
Installation
-
Oil Leaks
Oil Pan
Removal
Installation
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Oil Pan and Gasket
Installation
-
Removal Out of Car
.
.-
Replacement i n Car
-
1
-
Oil Pump -— F r o n t
Installation
Oil Seal Replacement
.
-
Removal
-
Oil Pump — Rear
-
-
-
Installation
Removal
-----
Operating Principles
-
O u t p u t Shaft Rear Oil Seal
Removal
Installation
.
O u t p u t Shaft Support
Inspection
Installation
Removal
- .
_
P a r k i n g Brake
Installation
Removal
-
Power Flow i n the Transmission
Power T r a i n
U n i t No. 1—Output Shaft, K i c k d o w n Planet P i n i o n
Carrier and Intermediate Shaft Assemblies
Disassembly
-
Paragraph
Page
Power T r a i n (Continued)
Installation
97
56
Reassembly
63
44
Removal
36
36
59
43
37
36
Assembly
75
48
Disassembly
64
45
96
55
37
36
66
46
38
37
Disassembly
76
48
Installation
95
55
78
49
38
37
77
13
49
26
17
28
86
52
88
53
46
39
Service Diagnosis C h a r t
—
9
Service Diagnosis E x p l a n a t i o n
2
10
91
55
42
38
90
54
43
39
-
Inspection
——
U n i t No. 2 — S u n Gear, Reverse Planet P i n i o n Carrier,
O v e r r u n n i n g Clutch and Rear Clutch Assembly ....
Installation
-
Removal
-
Inspection
-
-
-
-
-
U n i t N o . 3 — F r o n t C l u t c h P i s t o n Retainer and
I n p u t Shaft Assemblies
Reassembly
-
Removal
-
-
Inspection
Push B u t t o n L a m p Replacement
-
Regulator Valve Assembly
Removal
. Installation
Regulator V a l v e Body
Inspection — Includes Valves
Installation
-
Removal
Servos
L o w — Reverse — I n s t a l l a t i o n
Removal
Kickdown — installation
Removal
S h i m Thickness
Chart
-
Paragraph
S t a r t e r Pang Gear
Removal
Installation
114
67
15
27
10
23
27
33
18
28
113
66
115
68
49
40
87
53
47
40
26
33
108
60
50
40
—-
51
41
.-
20
28
—
111
63
110
63
109
60
106
59
30
34
Speedometer P i n i o n and C h a r t
Throttle Linkage Adjustment
-
—
Torque Converter — F l u s h i n g
Page
Torque Converter Control Valve Assembly
Removal
Installation
Torque Converter and H o u s i n g
Removal
Installation
—
Torque Converter H u b Runout
Checking H u b Runout
C o r r e c t i n g H u b Runout
Torque Converter Reaction
Shaft
Inspection
-
Installation
Removal
-
-
Torque Reference
Transmission
Removal
-
Installation
---
-
.......
Transmission Case
Inspection
-
--
-
Extension H o u s i n g
Valve Body and Transfer Plate
Assembly
—
Cleaning and Inspection
Disassembly
,
Installation
Removal
-
6 — TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION
AND SPECIFICATIONS
Type
-
-
A u t o m a t i c Three Speed w i t h
Torque Converter
Torque Converter Diameter (inches)
12 /2
-
1
Oil Capacity of Transmission and Torque Converter (Refill)
-
21 pts. A u t o m a t i c Transmission
F l u i d Type
Method of Cooling
//
-
a
A " Suffix " A "
Water
GEAR RATIOS
l_First
2—Second
D_Drive
R_Reverse
N—Neutral
2.45
1.45
1.00
2.20
FRONT — R E A R PUMPS
Type
E n d Clearance ( F r o n t P u m p )
E n d Clearance (Rear P u m p )
T i p Clearance
Outer Rotor D i a m e t r a l Clearance
to
to
to
to
1
1
1
1
Gear ( R o t a r y )
.001 to .0025 inch
.001 to .0025 inch
.005 to .008 inch
.008 inch m a x i m u m
THRUST WASHERS
I n p u t Shaft
.
115
.097
.078
.059
to
to
to
to
.117
.099
.080
.061
inch ( N a t u r a l )
inch (Black)
inch (Red)
inch (Orange)
F r o n t Clutch and Sun Gear
.062 to .064 inch
O u t p u t Shaft
.062 to .064 Inch
SNAP RINGS
K i c k d o w n Annulus Gear
_
.060 to .062 inch
.064 to .066 inch
Rear Clutch
.060 to .062 inch
Low-Reverse Planet Pinion Carrier
.060 to .062 inch
.064 to .066 Inch
.068 to .070 inch
F r o n t Clutch
.060 to .062 inch
Mode!
Engine Kickdown
( C u . In.)
Band
Front Clutch
Cushion
No.
Spring
Discs
Accumulator
Spring
Clutch
Spring
Rear
Discs
*
High
Governor Temperature
Seals
(Type)
PS-1
361
214
turns
Yes
4
16
5
280
A
No
PS-3, PC-1,
PC-2
383
214
turns
Yes
4
16
5
280
A
No
PS-1, PS-3
(Ram Engine)
383
2 turns
Yes
4
None
5
180
C
Yes
PC-3-300
413
2 turns
No
4
None
5
180
C
Yes
5
280
A
No
PC-3,
PY-1
413
Lbs. Spring Tension
2% t u r n s
Yes
4
16
Governor Assemblies "A"
"C"
Type—Standard
Type—Ram
C-3355—Straightedge
C-3380—Wrench
C-3461—Fixture
C-3487—Support
C-3527—Gauge
C-3528—Stand— (pr.) Valve Body H o l d i n g
C-3529—Compressor Servo Spring
C-3531—Tool
C-3575 or 3533—Compressor
C-3583—Adapter—for C-3380 Torque W r e n c h
C-3689—Bushing Remover
C-3690—Remover
C-3691—Oil Seal D r i v e r
C-3692—Installer
DD1150—Tachometer
C-452—Puller
C-484—Pliers
C-589—Wrench
C-760—Pliers
C-811—Wrench
C-3203A—Jack
C-3276—Pilots
C-3280—Stand
C-3281—Wrench
0-3283—Pilots
C-3288—Pilots
C-3292—Gauge
C-3293—Gauge
C-3301—Pliers
C-3339—Set-Dial Indicator
TIGHTENING REFERENCE
A c c u m u l a t o r Cover Screws
Foot-Pounds
Inch-Pounds
—
180
—
120
—
180
—
90
-
Compensated T h r o t t l e Pressure Tap
.
-
F r o n t Pump Housing to Transmission Case
~
Governor Body to Support
L o c a t i n g Screw
-
-
Oil Pressure Take-Off P l u g
Line Pressure Take-Off P l u g
Oil Pan Bolts
.
_
_
.
-
Rear Clutch Pressure Tap
---
Pump Housing to Support
Oil Pressure Tap
.
-
Suction Pressure Tap
-
----
—
70
—
120
—-
120
—
175
—
120
—
120
—
180
—
180
—
120
Transfer Plate to Transmission Case
—
180
Valve Bodies to Transfer Plate
—
Servo A p p l y Pressure Tap
.
—
Body E n d Cover
55
'
25
B a n d Lever Shaft Plug
35
—
Extension to Transmission Case
25
—
F i l l e r Tube N u t
40
—
I n t e r m e d i a t e Support L o c a t i n g Screw
25
—
Case to Converter Housing
40
—
K i c k d o w n Band A d j u s t i n g Screw N u t
35
—
L i n e Pressure Regulator Valve Retainer
50
—
Low-Reverse Band A d j u s t i n g Screw N u t
35
—
—
M a n u a l Valve Control Cable H o u s i n g
N e u t r a l Starter S w i t c h — I n i t i a l Electrical Contact plus / to / T u r n
l
l
3
2
75 M a x .
200
—
8 —TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION
TIGHTENING R E F E R E N C E S (Continued)
Foot-Pounds
O u t p u t Shaft Support to Case
Propeller Flange N u t
25
—
175
—
—
120
40
—
25
—
30
—
50
—
Torque Converter Cooler L i n e F i t t i n g
Control V a l v e Retainer
Reaction Shaft to Case
Inch-Pounds
-
Torque Converter H o u s i n g
H o u s i n g to E n g i n e B l o c k — % i n c h screws
7/16 i n c h screws..
D u s t Cover
—
200
D u s t Plate
—
130
Torque Converter
Crankshaft N u t or B o l t
-
Pan D r a i n P l u g
-
-
Converter D r a i n P l u g
D r i v e Flange Stud
LUBRICATION
\
PRESSURE
-
INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT
dm
f
/ REAR
\
CLUTCH
/
TEST
i
wm.
L I N E PitESSL
TAKE-OFF P „
i.
NEUTIAL STA«7£r< S W I T C H
60x35
\
130
35
—
y
/
PLUG
/
m y
—•
I N T E R M E D I A T E SUPPORT LOCATING SCREW
LOW AND REVERSE BAND
TORQUE CONVERTER
ADJUSTING SCREW ,
CONTROL VALVE
•[ U PRESSURE
*
—
—•
LOCATING
SCREW
^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
m
55
50
5
y--
h^MM
VALVE
HOB
ADJUSTING
SCREW
pi
GOVERNOR
PRESSURE
TAKE-OFF PLUG
K I C K D O W N BAND ADJUSTING
Fig. 1—Transmission Case (Left Side)
SCREW
REGULATOR
mm
THROTTLE PRESSU
TEST HOLE PLUG
_ FILLER T U B E
CONNECTOR
(COMPENSATED)
F i g . 2—Trcnsmission Case ( l i g h t Side)
57x237B
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS CHART
(TorqueFlite T r a n s m i s s i o n )
DIFFICULTY
A.
D.
Pressure C h e c k s —
L i n e , L u b e , etc.
E.
K.D. B a n d . A d j .
F.
Low-Reverse Band A d j .
G. * E n g i n e I d l e
N e u t r a l Str. S w .
I.
Parking Brake
J.
Regulator—Valve
Spring
K.
Converter Control
Valve
O u t p u t S h a l t Rear
Bushing
N.
T. C. C o o l i n g
O.
K. D. S e r v o
Band-Linkage
P.
L-R S e r v o
Band-Linkage
Q.
O i l Strainer
R.
Valve B o d y —
B o l t s — M a t i n g Surface
S.
Accumulator
T.
A i r Pressure
U.
Governor
#
m
Rear P u m p
R e g u l a t o r Valve
B o d y , Gasket, Surface
c.
Front Clutch
m
d.
Rear C l u t c h
m
e.
P l a n e t a r y G e a r Set
f.
Overrunning Clutch
Manual Valve Lever
m
•
•
m
m
•
m
•
•
•
•
#
m
•
• • •
• •
•
• •
•
•
m
m
m
•
•
•
m
m
m
m
m
j
m
m
m
•
m
m
m
m
•
•
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
* A l w a y s C h e c k Items A . B . C . a n d G . b e f o r e p e r f o r m i n g a n y other operation.
•
•
#
Q
•
#
m
Starter Won't
Energize
impossible
to Push Start
Trans.
Overheats
Trans. Hard to FillOil Blows Out Fil. Tb.
m
m
•
• • • •
Grating, Scraping,
Etc. Noises
Drags or
Locks
Drives
in N (Neutral)
No Drive
In 1 (Reverse)
[
No Drive in
Forward Ranges
No Drive in
Any Position
Slips in All
Positions
Slips in Reverse
Only
Slips in Forward
Drive Positions
•
•
• • •
• • • •
• • •
•
•
m
• •
•
Check
b.
m
•
•
m
m
• • • •
•
o
m
Front P u m p —
Drive Sleeve
Shifts
Erratically
No K.D. or
Normal Downshift
No
Upshift
Upshift and 3-2 K.D.
m
#
a.
g.
®
• •
•
• • •
•
• • • •
• •
•
•
•
Breather
M.
V.
• •
©
H.
L.
m
m
B. * T h r o t t l e Link A d j .
C. * G e a r s h i f t C o n t r o l
Cable A d j .
'
•
*Oil L e v e l
Runaway on
D
ITEM
Delayed
INDEX
N to
Perform Items:
A , B, C , and G first
Harsh N to D
or N to R
See "Explanation
of I n d e x i t e m s "
Miscellaneous
Response
Shift A b n o r m a l i t i e s
CHECK
Harsh Upshift
and 3-2 K.D.
TO
Bulling
Noises
OPERATING
11 c m s
• •
•
•
•
•
E R V I C E DIAGNOSIS CHART
L
SERVICE DIAGNOSIS C H A l f
The Trouble Diagnosis C h a r t has the operating difficulties listed i n three general groups. A f t e r road
testing, m a t c h the t r o u b l e found to i t s p a r t i c u l a r
group and the specific difficulty under t h a t group.
The Index and I t e m i n t h e " I t e m s to Check" column
are next checked against t h e " E x p l a n a t i o n of Index
I t e m s . " Capital l e t t e r items refer to those operations
w h i c h m a y be performed w i t h o u t r e m o v i n g the transmission. T h e small l e t t e r items refer to those operations done after removal o f the transmission f r o m
the car.
2. SERVICE DIAGNOSIS — EXPLANATION OF
INDEX ITEMS
Never remove a transmission f r o m a vehicle u n t i l a l l
of t h e possible " i n vehicle" causes have been checked
for the operation difficulty and the o i l pan has been
removed to check f o r d i r t , m e t a l chips, band mater i a l , broken band ends and burned or scored band
contacting surfaces, also, check t h e m a n u a l c o n t r o l
cable and t h r o t t l e linkage f o r a d j u s t m e n t and wear.
L Parking Brake — • Check f o r excessive drag.
Refer to Brakes Section f o r method of a d j u s t i n g
p a r k i n g brake.
j . Regulator Valve, Spring — The regulator valve
m a y be removed b y r e m o v i n g the regulator valve
s p r i n g retainer, w h i c h is on the r i g h t side of the
transmission case ( F i g . 2 ) . Check f o r a stuck or
badly scratched valve a n d / o r buckled spring. Be sure
s p r i n g cup is correctly positioned and not b i n d i n g i n
valve body bore.
k. Converter Control Valve, Spring — The conv e r t e r control valve m a y be removed b y r e m o v i n g
the converter control valve s p r i n g retainer, w h i c h is
on the r i g h t side of the transmission case ( F i g . 2 ) .
Check f o r a stuck or badly scratched valve and/or
buckled s p r i n g .
W
' -•
'
'
V
/ •
a. O i l L e v e l — Refer to the l u b r i c a t i o n Group 0
of t h i s manual. I f o i l appears t o be emulsified, check
for possible o i l cooler leak.
b. T h r o t t l e L i n k a g e — Refer t o P a r a g r a p h 1 0 .
c.
Gearshift Control Cable—Refer to P a r a g r a p h 7.
d. Pressure Tap Check —- H y d r a u l i c pressure taps
have been provided to check the f o l l o w i n g pressures:
line, l u b r i c a t i o n , governor, rear clutch apply, and
t h r o t t l e (compensated). These pressures should f a l l
w i t h i n the specified l i m i t s stated i n t h e H y d r a u l i c
Control Pressure Check C h a r t .
e. K i c k d o w n Band A d j u s t m e n t — the k i c k d o w n
band a d j u s t m e n t screw is f o u n d on the l e f t side o f
the transmission case ( F i g . 1 ) . Refer to P a r a g r a p h
9(a).
f. L o w and Reverse B a n d A d j u s t m e n t — T h e l o w
and reverse band a d j u s t m e n t screw is found on t h e
r i g h t side of the t r a n s m i s s i o n case ( F i g . 2 ) . Refer
to P a r a g r a p h 9 ( b ) .
g. E n g i n e Idle — A d j u s t t o 475 to 525 r . p . m . i n
Neutral.
h. Neutral Starter Switch — I f t h e s t a r t e r w i l l
not energize, the n e u t r a l s t a r t e r s w i t c h and connections should be tested.
A —GOVERNOR PRESSURE
B — REAR PUMP INLET
C —REAR CLUTCH 'APPLY' (Line pressure)
D — LOW AND REVERSE SERVO 'APPLY' (Line pressure)
E—KICKDOWN SERVO 'APPLY' (Throttle compensated pressure)
F — LOW AND REVERSE SERVO (Location)
G—KICKDOWN SERVO (Location)
H —KICKDOWN SERVO 'APPLY' (Line pressure)
J — KICKDOWN SERVO 'RELEASE' (Line pressure)
K —ACCUMULATOR (Location)
I — FRONT CLUTCH AND ACCUMULATOR 'APPLY' (Line pressure)
M —LINE PRESSURE
N — FRONT PUMP INLET
O—-REVERSE UPSET (Reverse blocker 'Apply') (Line pressure)
P—LINE ^'USZJRE
GAUGE
56x712A
Fig. 3—Oil Passages in Transmission Case
1. B r e a t h e r — Check to determine w h e t h e r t h e
breather is free o f d i r t and undercoating.
m . O u t p u t Shaft Rear B u s h i n g — Check for r o u g h ,
scored or w o r n bushing.
n . Torque Converter — Check o i l cooler lines f o r
being bent, k i n k e d or h a v i n g loose connections.
o. K i c k d o w n Servo, Band and L i n k a g e — Check
f o r broken seal r i n g s , stuck servo pistons or broken
linkage.
p. L o w and Reverse Servo, B a n k and L i n k a g e —
Check f o r t o r n seal, broken band and/or linkage.
q. O i l S t r a i n e r — Check f o r possible a i r leakage
or clogged screen.
r . Valve B o d y A t t a c h i n g Bolts and M a t i n g Surface
— Check f o r loose bolts, b u r r s or scratches on m a t i n g
surfaces. Clean valve body assembly. Check f o r
stuck valves, d i r t , scratched valves or body, and
b u r r s on valves. Torque valve body bolts to specifications.
s. A c c u m u l a t o r — Check accumulator p i s t o n f o r
sticking, r o u g h bore i n case, and/or r i n g s .
t . A i r Pressure Check — The f r o n t clutch, rear
clutch, k i c k d o w n servo, and low reverse servo m a y
be checked b y a p p l y i n g a i r pressure t o t h e i r respect i v e passage w h e n the valve body is removed. To
make the complete a i r pressure check, proceed as
f o l l o w s : (Refer to F i g . 3.)
CAUTION
Compressed a i r supply m u s t be free o f a l l d i r t and
moisture.
( 1 ) Raise the vehicle on a hoist, d r a i n t h e transmission fluid and remove the transmission o i l pan.
Remove t h e accumulator cover and valve bodies
assembly.
( 2 ) A p p l y a i r pressure to the f r o n t clutch passage as shown i n F i g u r e 3 ( L ) . L i s t e n f o r a d u l l
" t h u d " w h i c h indicates t h a t the f r o n t clutch is opera t i n g . H o l d the a i r pressure on f o r a few seconds and
observe f o r excessive o i l leaks i n the system.
(3) A p p l y a i r pressure t o the rear c l u t c h passage,
as shown i n F i g u r e 3 ( C ) . L i s t e n f o r a d u l l " t h u d "
w h i c h indicates t h a t t h e rear clutch is operating,
also check f o r excessive o i l leaks.
(4) A p p l y a i r pressure to the k i c k d o w n " a p p l y "
(line) pressure passage, as shown i n F i g u r e 3 ( H ) .
Observe t h e operation of the k i c k d o w n servo, lever
and band w h e n a i r pressure is applied.
(5) A p p l y a i r pressure t o the k i c k d o w n " a p p l y "
(compensated t h r o t t l e ) pressure passage, as shown
i n F i g u r e 3 ( E ) . Observe the operation of the kickdown servo.
(6) A p p l y air pressure to the low and reverse
servo passage as shown i n F i g u r e 3 ( F ) . Observe the
operation of the low and reverse servo, lever, and
band w h e n a i r pressure is applied.
I f t h i s usually occurs when line pressure fails, an
e r r a t i c or no u p s h i f t condition exists and the clutches
and servos operate properly, i t indicates t h a t a possible m a l f u n c t i o n i n g exists i n the control valve body
assembly. Disassemble, clean, inspect and service the
valve body assembly as described i n the "Recondit i o n i n g o f t h e Valve B o d y and T r a n s f e r Plate A s semblies," P a r a g r a p h 109.
U p o n completion o f the a i r pressure check, and
servicing the valve body assembly, install the valve
body assembly and the transmission o i l pan. F i l l the
transmission to proper level w i t h fluid, and adjust
the control cable and t h e t h r o t t l e linkage.
u . Governor — Clean assembly, check w e i g h t assembly and valve f o r b u r r s , scratches or s t i c k y operation. E x a m i n e the governor valve shaft, snap rings
and seal r i n g s .
v. Rear P u m p — Clean and inspect assembly f o r
side and d i a m e t r a l clearance. Note w h e t h e r the rear
oil p u m p pinion ball is i n place. E x a m i n e the o u t p u t
shaft support face f o r scoring.
a. F r o n t P u m p D r i v e Sleeve — Inspect assembly
f o r side and d i a m e t r a l clearance. E x a m i n e oil pump
inner and outer r o t o r f o r heavy scoring. Check f r o n t
p u m p drive sleeve seal r i n g s .
b. Regulator Valve Body, M a t i n g Surfaces and
Gasket — Clean and inspect the valve body f o r heavy
scratches and scoring on the valve bores and face
w h i c h bears against the f r o n t p u m p housing. E x amine the valve body to determine i f the secondary
reaction orifice is free of d i r t . Check gasket f o r
uniformness of compression by t h e valve body.
c. F r o n t Clutch — Clean and inspect discs, plates,
d r i v e hub, r e t u r n spring, piston levers and retainer.
Check the f o l l o w i n g f r o n t clutch c i r c u i t f o r leakage
possibilities:
(1) V a l v e body and valve body t o case m a t i n g
surface.
( 2 ) A c c u m u l a t o r small and large p i s t o n r i n g s .
( 3 ) Regulator valve body to case m a t i n g surface.
( 4 ) Torque converter reaction shaft seal r i n g .
ENGINE CRANKSHAFT
REAR CLUTCH PRESSURE PLATE
j T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R OVERRUNNING CLUTCH
/ K I C K D O W N BAND
T O R Q U E C O N V E R T E R IMPELLER
\
/
FRONT OIL PUMP H O U S I N G DUST SEAL
\
1
/
'
INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
O V E R R U N N I N G CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
1
INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
LOW-REVERSE B A N D
REAR OIL PUMP
;
LOW-REVERSE B A N D DRUM
/
/
/ REVERSE A N N U L U S G E A R
1
/
/
/
,
/ I
/ /
/
/
S
R
E
A
R
/
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
/
' j
/T O/R Q FRONT
U E C O NCLUTCH
V E R T E R PRESSURE
R E A C T I O N PLATE
SHAFT
FRONT O I L PUMP
T O R Q U E CONVERTER STATOR
/
/
/
/
/
TRANSMISSION CASE
j
I
j
I
KICKDOWN ANNULUS GEAR
OUTPUT SHAFT SUPPORT
/
//
EXTENSION
GOVERNOR ASSEMBLY
SPEEDOMETER PINION
OIL STRAINER:
REVERSE SUN G E A R
LOW-REVERSE PLANET P I N I O N CARRIER ASSEMBLY
H A N D BRAKE ASSEMBLY
V A L V E BODIES A N D TRANSFER PLATE ASSEMBLY
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
TORQUE CONVERTER TURBINE
56x707C
Fig.
4—Typical TorqueFlite Transmission a n d
Torque Converter
TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION—13
(5) I n p u t shaft small and large seal r i n g s .
(6)
I n t e r m e d i a t e shaft No. 1, 2, and 8 seal r i n g s .
(7)
F r o n t clutch o i l feed tube.
(8)
F r o n t clutch piston inner and outer seal r i n g s .
(9)
F r o n t clutch retainer ball check.
d. Rear Clutch — Clean and inspect discs, plates,
r e t u r n s p r i n g and piston. Check t h e f o l l o w i n g rear
clutch c i r c u i t f o r leakage possibilities.
(1) Valve body and valve body to case m a t i n g
surface.
(2)
O u t p u t shaft support t o case m a t i n g surface.
(3)
O u t p u t shaft small and large seal r i n g s .
(4)
I n t e r m e d i a t e shaft N o . 4, 5, and 6 seal r i n g s .
(5) Rear clutch o i l feed tube.
(6)
Sun gear rear clutch seal r i n g s .
(7)
Rear clutch piston inner and outer seal r i n g s .
( 8 ) Rear clutch retainer ball check.
( 9 ) K i c k d o w n piston rod guide seal r i n g and r o d
guide t o k i c k d o w n r o d fit.
(10)
L a r g e k i c k d o w n piston seal r i n g .
e. Planetary Gear Set — Clean and inspect gear
set f o r w o r n t h r u s t washers, nicked or r o u g h gear
teeth, and excessive pinion end clearance.
f. L o w Speed Over-Running C l u t c h — Clean and
inspect the o v e r r u n n i n g clutch assembly f r o m b r i n nelled rollers a n d / or cam and i m p r o p e r l y assembled
rollers or springs. Check the cam roller ramps f o r
being w o r n .
g. M a n u a l V a l v e Lever — A loose or badly w o r n
manual valve lever cam should be replaced. I f loose,
i t m a y be silver soldered only so as not to r e q u i r e
h i g h temperatures t h a t could destroy i t s hardness,
otherwise i t should be replaced.
T O R Q U E F L I T E TRANSMISSION
3. TORQUEFLITE OPERATING PRINCIPLES
The transmission, as shown i n F i g u r e 4, combines
a torque converter and an automatic p l a n e t a r y
three speed transmission. The torque converter extends torque m u l t i p l i c a t i o n over a wide range o f
engine speeds. The transmission consists of t w o
m u l t i p l e disc clutches, an o v e r r u n n i n g c l u t c h , t w o
bands, and t w o planetary gear sets to provide t h r e e
f o r w a r d ratios and a reverse r a t i o .
a. Gearshift Control Unit
The transmission is operated by a gearshift c o n t r o l
u n i t consisting of five push buttons, identified b y
R (reverse), N ( n e u t r a l ) , D ( d r i v e ) , 2 (second) and
1 (first).
Mechanical connection between t h e gearshift cont r o l housing and the transmission manual c o n t r o l
valve is obtained t h r o u g h the use of a single pushpull cable, as shown i n F i g u r e 5. One end o f t h e w i r e
cable is secured to the cable actuator i n the g e a r s h i f t
control housing, w h i l e the other end enters t h e t r a n s mission case to engage t h e manual control valve lever
assembly.
Should the R (reverse) b u t t o n be pushed i n , above
a p p r o x i m a t e l y 10 to 12 M P H , i t w i l l move the m a n u a l
control lever t o t h e n e u t r a l position and w h e n t h e
car speed drops below 10 to 12 M P H , i t w i l l again be
necessary to re-engage the R (reverse) push b u t t o n .
A back-up l i g h t s w i t c h (when so equipped) is i n corporated i n t h e gearshift control housing and is
operated b y the R (reverse) push b u t t o n slide.
b. Operating Instructions
Starting the Engine
As a safety precaution, always apply p a r k i n g or foot
brake. The transmission N ( n e u t r a l ) control b u t t o n
m u s t always be pushed i n before the car can be
started. T h i s is necessary since t h e s t a r t e r electrical
c i r c u i t is completed only w h e n the n e u t r a l safety
s w i t c h on the transmission is closed, thus p r e v e n t i n g
the car f r o m being accidentally s t a r t e d while i n gear.
Push Starting
Should the need arise, the engine can be started as
follows by h a v i n g t h e car pushed:
(1)
Push i n the N ( n e u t r a l ) b u t t o n .
(2) T u r n on the i g n i t i o n s w i t c h .
(3) W h e n a speed of a p p r o x i m a t e l y 20 M . P . H . has
been attained, push i n the 1 ( f i r s t ) b u t t o n and t h e
engine should s t a r t .
T o w i n g the car to s t a r t is n o t recommended due t o
the sudden surge of power w h e n the engine starts.
g. How to Drive the Vehicle
(1) A f t e r t h e engine is started, better fuel economy and quicker engine w a r m up can be obtained b y
LOCK
UNLATCHED POSITION
LATCHED POSITION
NEUTRAL OPERATING AND
ENGINE STARTING SLIDE
CONTROL CABLE
ACTUATOR
TO
TRANSMISSION
PUSH
BUTTONS
CONTROL
CABLE
57xl74A
Fig.
5—Typical Gearshift Control Unit (Operational Sketch)
s t a r t i n g to d r i v e i m m e d i a t e l y . I f the engine is cold
(engine on fast i d l e ) , apply the foot brake l i g h t l y
so as to prevent a tendency of vehicle to creep w h e n
m a k i n g a push b u t t o n selection.
( 2 ) D (drive b u t t o n ) . A l l n o r m a l f o r w a r d d r i v i n g
w i l l be done i n t h i s range. The vehicle w i l l have a
s l i g h t tendency to creep a f t e r p u s h i n g t h e b u t t o n
f r o m N ( n e u t r a l ) t o D ( d r i v e ) a t idle. T h i s can be
prevented b y a p p l y i n g the f o o t brake l i g h t l y . A s
soon as the accelerator is depressed, the vehicle w i l l
move f o r w a r d i n the d r i v e ( b r e a k a w a y ) range. Depending on the amount the accelerator is depressed,
the t r a n s m i s s i o n w i l l a u t o m a t i c a l l y u p s h i f t t o second.
A s t h e vehicle speed increases, the t r a n s m i s s i o n w i l l
a u t o m a t i c a l l y u p s h i f t f r o m second to direct. W h e n
s l o w i n g the vehicle down ( a t closed t h r o t t l e ) t h e
t r a n s m i s s i o n w i l l a u t o m a t i c a l l y d o w n s h i f t to breakaway a t a p p r o x i m a t e l y 10 M . P . H .
( 3 ) 2 (second) p o s i t i o n provides d r i v i n g characteristics s i m i l a r to D ( d r i v e ) except t h a t t h e t r a n s mission w i l l r e m a i n i n second u n t i l wide open 2-3
u p s h i f t speed is attained, as indicated i n t h e S h i f t
P a t t e r n S u m m a r y C h a r t below. A s soon as t h e accelerator is depressed, t h e vehicle w i l l move f o r w a r d i n
the d r i v e ( b r e a k a w a y ) range. Depending on t h e
a m o u n t of accelerator is depressed and car speed,
t h e transmission w i l l a u t o m a t i c a l l y u p s h i f t i n t o
second: I f t h e vehicle speed falls before 8 M . P . H . , or
i f t h e accelerator is completely depressed provided
vehicle speed is below 30 M . P . H . , t h e transmission
w i l l a u t o m a t i c a l l y d o w n s h i f t to breakaway. I t is
possible to push t h e b u t t o n s f r o m 2 (second) to D
( d r i v e ) at any speed. Shifts D ( d r i v e ) to 2 (second)
may be made a t any speed and the transmission w i l l
d o w n s h i f t to second gear w h e n speeds below t h e 3-2
k i c k d o w n l i m i t are obtained.
N O T E : A l l s h i f t speeds v a r y somewhat due t o prod u c t i o n tolerances, t i r e sizes and rear axle r a t i o s .
A l l s h i f t s , however, should be smooth, responsive,
and w i t h no noticeable engine r u n a w a y .
( 4 ) 1 ( f i r s t ) provides d r i v i n g characteristics simi l a r to D (drive-breakaway) except t h a t the t r a n s mission w i l l not u p s h i f t i n t o any other range r e g a r d less of vehicle speed and t h r o t t l e opening. To prevent
overspeeding of engine, do not operate vehicle above
40 m p h i n 1 ( f i r s t ) position. I t is possible t o push
t h e b u t t o n s f r o m D ( d r i v e ) to 1 (first) at any speed;
however, the transmission w i l l n o t d o w n s h i f t t o low
i f vehicle is above speeds shown i n S h i f t P a t t e r n
S u m m a r y C h a r t (above 3-1 K i c k d o w n l i m i t ) .
(5) R ( r e v e r s e ) . Stop t h e vehicle and w i t h foot
b r a k e l i g h t l y applied, push the R (reverse) button, i n .
SHIFT P A T T E R N SUMMARY CHART
PS1&3
Closed T h r o t t l e 1-2 U p s h i f t
8-13
8-15
8-15
9-15
9-16
10-15
11-15
Closed T h r o t t l e 2-3 U p s h i f t
10-16
12-18
12-19
12-19
13-20
14-19
13-20
W i d e Open T h r o t t l e 1-2 U p s h i f t .... 29-41
31-46
31-47
32-48
33-49
37-42
38-44
Wide Open T h r o t t l e 2-3 U p s h i f t .... 61-74
67-83
68-84
69-86
72-90
60-74
61-75
3-2 K i c k d o w n L i m i t
58-71
63-80
64-82
66-83
69-87
57-65
58-67
3-1 K i c k d o w n L i m i t
28-39
30-43
31-44
32-45
33-47
36-42
37-43
6-11
6-13
6-13
6-13
7-14
8-12
8-13
( 6 ) K i c k d o w n (forced d o w n s h i f t ) . A t speeds below the 3-2 or 3-1 k i c k d o w n speed l i m i t s shown i n
S h i f t P a t t e r n S u m m a r y Chart, a f t e r t h e t r a n s m i s sion has upshifted, i n t o D ( d r i v e ) or 2 (second) the
transmission w i l l d o w n s h i f t to the n e x t lowest gear
b y completely depressing the accelerator; thereby
g i v i n g m a x i m u m acceleration f o r passing or climbi n g steep grades. The transmission w i l l a u t o m a t i cally u p s h i f t to second i f the accelerator is released
or speeds shown i n S h i f t P a t t e r n S u m m a r y C h a r t
( w i d e open t h r o t t l e 1-2 u p s h i f t ) are reached. I n D
( d r i v e ) range f r o m second gear, the transmission
w i l l automatically u p s h i f t i n t o direct i f t h e accelerat o r is p a r t i a l l y released or i f speeds as shown i n S h i f t
P a t t e r n S u m m a r y C h a r t (wide open t h r o t t l e 2-3 ups h i f t ) are reached.
PC2
PC3
PY1
PC3
C300
Ram Man.
Condition
Closed T h r o t t l e D o w n s h i f t
PCI
PSI & 3
Ram
Man.
load or when p u l l i n g a t r a i l e r , the 2 (second) or 1
(first) position should be selected on upgrades w h i c h
require heavy t h r o t t l e f o r y mile or more. L o w e r
ratios reduce the possibility of overheating t h e transmission under these conditions. 1 (first) position is
f o r severe operation and to provide better control
when descending steep grades.
2
d. Transmission Inoperative
T o w the vehicle w i t h the rear end picked up or remove the propeller shaft.
e. Transmission Operating Properly
The vehicle m a y be towed safely i n N ( n e u t r a l ) at
moderate speeds. F o r long distances t o w i n g (over
100 m i l e s ) , the propeller shaft should be removed.
4. POWER F L O W IN THE TRANSMISSION
c. Mountain Driving
D (Drive) Position Breakaway (see Fig. 6)
W h e n d r i v i n g i n t h e mountains w i t h either heavy
The power flow is f r o m t h e converter t u r b i n e t h r o u g h
FRONT CLUTCH APPLIED
OVER-RUNNING CLUTCH (LOCKS WHILE D R I V I N G FREE WHILE COASTING)
DRIVE P O S I T I O N - B R E A K A W A Y
Fig. 6—Power Flow in D (Drive) Position—Breakaway
56x689
56x690
Fig. 7—Power Flow in D (Drive) Position—2nd Speed and 2 (Second) Position 2nd Speed
the i n p u t shaft and f r o n t clutch r e t a i n e r (one u n i t ) .
The f r o n t clutch is applied and the d r i v e continues
t h r o u g h the clutch h u b t o the intermediate shaft and
the k i c k d o w n annulus gear (one u n i t ) . The k i c k down annulus gear drives the k i c k d o w n planet p i n i o n
gears, r o t a t i n g t h e m i n the same direction. The
k i c k d o w n planet gears are meshed w i t h the k i c k down sun gear w h i c h i n t u r n is i n t e g r a l w i t h the
reverse sun gear. B o t h sun gears are forced t o r o t a t e i n a reverse d i r e c t i o n b y the reaction of t h e k i c k down planet p i n i o n carrier together w i t h the reverse
annulus gear, b o t h of w h i c h are splined to t h e outp u t shaft d r i v i n g housing. The reverse planet p i n i o n
FRONT
AND
REAR
CLUTCHES
carrier is attached to and prevented f r o m t u r n i n g
backward b y an o v e r r u n n i n g clutch and becomes stat i o n a r y i n f o r w a r d drive (overruns on coast). Therefore, the reverse planet carrier pinions are forced to
r o t a t e i n a f o r w a r d direction and force t h e reverse
annulus to r o t a t e i n the same direction t r a n s m i t t i n g
the power flow to the o u t p u t shaft w i t h the r e s u l t i n g
r a t i o of the k i c k d o w n and reverse planetary gear
sets of 2.45 to 1.
D (Drive Position — 2nd S p e e d a n d 2nd (Second)
Position — 2nd S p e e d (see F i g . 7)
The power flow is f r o m the torque converter t u r b i n e
APPLIED
56x688
Fig. 8—Power Flow in D (Drive) Position—Direct
FRONT CLUTCH APPLIED
L O W AND REVERSE BAND APPLIED
Fig. 9—Power Flow in 1 (First) Position—low Speed
t h r o u g h the i n p u t shaft to the f r o n t c l u t c h ( w h i c h
is applied).
the annulus gear, t h u s p r o v i d i n g a gear r a t i o o f 1.45
to 1.
F r o m the f r o n t clutch t h r o u g h t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e
shaft to t h e annulus gear o f the k i c k d o w n ( r e a r )
planetary gear set. The k i c k d o w n band is applied
w h i c h holds t h e sun gear s t a t i o n a r y . The annulus
gear drives the k i c k d o w n planet pinions w h i c h r o t a t e
i n the same d i r e c t i o n as the i n p u t and intermediate
shafts. T h e k i c k d o w n planet pinions. are meshed
w i t h the sun gear; therefore, t h e y w a l k around t h i s
gear and exert force t h r o u g h the k i c k d o w n planet
pinion shafts to r o t a t e the k i c k d o w n planet pinion
carrier. T h e carrier, w h i c h is splined t o t h e o u t p u t
shaft d r i v e housing, rotates at a slower speed t h a n
D (Drive Position) — Direct (see Fig. 8)
The power flow f r o m the torque converter goes d i r e c t l y t h r o u g h the transmission because the plane t a r y elements o f t h e gear t r a i n are locked up b y t w o
m u l t i p l e disc clutches and b o t h bands are released.
The torque converter provides all o f t h e torque
multiplication.
Kickdown (Forced Downshift) i n D (Drive) Position
Below 25 VLPJSL
T h i s w i l l force t h e transmission to d o w n s h i f t and t h e
power flow w i l l be t h e same as D ( d r i v e ) position
(breakaway).
56x692
Fig.
10—Power Flow in R (Reverse) Position
Kickdown (Forced 3-2 Downshift) i n D (Drive) Position
25 to 70 M.P.H.
T h i s w i l l force the transmission to downshift and
the power flow w i l l be the same as D ( d r i v e ) position
2nd speed.
N (Neutral) Position
A l l f r i c t i o n elements are released. Hence, there is no
drive connection between the engine and the rear
wheels.
Power Flow Summary
1 (First Position) — First Speed (see Fig. 9)
I n 1 (first) position the power flow is the same as
D ( d r i v e ) position (breakaway) or 2 (second) posit i o n (breakaway) w i t h one exception, the low-reverse
band is applied, locking the o v e r r u n n i n g clutch t o
provide engine b r a k i n g .
The c h a r t summarizes power flow conditions i n the
various ranges as regards to gear t r a i n elements i n volved and the ratios obtained.
5. THE HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEM
T h e h y d r a u l i c control system has f o u r i m p o r t a n t
functions t o p e r f o r m .
R (Reverse) Position (see Fig. 10)
The rear clutch and t h e low-reverse band are applied.
A l l other f r i c t i o n elements are released. The power
flow is f r o m the torque converter t u r b i n e t h r o u g h
t h e i n p u t shaft t o the rear clutch hub ( p a r t o f the
f r o n t clutch r e t a i n e r ) . The rear clutch is splined t o
the reverse sun gear. The c a r r i e r of the reverse
( f r o n t ) planetary gear set is held s t a t i o n a r y b y t h e
low-reverse b a n d ; therefore, t h e se.t acts as a reverse
t r a i n t h r o u g h the reverse planet pinions to t h e reverse annulus ( w h i c h is splined to the o u t p u t shaft
d r i v e housing) and provides a reverse r a t i o o f 2.20
to 1.
T h e pressure supply system, the clutches and band
servos, the pressure r e g u l a t i n g valves and the flow
control valves.
a. The Pressure Supply System
Front Pump
Under a l l n o r m a l operating conditions (up to a f o r w a r d speed of approximately 35 m p h ) the f r o n t
pump, d r i v e n at engine speed, provides o i l needed f o r
torque converter pressure, control pressures, and
lubrication.
C L U T C H ENGAGEMENT
AND BAND APPLICATION CHART
Button
Position
and Drive
Condition
Front
Clutch
Rear
Clutch
Over
Running
Clutch
Front
(Kickdown)
Band
Neutral
Disengaged
Disengaged
Over
Runs
Released
Released
Drive "D"
Breakaway
2.45 to 1
Engaged
Disengaged
Holds
Released
Released
D r i v e "D"
Second
1.45 to 1
Engaged
Disengaged
Over
Runs
Applied
Released
D r i v e "D"
Direct
1.00 to 1
Engaged
Engaged
Over
Runs
Released
Released
Second 2"
1.45 to 1
Engaged
Disengaged
Over
Runs
Applied
Released
First " 1 "
Engaged
Disengaged
No
Movement
Released
Applied
No
Movement
Released
Applied
u
Reverse " R "
2.20 to 1
Disengaged
Engaged
(Low
Rear
& Rev.)
Band
The f r o n t p u m p delivers o i l at a p p r o x i m a t e l y 90
psi to fulfill these conditions at all engine speeds
above a p p r o x i m a t e l y 700 r p m . I n reverse, the f r o n t
pump pressure is increased t o approximately 225
psi i n order to handle the h i g h torque loads imposed
d u r i n g reverse operation.
source of line pressure to the regulator valve seconda r y reaction area, w i t h the result t h a t a line pressure of 225 psi, applied to the p r i m a r y reaction area,
is required to overcome the force of the r e g u l a t o r
valve s p r i n g .
Hear Pump
T h i s valve maintains an o i l pressure of a p p r o x i m a t e l y 30 psi w i t h i n t h e torque converter. O i l is fed
f r o m the regulator valve t h r o u g h a r e s t r i c t i n g hole
i n the regulator valve body to the torque converter.
The rear pump (smaller t h a n the f r o n t pump and
driven by the o u t p u t shaft) furnishes all of t h e o i l
required by the transmission i n n o r m a l d r i v i n g at
all vehicle speeds above approximately 35 m p h .
b. Clutches and Band Servos
Front Clutch
The f r o n t clutch t r a n s m i t s f u l l engine and converter
torque i n all f o r w a r d d r i v e positions.
I n order to develop the required capacity, a system
of eight levers is used to actuate the clutch apply
plate.
Rear Clutch
The rear clutch locks t h e gear t r a i n f o r direct drive
operation i n the f o r w a r d range and t r a n s m i t s f u l l
i n p u t torque to the gear t r a i n i n reverse operation.
Kickdown Servo
The k i c k d o w n piston actuates the k i c k d o w n band
t h r o u g h the k i c k d o w n lever, s t r u t , and anchor, holdi n g the sun gear of the rear planetary set stationary
and r e s u l t i n g i n a f o r w a r d r a t i o of 1.45 to 1 t h r o u g h
the rear planetary gear set.
Low-Reverse Servo
The low-reverse servo has t w o functions w h i c h are
performed independently. The first reverse servo
piston is moved h y d r a u l i c a l l y t o apply the first reverse band t h r o u g h t h e first reverse band lever, s t r u t ,
and anchor ( F i g . 1 0 ) .
Accumulator
A n accumulator helps to cushion the f r o n t clutch
engagement when a f o r w a r d drive b u t t o n is pushed
in and t h e application of the k i c k d o w n band i n t h e
upshift f r o m breakaway to second. I t is connected
in parallel and to t h e passage w h i c h supplies line
pressure to the apply side of the k i c k d o w n servo.
c. Pressure Regulating Valves
Regulator Valve
The regulator valve controls line pressure a t a value
of a p p r o x i m a t e l y 90 psi f o r all operating conditions
except reverse.
F o r reverse operation, o i l m u s t be at a pressure o f
225 psi. T h i s is accomplished b y s h u t t i n g off t h e
Torque Converter Control Valve
Oil is routed f r o m the torque converter control
valve t h r o u g h the transmission l u b r i c a t i o n system
t o lubricate the gear t r a i n at approximately 10 to 30
psi pressure.
Governor Valve
The governor valve assembly t r a n s m i t s a h y d r a u l i c
pressure to the transmission w h i c h is proportional t o
car speed. This governed pressure, i n conjunction
w i t h t h r o t t l e pressure, controls upshift and downs h i f t speeds.
Throttle Valve
The t h r o t t l e valve assembly t r a n s m i t s a h y d r a u l i c
pressure to t h e transmission w h i c h is p r o p o r t i o n a l
to the amount of t h r o t t l e opening.
The t h r o t t l e valve allows o i l t o flow f r o m t h e line
pressure p o r t to the t h r o t t l e pressure port, w h i c h is
connected by a passage to the reactions area of the
t h r o t t l e valve.
T h r o t t l e pressure w i l l v a r y w i t h the amount o f
carburetor t h r o t t l e opening f r o m a value of 0 (zero)
pressure at closed t h r o t t l e to a value of a p p r o x i m a t e l y 90 psi at w i d e open t h r o t t l e .
Throttle Compensator Valve
The t h r o t t l e compensator valve amplifies the v a r i a tions i n t h r o t t l e pressure. T h r o t t l e compensator
pressure w i l l v a r y w i t h the amount of carburetor
t h r o t t l e opening f r o m a value of a p p r o x i m a t e l y 10
to 16 psi ( w i t h the 1 piece valve body) at closed
t h r o t t l e to a value o f 90 psi at a p p r o x i m a t e l y %
throttle.
d. Flow Control Valves
Front and Rear Pump Check Valves
The f r o n t p u m p check valve prevents back flow f r o m
the rear pump i n t o t h e pressure side of the pump
w h e n the p u m p is e i t h e r s t a t i o n a r y or merely circul a t i n g o i l at a v e r y low pressure. The check valve
separates f r o n t and rear pump.
Manual Valve
The manual valve obtains t h e different transmission
d r i v e ranges as selected by the vehicle operator.
Reverse Blocker Valve
The reverse blocker valve mechanically blocks t h e
m a n u a l valve f r o m m o v i n g Into reverse position t o
prevent accidental reverse engagement above app r o x i m a t e l y 10-15 m p h .
1- 2 S h i t Valve
This valve determines w h e t h e r the transmission is
either i n first gear r a t i o or second gear r a t i o , depending upon w h e t h e r the valve is i n the upshifted
or down-shifted position.
2- 3 Shift Valve
T h i s s h i f t valve a u t o m a t i c a l l y shifts the t r a n s m i s sion f r o m i n t e r m e d i a t e t o direct gear.
1-2 Relay Valve
T h i s valve provides f o r a quick application and release of the k i c k d o w n band and rear c l u t c h at low
speeds w h i l e s m o o t h i n g out t h e i r apply and release
at h i g h speeds.
Kickdown Valve
The k i c k d o w n valve makes
s h i f t f r o m d i r e c t t o second
and d i r e c t to breakaway b y
t o r pedal past the detent
throttle.
possible a forced down— second t o breakaway
depressing the accelera" f e e l " near wide open
Shuttle Valve, Shuttle Valve Plug, and
Servo Pressure Bleed Valve
The s h u t t l e valve has t w o separate functions and
p e r f o r m s each independently o f the other. T h e first
is t h a t of p r o v i d i n g fast release of the k i c k d o w n
band, and delayed smooth rear clutch engagement
w h e n the d r i v e r makes a " l i f t - f o o t " u p s h i f t f r o m
second to direct.
The second f u n c t i o n of the s h u t t l e valve is to regulate the application of the k i c k d o w n piston w h e n
m a k i n g h i g h speed (above a p p r o x i m a t e l y 30 m p h )
kickdowns.
e. Operational Summary
W i t h the D (drive) b u t t o n pushed i n , t h e manual
valve is positioned to govern the f u l l range of operat i o n of the transmission. W i t h the manual valve I n
t h e drive position, the f r o n t clutch is engaged and
the transmission w i l l t r a n s m i t d r i v e torque i n breakaway.
P u s h i n g I n the 2 (second) b u t t o n of t h e control
u n i t moves the manual valve so t h a t line pressure is
directed to the k i c k d o w n c i r c u i t of the 2-3 s h i f t valve.
Pushing i n t h e 1 (first) b u t t o n of the control u n i t
positions the manual valve so t h a t line pressure Is
directed to the k i c k d o w n c i r c u i t o f the 1-2 s h i f t valve.
Pushing i n t h e N ( n e u t r a l ) b u t t o n moves t h e
manual valve to a position w h i c h shuts off o i l flow
to the valve body. The torque converter and lubricat i o n system remains pressurized.
P u s h i n g i n the R (reverse) b u t t o n of the control
u n i t positions the manual valve so t h a t o i l pressure
is directed to apply the rear clutch and low-reverse
band.
MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND T E S T S
CAUTION
For safety reasons and to prevent possible damage
to the transmission . . . wide open throttle stall test
operations should not be attempted under any circumstances.
Good transmission operation depends d i r e c t l y upon
good engine performance. Therefore, i t is o f u t m o s t
importance t h a t the engine is o p e r a t i n g at f u l l efficiency and at proper idle speed before a t t e m p t i n g
to diagnose or correct any transmission operation.
The engine and t r a n s m i s s i o n should be w a r m e d up
to o p e r a t i n g temperature. A s h o r t drive, a p p r o x i m a t e l y five t o t e n miles, w i t h frequent stops and
s t a r t s w i l l produce n o r m a l o p e r a t i n g temperatures
to the t r a n s m i s s i o n and engine. Check o i l level.
A l l s h i f t s and k i c k d o w n s should occur w i t h i n t h e
speed ranges given i n the S h i f t P a t t e r n S u m m a r y
Chart.
N O T E : A l l shift speeds may vary somewhat due to
production tolerances, type of engine, rear axle ratios
and tire sizes. A l l shifts, however, should be smooth,
responsive and with no noticeable engine runaway.
6* OIL LEAKS
Leaks Which may be Corrected with
Transmission in Vehicle
Transmission o u t p u t shaft rear bushing o i l seal. E x tension gasket, Speedometer d r i v e pinion assembly.
Oil pan to filler tube connector. O i l pan t o transmission case. Regulator valve and torque converter cont r o l valve s p r i n g retainers. Regulator valve adjusti n g screw. Gearshift control cable seal r i n g and
housing gasket.
Governor, l i n , l u b r i c a t i o n , rear
clutch apply and t h r o t t l e (compensated) pressure
check plug's I n t r a n s m i s s i o n case or support (pressure
test h o l e s ) . N e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h . Oil cooler connections.
I f o i l is found inside the torque converter housing,
determine w h e t h e r i t is A u t o m a t i c Transmission
F l u i d or engine oil. Check t h e torque converter d r a i n
p l u g f o r tightness.
Leaks at these locations should be corrected, regardless o f how l i g h t . Correct b y t i g h t e n i n g loose
screws or plugs. W h e r e t h i s does not remedy the
s i t u a t i o n , replace t h e necessary gaskets, seals or
plugs.
" O " RING
SEAL
4
Ifi
CABLE
GUIDE
CABLE
HOUSING
/
4f
ADJUSTMENT
WHEEL
60x34
Leaks Requiring Removal of Transmission from Vehicle
Fig. 12—Gearshift Control C a b l e a n d Adjustment Wheel
Damaged transmission case. Damaged f r o n t o i l p u m p
housing. F r o n t oil p u m p housing screws or damaged
sealing washers. F r o n t oil p u m p housing seal (located i n the large f r o n t bore of the f r o n t o i l p u m p
h o u s i n g ) . Torque converter. Leaks at these locations m a y be corrected b y t i g h t e n i n g loose bolts o r
replacing damaged or f a u l t y parts.
( 5 ) Back the adjustment wheel off on cable housi n g (counter-clockwise) u n t i l only t w o or t h r e e
threads are showing behind t h e wheel on t h e housing (Fig. 12).
7. GEARSHIFT CONTROL C A B L E ADJUSTMENT
Gearshift Control Cable Adjustment (Fig. 11)
(1) Engage the R (reverse) push b u t t o n and d r a i n
a p p r o x i m a t e l y t w o quarts of fluid f r o m the t r a n s mission.
( 2 ) Remove t h e control cable a d j u s t m e n t wheel
lock screw.
(3) Remove the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g switch, cupped
washer and seal.
( 4 ) Have an assistant f i r m l y hold t h e R (reverse)
b u t t o n u n t i l the transmsision end of cable adjustm e n t has been completed.
N O T E : Check the wheel f o r
housing. Remove any d i r t o r
of t h e cable housing t h a t m a y
the cable housing threads w i t h
mission fluid.
free t u r n i n g on t h e
b u r r s i n the threads
interfere. Lubricate
a few drops o f trans-
( 6 ) Push the control cable housing into t h e case
w i t h j u s t enough force to overcome the " O " r i n g
f r i c t i o n and to b o t t o m the assembly. H o l d the cable
assembly centered i n t h e bore, and apply an i n w a r d
pressure of 2 to 3 pounds against the reverse detent.
Rotate the a d j u s t i n g wheel t o j u s t contact the case.
(7) T u r n t h e wheel clockwise j u s t enough t o make
the n e x t adjustment hole i n the wheel line up w i t h
t h e screw hole i n the case.
(8) C o u n t i n g t h i s hole as "number one," continue
t u r n i n g the wheel clockwise u n t i l the " f i f t h " hole
lines up w i t h the screw hole i n the case.
( 9 ) I n s t a l l the lock screw, t i g h t e n 30 t o 50 i n c h pounds torque.
THRO':;';.::
L I N K * 3c
NEUTRAL
STARTER
/ SWITCH
CUPPED
WASHER
"O"
RING
CONTROL
CABLE
LOCK
SCREW
/
ADJUSTMENT
WHEEL
Fig. 11 —Gearshift Control C a b l e Adjustment
60x32
SWITCH
56x228
Fig. 13—Neutral Starting Switch a n d Seal
22 — T O R Q U E F L I T E
TRANSMISSION
(10) I n s t a l l the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h as outlined i n Paragraph 7. Refill the transmission w i t h
automatic transmission fluid (Type " A " — S u f f i x "A")
to proper level.
8. NEUTRAL STARTING SWITCH — INSTALLING
A N D TESTING (Fig. 13)
a. Installation and Tests
I n s t a l l the concave s p r i n g (cupped) washer over the
threads of t h e n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h so t h a t the
concave (cupped) side of the washer Is towards t h e
transmission case. I n s t a l l the " 0 " r i n g seal over the
threads of the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h and up against
the washer.
b. Switch Lever Alignment
Check t h e location of the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h
lever Inside the transmission, as i l l u s t r a t e d i n F i g u r e
14.
Fig. 15—Neutral Starting Switch
( 1 ) Machine 1/32" f r o m the seating surface of the
switch, as I l l u s t r a t e d i n F i g u r e 15.
( 2 ) Clean the switch, replace the concave (cupped)
washer and " 0 " r i n g seal, and Install the s w i t c h .
( 3 ) T i g h t e n the s w i t c h u n t i l the test l i g h t j u s t
l i g h t s , t h e n t i g h t e n another % to / t u r n .
l
The lever should be dead center of the n e u t r a l
starter s w i t c h m o u n t i n g hole ( w h e n the lever Is i n
the n e u t r a l d e t e n t ) . Operation o f the s w i t c h is accomplished t h r o u g h the contacting plunger of the
s w i t c h and t h e manual lever. I n instances w h e r e t h e
lever Is not aligned properly, i t is recommended t h a t
the lever be bent w i t h a screwdriver, or other suitable tool, to the proper location.
W i t h the proper cable adjustment assured and the
N ( n e u t r a l ) b u t t o n depressed, make certain t h a t t h e
s w i t c h lever is properly aligned i n the center of the
n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h hole ( F i g . 1 4 ) . W i t h the test
leads connected to the b a t t e r y c u r r e n t and t e r m i n a l
of the s w i t c h , screw the s w i t c h i n t o t h e transmission
case u n t i l test l i g h t l i g h t s , t h e n t u r n the s w i t c h an
additional % to / t u r n .
l
2
Should the test l i g h t s t i l l f a i l to l i g h t and the seati n g surfaces have been cleaned to obtain a good
ground, i t is recommended t h a t the f o l l o w i n g modification be performed to the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h .
2
N O T E : The s w i t c h m u s t be t i g h t enough to prevent
oil leakage. I f i t is not, add a t h i n washer and retighten.
Refill the transmission to t h e proper level as outlined i n t h e L u b r i c a t i o n Group 0 . Check starter
operation by pushing the various push buttons and
r e t u r n i n g to neutral.
CAUTION
N e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h failure may occur due to
v e r y h i g h amperage c u r r e n t i o w l n g t h r o u g h the
s w i t c h . T h i s results when a j u m p e r w i r e or remote
control s t a r t i n g s w i t c h is i m p r o p e r l y connected, w h e n
placed i n t h e c i r c u i t when t a k i n g compression readings. I t Is I m p o r t a n t t h a t the j u m p e r leads be connected to the b a t t e r y t e r m i n a l and to the starter
s w i t c h t e r m i n a l ( t o w a r d s rear of c a r ) .
9. BAND ADIUSTMENTS
a. Kickdown Band
The k i c k d o w n band a d j u s t i n g screw is located on the
left side of the transmission case ( F i g . 1 ) .
( 1 ) Loosen the locknut and back off 5 t u r n s and
check the freeness of the a d j u s t i n g screw I n the
transmission case.
INCORRECT
CORRECT
5 8 X 16
Fig. 14—Lever Alignment
(2) U s i n g an inch-pound torque w r e n c h Tool C3380 w i t h adapter C-3583 or C-3705 (depending upon
the accessibility due to type of engine and exhaust
equipment) t i g h t e n the a d j u s t i n g screw to a reading
of 47 to 50 inch-pounds torque.
T O R Q U E F L I T E T R A N S M I S S I O N — 23
N O T E : T h i s w i l l be a t r u e torque of 70 t o 75 Inchpounds, w h i c h should be used I f t h e torque w r e n c h
Tool C-3380 Is used w i t h o u t the adapter Tool C-3583
or Tool C-3705 (as m a y be done I f t h e adjustment Is
made w i t h the transmission removed f r o m the
vehicle).
N O T E : A l l DeSoto models w i l l take a 2 t u r n adjustment.
( 3 ) Back off the a d j u s t i n g screw according to t h e
specifications applicable t o t h e car model. ( Refer t o
C h a r t on Specification page.)
( 4 ) H o l d i n g the a d j u s t i n g screw, t i g h t e n t h e lock
nut 30 to 35 foot-pounds torque.
b. Low-Reverse Band
The low-reverse band a d j u s t i n g screw is located on
the r i g h t side of t h e transmission case ( F i g . 2).
(1) Loosen the lock n u t and back off 5 t u r n s and
check f o r freeness o f t h e a d j u s t i n g screw I n t h e transmission case.
(2) U s i n g w r e n c h Tool .C-3380 w i t h adapter Tool
C-3583 or Tool C-3705, t i g h t e n t o a r e a d i n g of 47 t o
50 Inch-pounds torque. T h i s w i l l be a t r u e torque o f
70 t o 75 inch-pounds, w h i c h should be used i f t h e
torque w r e n c h Tool C-3380 is used w i t h o u t the
adapter Tool C-3584 (as m a y be done I f adjustment
Is made w i t h the transmission removed f r o m the
vehicle).
(3) Back off the a d j u s t i n g screw exactly 214 t u r n s
(all models).
(4) H o l d i n g the a d j u s t i n g screw, t i g h t e n t h e lock
nut to specifications 30 to 35 foot pounds torque.
Fig. 17—Checking Line Pressure
10.
THROTTLE LINKAGE ADJUSTMENTS
(Refer to Fig. 1 6 )
( 1 ) W i t h t h e engine a t operating temperature,
carburetor off t h e fast Idle cam and transmission i n
n e u t r a l , a d j u s t idle speed 475 to 500 r p m (use t a c h o m e t e r ) , ( r a m m a n i f o l d 725 t o 750 r p m ) .
(2) Loosen t h e t h r o t t l e linkage adjustment lock
n u t s o n b o t h the c a r b u r e t o r r o d and the transmission
t h r o t t l e valve r o d .
( 3 ) I n s e r t a 3 / 1 6 " locating p i n r o d or d r i l l b i t i n
t h e hole and t h e accelerator shaft bracket and i n t o
the elongated hole of t h e t h r o t t l e lever.
( 4 ) W i t h t h e r o d i n p o s i t i o n , hold t h e t r a n s m i s sion t h r o t t l e valve lever a l l the w a y f o r w a r d (closed
p o s i t i o n ) , and t i g h t e n transmission t o accelerator
lever assembly r o d a d j u s t i n g l o c k n u t "A".
( 5 ) Remove t h e l o c a t i n g p i n or t h e r o d f r o m the
accelerator lever, shaft and b r a c k e t assembly.
(6) W i t h t h e carburetor t h r o t t l e lever off t h e fast
idle cam and against t h e idle stop screw, move the
r e a r h a l f of t h e c a r b u r e t o r t h r o t t l e r o d r e a r w a r d
u n t i l the stop i n the t r a n s m i s s i o n is felt, and t i g h t e n
locknut W\
H
ADJUSTMENT
LOCK NUT " A "
60x171
Fig. 16—Throttle Linkage Adjustments
(7) T h e accelerator pedal should be a t an angle o f
114 degrees t o the horizontal. I f necessary t o correct,
adjust t h e pedal angle b y r e m o v i n g the accelerator
pedal end of the bellcrank t o pedal rod, and shorteni n g or l e n g t h e n i n g t h e r o d b y loosening t h e l o c k n u t
at t h e swivel end and r o t a t i n g the swivel. Reinstall
( 1 ) Remove t h e pipe p l u g f r o m the line pressure
take-off hole located on t h e left side o f t h e t r a n s m i s sion case ( F i g . 1 ) . I n s t a l l t h e gauge, Tool C-2393
(300 p s i ) , a t t h i s p o i n t ( F i g . 1 7 ) .
I f the line pressure is n o t correct, adjust as f o l l o w s :
( 2 ) Loosen the lock n u t on the r e g u l a t o r valve
a d j u s t i n g screw ( F i g . 2 ) .
( 3 ) T u r n t h e a d j u s t i n g screw clockwise to i n crease or counter-clockwise t o decrease line pressure.
L i n e pressure adjustment m u s t be made i n D (drive)
position w i t h the engine at 1200 r p m , w i t h wheel
t u r n i n g and transmission upshifted i n t o direct speed.
A l l line pressure adjustments should f a l l w i t h i n
the l i m i t s specified i n t h e table shown f o r a l l other
push b u t t o n positions.
Fig. 18—Checking Governor Pressure
t h e r o d and t i g h t e n t h e l o c k n u t . Be sure the r o d is
p r o p e r l y aligned t o prevent b i n d i n g . Poor engine
performance due to the carburetor t h r o t t l e n o t openi n g f u l l y o r lack o f k i c k d o w n m a y r e s u l t i f accelerat o r pedal angle is incorrect.
*For cars equipped w i t h " R a m M a n i f o l d " engines ref e r t o Service I n f o r m a t i o n a t t h e end o f t h i s section.
11. H Y D R A U L I C CONTROL PRESSURE C H E C K S
A N D ADJUSTMENTS
a. L i n e Pressure
L i n e Pressure a d j u s t m e n t m u s t be made i n D ( d r i v e )
position w i t h engine a t 1200 r p m and wheels free t o
t u r n . O i l m u s t be a t n o r m a l o p e r a t i n g t e m p e r a t u r e
( 1 5 0 ° F . to 2 0 0 ° F . ) .
I f line pressure cannot be s a t i s f a c t o r i l y adjusted,
check "Service Diagnosis C h a r t . "
b. G o v e r n o r Pressure (see F i g . 18)
( 1 ) Remove t h e pipe p l u g f r o m the governor pressure take-off hole located on the lower left side o f
the o u t p u t shaft support ( F i g . 1 ) .
( 2 ) I n s t a l l gauge, Tool C - 3 2 9 2 (100 p s i ) .
N O T E : F o r cars equipped w i t h " R a m M a n i f o l d " engines, r e f e r t o Governor Pressure C h a r t under Service I n f o r m a t i o n , P a r a g r a p h — - .
I f the governor pressure doesn't correspond to the
car speed, check the line pressure and t h e "Service
Diagnosis C h a r t . "
c. Lubrication Pressure
( 1 ) Remove the oil cooler line and fitting f r o m the
l u b r i c a t i o n pressure hole located on t h e left side o f
t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n case ( F i g . 1 ) .
*LINE P R E S S U R E CHART
Push
Button
Position
R
N
D (Shifted into Direct)
2
1
D
Rear Wheels
Free to
_
Free t o
Free t o
Free • t o
Free to
N O T E : F o r cars equipped w i t h " R a m M a n i f o l d " engines
I n f o r m a t i o n at t h e end o f t h i s section.
Turn
Turn
Turn
Turn
Turn
Engine
Speed
(rpm)
Line
Pressure
(psi)
1600
1200
1200
1200
1200
3500
200-240
85-95
89 - 91
85-95
85-95
93 - 100
refer to L i n e Pressure C h a r t under
Service
GOVERNOR P R E S S U R E CHART
Push B u t t o n
Position
Rear Wheels
Models
2 (Second)
D (Drive)
D (Drive
Governor
Pressure
Car Speed
PS-1, PS-3
Free t o T u r n
Free t o T u r n
Free to T u r n
15-20
37-44
61-68
( 2 ) I n s t a l l gauge, Tool C-3292 (100 p s i ) . W i t h engine r u n n i n g at 800 r p m i n n e u t r a l , l u b r i c a t i o n pressure should be a p p r o x i m a t e l y 10 t o 30 psi.
I f the pressure is e x t r e m e l y h i g h (above 50 psi)
remove t h e Torque Converter Control Valve ( F i g . 2)
and inspect f o r a d i r t y o r s t i c k i n g valve, or a dist o r t e d s p r i n g or regulator valve body.
PC-1
PC-2
PC-3
PY-1
18-22
41-50
69-77
18-22
43-51
72-80
18-23
43-51
72-80
19-24
45-54
75-83
15 psi
50 psi
75 psi
t h e n r e t u r n i t to closed t h r o t t l e .
Compensated
t h r o t t l e pressure should rise to approximately 80 to
90 psi and t h e n f a l l smoothly w i t h o u t hesitation and
should always r e t u r n to a consistent reading at closed
t h r o t t l e . F a i l u r e t o do t h i s indicates f a u l t y t h r o t t l e
compensated valve or t h r o t t l e valve operation. The
valve body assembly should t h e n be t h o r o u g h l y
cleaned and these steps repeated before c o n t i n u i n g
w i t h a t h r o t t l e pressure adjustment.
d. Throttle Compensated Pressure
( 1 ) Raise vehicle off the
turn).
floor
(wheels free
to
( 2 ) I n s t a l l gauge, Tool C-3292 (100 psi) at t h r o t t l e
compensated pressure take-off p l u g (refer t o F i g . 2 ) .
( 3 ) Disconnect the bell crank to
t h r o t t l e linkage at the transmission.
transmission
( 4 ) S t a r t engine and place the transmission i n
" 2 " (second) position.
( 5 ) W h i l e h o l d i n g the transmission t h r o t t l e lever
towards t h e closed t h r o t t l e position (against t h e i n t e r n a l stop) increase engine speed slowly (using
accelerator pedal or suitable t h r o t t l e control fixture)
to a p p r o x i m a t e l y 850 r p m t o obtain an u p s h i f t i n t o
2nd speed.
A f t e r the s h i f t takes place, compensated t h r o t t l e
pressure should read 10 t o 16 psi.
( 6 ) Move t h r o t t l e lever ( a t transmission) slowly
towards f u l l t h r o t t l e . Compensated t h r o t t l e pressure should begin to rise a f t e r a p p r o x i m a t e l y 5 degrees movement of the t h r o t t l e lever. I f compensated t h r o t t l e pressure rises i m m e d i a t e l y w h e n the
lever is moved, or i f the pressure is above 16 p s i b u t
fails to rise a f t e r a p p r o x i m a t e l y 5 degrees movement,
the t h r o t t l e pressure should be adjusted (refer to
Paragraph E ) .
( 7 ) Before stopping t h e engine, advance the
t h r o t t l e control lever ( a t transmission) slowly and
e.
Adjusting Compensated Throttle Pressure
N O T E : Check the " T h r o t t l e Compensated Pressure"
as o u t l i n e d i n P a r a g r a p h 10-D before m a k i n g t h i s
a d j u s t m e n t . T h e n proceed as f o l l o w s :
( 1 ) I f t h e gauge r e a d i n g is outside t h e 10 t o 16
psi l i m i t s , adjust the t h r o t t l e valve l i n k (at t h e slotted lower end) F i g u r e 19 t o o b t a i n t h i s reading.
U s u a l l y t o o b t a i n t h e smoothest 1-2 u p s h i f t , i t is
recommended t h a t the pressure r e a d i n g be a t t h e
h i g h l i m i t 16 psi. T i g h t e n t h e slotted l i n k clamp
THROTTLE
LINKAGE
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ M
! •
, JMBSBEBI
THROTTLE LEVER
CONTROL
CABLE
\
'i^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^S^W
MgB^
j^-rr^ " •; •
Wm^
60x1250
Fig. If—Throttle Compensated Pressure Adjustment
bolt. The transmission t h r o t t l e linkage a d j u s t m e n t
is now correct, however, f o r a i d i n g i n f u t u r e adjustments, i t is recommended t h a t t h e t h r o t t l e valve
stop screw be correctly set.
( 2 ) Push i n the " N " N e u t r a l b u t t o n . Block t h e
carburetor choke i n t h e open position.
(3) Drain
the
transmission
fluid.
Remove
the
transmission o i l pan.
( 4 ) A d j u s t the transmission t h r o t t l e valve stop
screw so t h a t the end of the stop screw j u s t contacts
the t h r o t t l e lever w i t h t h e accelerator pedal released.
T i g h t e n the stop screw lock n u t .
( 5 ) I n s t a l l the transmission o i l pan u s i n g a new
gasket. Refill the transmission to proper fluid level.
SERVICING T H E G E A R SHIFT CONTROL UNIT
12. REMOVAL A N D INSTALLATION
a. Removal
(1)
Disconnect one b a t t e r y cable.
( 2 ) Disconnect the back-up l i g h t s w i t c h w i r e connectors o f push b u t t o n control, and t h e i l l u m i n a t i n g
lamp leads f r o m the rear of the i n s t r u m e n t panel.
N O T E : On Imperial Models, in order to get access to
the control unit from the rear of the instrument
panel, the speedometer should be removed. Refer to
the Electrical Group 8 of this Manual under "Instruments" for removal procedures.
( 3 ) Remove the screws of push b u t t o n face plate
and remove the push buttons b y p u l l i n g i t off push
b u t t o n slide. Remove the lamp bulb.
( 4 ) Remove t h e control housing s t u d n u t s t h a t
are now accessible and remove t h e control and the
cable f r o m the rear of t h e i n s t r u m e n t panel.
( 5 ) Remove t h e clip a t t a c h i n g control cable to the
actuator and the screws holding t h e cable bracket to
the control housing.
( 4 ) Connect the back-up l i g h t s w i t c h and the push
b u t t o n i l l u m i n a t i n g l a m p wires.
c. Back-Up Light Switch Replacement
(when so equipped)
Remove the gearshift control housing assembly. The
back-up l i g h t s w i t c h is fastened to the control b y
f o u r tabs. S t r a i g h t e n t h e tabs to remove s w i t c h .
I n s t a l l the replacement s w i t c h and secure to control
housing b y bending tabs. I n s t a l l the gearshift cont r o l housing and reconnect the s w i t c h and lamp wires.
13. PUSH BUTTON UNIT LAMP "BULB REPLACEMENT
The push b u t t o n i l l u m i n a t i n g bulb can easily be replaced b y r e m o v i n g the push b u t t o n face plate and
r e m o v i n g one or more of the center push buttons.
14. GEARSHIFT CONTROL CABLE
(TRANSMISSION END)
a. Removal (Fig. 20)
(1) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and d r a i n t w o
quarts ( a p p r o x i m a t e l y ) of o i l f r o m t h e transmission.
CAUTION
Oil may be hot!
b. Installation
(1) I n s e r t t h e end o f cable on t h e actuator and
reassemble the clip. Place the cable bracket on the
control u n i t and i n s t a l l the screws securely.
(2) Carefully guide the u n i t i n t o p o s i t i o n f r o m
the r e a r o f the i n s t r u m e n t panel and i n s t a l l t h e
a t t a c h i n g stud nuts f r o m t h e f r o n t side of i n s t r u m e n t panel.
( 3 ) I n s t a l l the l a m p b u i l t i n the push b u t t o n cont r o l and r e i n s t a l l the push b u t t o n s onto t h e control
actuator slides. Replace the face plate.
( 2 ) Engage the 1 (first) push b u t t o n .
( 3 ) Remove the control cable adjustment wheel
lock screw.
( 4 ) Remove n e u t r a l s t a r t e r s w i t c h , cupped washer
and seal.
( 5 ) W i t h a screwdriver, inserted t h r o u g h the
s w i t c h hole, push g e n t l y against u p w a r d p r o j e c t i n g
p o r t i o n o f the control cable adapter s p r i n g and p u l l
o u t w a r d on cable and remove the cable assembly f r o m
the transmission case.
THROTTLE
C O N T R O L LEVER
" ^ v i ^ H H H k ' - it. " ^ 'li^^^Kl^^^H
xSiîHBBBk'-' €^
^^W^^^^^^B
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ M
AA A M I t A i
MANUAL
CONTROL
CABLE
i^îf^^KS^fiBHHHr
M^lf^^^HHHBS^Li
;
4
:; J
slide the cable housing i n t o the case w i t h j u s t
force t o overcome " 0 " r i n g f r i c t i o n and the
lever assembly bottoms against t h e reverse
P u l l out on the cable to make sure t h a t the
s p r i n g has engaged t h e cable end.
enough
manual
detent.
adapter
( 4 ) H o l d t h e c o n t r o l cable assembly centered i n
t h e bore o f the hole i n the transmission case and
apply an i n w a r d pressure o f a p p r o x i m a t e l y 2 to 3
pounds against the reverse detent. Rotate the adj u s t i n g wheel clockwise u n t i l i t j u s t contacts t h e
transmission case.
^^^^
60x33
( 5 ) T u r n the wheel clockwise j u s t enough to make
the n e x t adjustment hole i n the wheel line up w i t h
t h e screw hole i n t h e case.
Fig. 20—Removal of the Gearshift Control Cable
b. Installation (Fig. 12)
( 1 ) Have an assistant engage t h e R (reverse)
b u t t o n and hold i t f i r m l y engaged u n t i l the cable
attachment operation is completed.
( 2 ) Back the adjustment wheel off on the cable
housing (counter-clockwise) u n t i l only t w o or three
threads are s h o w i n g behind the wheel on the guide.
( 3 ) L u b r i c a t e t h e cable housing w i t h t r a n s m i s sion fluid, insert t h e cable w i r e i n the adapter, and
( 8 ) C o u n t i n g t h i s hole as "number one," continue
t u r n i n g the wheel clockwise u n t i l the f i f t h hole lines
up w i t h the screw hole i n the case.
(7) I n s t a l l t h e lock screw, t i g h t e n 30 t o 50 i n c h pounds torque.
( 8 ) I n s t a l l the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h as outlined
i n P a r a g r a p h 8. Refill the transmission w i t h A u t o m a t i c Transmission F l u i d Type " A " , Suffix " A " to
proper level.
SERVICING O F COMPONENT PARTS
WITH TRANSMISSION IN V E H I C L E
t h e speedometer pinion and sleeve assembly
t h e transmission extension. Refer to chart.
15. SPEEDOMETER PINION
a. Removal
Disconnect the speedometer cable and the housing
f r o m t h e drive p i n i o n and sleeve assembly. Remove
b. Installation
I n s t a l l the speedometer p i n i o n and sleeve assembly
S P E E D O M E T E R PINION USAGE CHART
(TorqueFlite Transmission)
T i r e Size
A x l e Ratio—Speedometer P i n i o n Operation I n d i c a t i n g
N u m b e r o f P i n i o n Gear Teeth and Color
^
A x l e Ratios ( A l l Models)
2.93:1
*3.31:1
**3.54:1
8.00 x 14
8.50 x 14
*9.00xl4
17 - Red
17 - Red
19 - L . Purple
20 - L . Blue
19 - L. Purple
——
21 - Yellow
20 - L . Blue
^
• S t a n d a r d on C-300F only.
**DeSoto Cars o n l y .
^
from
^
**3.73:1
21-Yellow
21 - Yellow
In the transmission extension and t i g h t e n 40 to 45
foot-pounds torque.
16. NEUTRAL STARTING SWITCH
a. Removal
D r a i n a p p r o x i m a t e l y three quarts of fluid f r o m the
transmission b y disconnecting filler tube at o i l pan
connector ( m a y be necessary to loosen the filler tube
support bracket s c r e w ) . Remove w i r e at s w i t c h t h e
remove s w i t c h .
b. Installation
W i t h the assistance of the r e t r i e v i n g tool, place
valve i n position and seat p r o p e r l y i n regulator valve
body. I n s t a l l torque converter control valve spring,
gasket and retainer and t i g h t e n to 40 foot-pounds
torque.
19. OIL PAN
a. Removal
Refer to P a r a g r a p h 8.
The o i l pan m a y be removed a f t e r disconnecting the
filler tube and d r a i n i n g the o i l f r o m the transmission.
Remove screws and drop pan.
17. REGULATOR V A L V E ASSEMBLY
b. Installation
a. Removal
U s i n g a new gasket, i n s t a l l the o i l pan and t i g h t e n
bolts 12 to 17 foot-pounds torque. Reconnect filler
tube and refill transmission w i t h A u t o m a t i c Transmission F l u i d (Type " A " — Suffix " A " ) . Refer t o
L u b r i c a t i o n Group D .
b. Installation
Remove the transmission r e g u l a t o r valve s p r i n g retainer, the gasket, cup, s p r i n g and sleeve. U s i n g a
mechanical r e t r i e v e r or a piece of welding r o d
( 5 / 3 2 " ) inserted i n end of valve, remove valve ( F i g .
21).
20. V A L V E BODY AND TRANSFER PLATE
ASSEMBLY O R A C C U M U L A T O R PISTON
b. Installation
W i t h the assistance o f the r e t r i e v i n g tool, place t h e
valve i n position and seat p r o p e r l y i n regulator valve
body. I n s t a l l r e g u l a t o r valve spring, sleeve, cup,
gasket and retainer and t i g h t e n t o 50 foot-pounds
torque. Check the line pressure and adjust i f necessary.
18. TORQUE CONVERTER CONTROL VALVE
ASSEMBLY
a. Removal
Remove t h e torque converter control valve s p r i n g
retainer, gasket and s p r i n g . U s i n g a mechanical ret r i e v e r or a piece o f w e l d i n g r o d ( % " ) inserted i n
end o f valve, remove valve.
a. Removal
(1) Engage R (reverse) push b u t t o n and remove
oil pan and clean off the d i r t around t h e t h r o t t l e
shaft.
( 2 ) Disconnect t h r o t t l e linkage
t h r o t t l e valve lever and washer.
and
remove
( 3 ) Remove the manual control lever to the cable
adapter stud n u t .
( 4 ) Remove the o i l strainer and t r a n s f e r plate
bolts and lower valve body and t r a n s f e r plate assemb l y . Be careful not to lose the accumulator piston
s p r i n g and cable adapter.
b. Installation
(1) Clean the m a t i n g surfaces and check f o r b u r r s
on b o t h the transmission case and t h e valve body
t r a n s f e r plate.
( 2 ) Place manual lever i n the reverse position (all
the way i n ) .
TRANSMISSION KFGUi A ' .>
VAIVE-^
^
PIECE O F WELDING RO» >
•
*.
f
53x55 A
Fig. 21—Removing Regulator V a l v e
( 3 ) I n s t a l l the accumulator piston s p r i n g i n t o recess i n top of the t r a n s f e r plate and carefully guide
t h e s p r i n g up i n t o t h e accumulator p i s t o n as the
t r a n s f e r plate and valve body are placed up against
t h e transmission case. A t the same t i m e index the
cable adapter stud i n t o the manual control lever.
I n s t a l l the t r a n s f e r plate bolts and washers (leaving
f o u r holes vacant to a t t a c h o i l s t r a i n e r ) d r a w d o w n
evenly and t i g h t e n 14 to 16 foot-pounds torque. I n s t a l l and t i g h t e n the stud n u t securely. I n s t a l l o i l
TORQUEFLITE
s t r a i n e r and t i g h t e n the r e m a i n i n g bolts 14 to 16
foot-pounds torque.
TRANSMISSION —
29
TOOL
( 4 ) I n s t a l l t h e t h r o t t l e valve lever and washer and
reconnect the t h r o t t l e linkage.
( 5 ) I n s t a l l o i l pan and refill the transmission w i t h
A u t o m a t i c Transmission F l u i d ( T y p e " A " — Suffix
" A " ) to proper level.
•
( 6 ) A d j u s t the t h r o t t l e linkage.
21. I I C 1 D O W N PISTON
-
4-'
57x98
Fig. 23—Removing Handbrake Drum a n d
a. Removal
Flange Assembly
( 1 ) Remove oil pan and valve body assembly.
( 2 ) Loosen the k i c k d o w n band a d j u s t i n g screw
lock n u t and back out screw sufficiently to remove
anchor and s t r u t .
( 3 ) I n s t a l l compressing Tool C-3529 or C-3289
(modified), apply sufficient pressure on k i c k d o w n
piston r o d guide and remove snap r i n g .
( 4 ) Remove tool, piston r o d guide, piston s p r i n g
and r o d . U s i n g C-484 pliers, remove the k i c k d o w n
piston f r o m transmission case ( F i g . 2 2 ) . Refer
to K i c k d o w n Piston Inspection, P a r a g r a p h 82.
b. Installation
case and place k i c k d o w n piston r o d guide over s p r i n g ,
compress s p r i n g and i n s t a l l snap r i n g .
Remove
compressing tool.
( 4 ) Place the k i c k d o w n band s t r u t i n t o position
i n the band and lever and compress band end sufficiently
t o i n s t a l l the anchor over t h e a d j u s t i n g
screw.
( 5 ) A d j u s t k i c k d o w n band as outlined under
"Maintenance, A d j u s t m e n t s and Tests," P a r a g r a p h
9A).
( 6 ) I n s t a l l valve body assembly and o i l pan.
( 1 ) L u b r i c a t e the piston seal r i n g s and place pist o n i n position, compress outer r i n g and s t a r t assemb l y i n t o case. W i t h t h e piston properly centered so as
not to damage r i n g s , tap l i g h t l y u n t i l piston bottoms
i n case.
( 2 ) Place the k i c k d o w n piston r o d assembly i n
piston and slide piston s p r i n g over k i c k d o w n piston
rod.
( 3 ) I n s t a l l Tool C-3529 or C-3289 (Modified)
on
22. OUTPUT SHAFT REAR OIL SEAL
a. Removal
( 1 ) Disconnect t h e f r o n t universal j o i n t .
( 2 ) A p p l y p a r k i n g brake or use wrench Tool C3281 ( F i g . 23) and remove flange nut. Release the
p a r k i n g brake ( i f applied) and remove the p a r k i n g
brake flange and d r u m assembly. Use puller Tool
C-452, i f necessary.
^TOOL
"JCKDOWN
•WO PISTON
REAR
TOC
EXTENSION
"OOL
-4
" * ..C6x661 A
Fig. 22—Removal a n d Installation of Kickdown Piston
60x30
Fig. 24—Removing Output Shaft Rear Bearing Oil Seal
( 3 ) Remove the brake
s p r i n g and grease shield.
support
grease
shield
( 4 ) I f screwdriver or sharp i n s t r u m e n t is used i n
p e r f o r m i n g t h i s operation, care m u s t be exercised
not to damage t h e neoprene sealing surface at bott o m of the shield.
I n s t a l l puller, Tool C-3690 and remove t h e transmission o u t p u t shaft rear b u s h i n g o i l seal ( F i g . 2 4 ) .
b. Installation
REAR
EXTENSION^
( 1 ) U s i n g d r i v e r , Tool C-3691, i n s t a l l the o u t p u t
shaft rear o i l seal ( w i t h m e t a l p o r t i o n of seal f a c i n g
down i n housing bore) u n t i l tool bottoms on extension, as shown i n F i g u r e 25.
60x29
( 2 ) I n s t a l l brake support grease shield on extension housing. I n d e n t on grease shield m u s t m a t c h
groove i n extension f o r correct positioning. Also,
shield m u s t be located on extension f a r enough to
p e r m i t i n s t a l l a t i o n of s p r i n g . I n s t a l l grease shield
s p r i n g w i t h opening i n s p r i n g t o w a r d a d j u s t i n g
sleeve.
( 3 ) Reinstall p a r k i n g b r a k e flange and d r u m assembly, washer (convex side t o w a r d n u t ) and n u t .
A p p l y p a r k i n g brake or use wrench, Tool C-3281, and
t i g h t e n n u t to 175. foot-pounds torque-.
( 4 ) Reconnect f r o n t universal j o i n t and t i g h t e n
bolts 33 to 37 foot-pounds torque. Check the t r a n s mission fluid level and refill i f necessary.
23. EXTENSION HOUSING OR BUSHING ..
a. Removal
( 1 ) D r a i n a p p r o x i m a t e l y t w o quarts o f fluid f r o m
the transmission.
( 2 ) Disconnect f r o n t universal j o i n t .
St
"
REAR EXTENSION
60x31
Fig. 25—Installing Output Shaft Rear Bearing Oil Seal
Fig. 26—Removing Output Shaft Rear
Bushing
( 3 ) Remove the propeller shaft flange and p a r k i n g brake d r u m assembly, using puller Tool C-452,
i f necessary.
( 4 ) Disconnect p a r k i n g brake and speedometer
cables. Remove the speedometer drive pinion sleeve
assembly.
I f the o u t p u t shaft rear bushing is to be replaced,
the o i l seal m u s t be removed a t t h i s p o i n t ; otherwise,
step N o . 5 should not be performed.
( 5 ) I n s t a l l puller, Tool C-3690, and remove o u t p u t
shaft o i l seal.
( 6 ) I n s t a l l the engine support fixture, Tool C3487. Refer to Paragraph 26, Step N o . 10. A d j u s t
fixture to support t h e w e i g h t of the engine. Raise
engine s l i g h t l y , remove the crossmember t o t o r s i o n
bar bracket bolts. (Rear m o t o r support and bracket
m a y be left on transmission extension f o r t r a n s m i s sion repairs or t r a n s f e r r e d to new parts after extension housing has been removed).
Remove the t w o screws h o l d i n g the extension
housing to support plate and i n s t a l l guide studs,
Tool C-3283 and t h e n remove the balance of t h e
screws. Due to interference at the insulator, i t w i l l
be necessary to back the lower screw out as the extension is removed. Do not allow the o u t p u t shaft
support to slide away f r o m transmission case w h i l e
extension is being removed.
Remove extension and p a r k i n g brake as one assemb l y . I f care is used, i t is not necessary t o remove t h e
p a r k i n g brake support and shoe assemblies f r o m
extension to replace the o u t p u t shaft rear b u s h i n g .
( 7 ) W i t h the larger end o f the extension housing
on a flat surface, use bushing r e m o v i n g d r i v e r , Tool
TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION —31
Fig, 27—Installing Output Shaft Rear Bushing
Fig. 29—Removal a n d Installation of Governor V a l v e
Shaft a n d V a l v e
C-3689, and d r i v e b u s h i n g out of housing. (Refer t o
Fig. 26).
b. Installation
( 1 ) Place a new b u s h i n g on d r i v e burnisher, Tool
C-3692, w i t h l u b r i c a t i o n hole i n bushing t o w a r d end
of the tool. A l i g n the hole i n b u s h i n g w i t h l u b r i cation hole i n the housing and d r i v e the b u s h i n g
into housing u n t i l the tool bottoms (refer to F i g . 2 7 ) .
( 2 ) W h i l e h o l d i n g the screw of tool ( F i g . 28)
to prevent t u r n i n g , t u r n n u t on tool u n t i l b u r n i s h e r
is pulled back out of b u s h i n g to c o r r e c t l y size bushing. Recheck i n d e x i n g of l u b r i c a t i o n hole i n b u s h i n g
w i t h housing.
over guide studs i n t r a n s m i s s i o n case up against outp u t shaft support. Do n o t use sealing m a t e r i a l on
gasket.
( 5 ) S t a r t extension to case screws. Due to i n t e r ference of the m o u n t i n g insulator, i t w i l l be necessary to s t a r t t h e b o t t o m extension housing t o case
screw as the extension is pushed i n t o position against
the support. Remove the guide studs and install t h e
r e m a i n i n g screws and t i g h t e n 25 to 30 foot-pounds
torque. T u r n o u t p u t shaft to make sure i t t u r n s
freely.
( 6 ) L o w e r the t r a n s m i s s i o n and install crossmember bolts. Remove engine support fixture.
( 3 ) Use d r i v e r , Tool C-3691, i n s t a l l o u t p u t shaft
oil seal ( w i t h m e t a l p o r t i o n of seal f a c i n g down i n
housing bore) u n t i l tool bottoms on extension.
( 7 ) Reconnect p a r k i n g brake cable. I n s t a l l speedometer p i n i o n sleeve and t i g h t e n 40 to 45 foot-pounds
torque and connect cable.
( 4 ) U s i n g a new gasket, slide extension assembly
( 8 ) I n s t a l l the propeller shaft flange and d r u m
assembly, washer and n u t and t i g h t e n to 175 footpounds torque. Connect f r o n t universal j o i n t and
t i g h t e n n u t s 33 to 37 foot-pounds torque.
( 9 ) Refill t h e transmission to proper fluid level.
24. GOVERNOR
a. Removal
( 1 ) Remove extension assembly as described i n
previous section.
( 2 ) Remove governor valve shaft snap r i n g f r o m
the w e i g h t end of the shaft and remove the shaft and
valve ( F i g . 2 9 ) .
Fig. 28—Burnishing Output Shaft Bushing
( 3 ) U s i n g Tool C-3229, remove the governor
w e i g h t assembly snap r i n g (large) and remove governor w e i g h t . T h e p r i m a r y cause of governor opera t i n g failures is due to i m p r o p e r operation o f the
32 —
governor valve w h i c h m a y be s t i c k i n g i n housing
or t r a v e l restricted b y chips or other f o r e i g n m a t t e r .
I f inspection reveals necessity f o r f u r t h e r governor
servicing, t h e n remove t h e governor support l o c a t i n g
screw and remove governor and support assembly
f r o m rear oil pump housing ( F i g . 3 0 ) . N o r m a l
servicing does not require removal of the governor
body f r o m the governor support. I f condition warr a n t s removal of governor body f r o m governor supp o r t , do not t i g h t e n governor body screws w h e n
reassembling u n t i l governor body support is located
on o u t p u t shaft.
b. Installation
( 1 ) Slide the governor body and support assemb l y into oil pump housing. I t w i l l be necessary to
compress seal r i n g s on governor support. D o n o t
force.
( 2 ) A l i g n the locating hole i n o u t p u t shaft w i t h
hole i n governor support, i n s t a l l set screw and t i g h t en to 60-80 inch-pounds. I f the governor body had
been removed f r o m support, the f o u r governor body
screws should now be t i g h t e n e d .
( 3 ) Place the governor w e i g h t assembly (seconda r y w e i g h t snap r i n g f a c i n g o u t ) i n t o governor body,
use pliers, Tool C-3229, and i n s t a l l snap r i n g , convex
side f a c i n g out.
( 4 ) Slide the governor valve over governor valve
shaft, insert the shaft and w e i g h t i n t o governor
w e i g h t and install snap r i n g securely ( F i g . 3 1 ) .
Check operation of governor w e i g h t assembly and
valve b y t u r n i n g o u t p u t shaft. B o t h should f a l l
freely i n body.
( 5 ) I n s t a l l the transmission extension.
SNAP RINGS
57x37
Fig. 31—Positioning Governor V a l v e Shaft Snap Rings
in Grooves
25. BEAR OIL PUMP
a. Removal
( 1 ) Remove the transmission extension and governor assembly as outlined i n Paragraph 24.
( 2 ) Remove oil pump housing to o u t p u t shaft supp o r t screws and install guide studs, Tool C-3288.
Remove pump housing and gear f r o m o u t p u t shaft.
Use dye (or other suitable m a t e r i a l ) to m a r k pump
gears i n r e l a t i o n to t h e p u m p housing face.
N O T E : Do not use scribe. O i l pump pinion is keyed
to o u t p u t shaft pinion by a s m a l l ball. Use care
w h e n r e m o v i n g pinion so as not to lose ball.
b. Installation
( 1 ) Slide the governor support and body assemb l y i n t o position i n rear o i l p u m p housing. Compress
the seal r i n g s as support enters o i l pump housing.
D o not force.
( 2 ) Place t h e oil p u m p p i n i o n ball i n ball pocket
i n o u t p u t shaft. Place the rear o i l pump p i n i o n (as
m a r k e d w h e n removed) over o u t p u t shaft and i n t o
position a l i g n i n g k e y w a y i n the pinion w i t h the ball
i n shaft.
( 3 ) W i t h the rear oil p u m p gear properly positioned i n p u m p housing (check m a r k i n g ) , slide the
rear o i l pump and governor assemblies over o u t p u t
shaft and guide studs into position against support.
There are t w o e x t r a holes i n housing w h i c h are used
f o r vents. Make definitely sure y o u do n o t a t t e m p t
t o i n s t a l l screw i n these holes.
( 4 ) Remove t h e guide studs, i n s t a l l o i l p u m p housi n g t o o u t p u t shaft support screws and t i g h t e n 10 t o
12 foot-pounds torque. T u r n o u t p u t shaft to make
sure p u m p gears are free to rotate. I f not, remove
p u m p to determine cause of b i n d i n g .
( 5 ) A l i g n locating hole i n o u t p u t shaft to locating
screw hole i n governor s u p p o r t ; install locating screw
and t i g h t e n .
Fig. 30—Removal a n d installation of Governor Body
a n d Support A s s e m b l y
Check operation of the governor w e i g h t assembly
and valve by t u r n i n g o u t p u t shaft. B o t h w e i g h t s
should f a l l freely i n body.
( 6 ) I n s t a l l t h e transmission extension.
DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION AND A S S E M B L Y
OF COMPONENT PARTS
26. R E M O V A L O F TRANSMISSION F R O M VEHICLE
(1)
Disconnect b a t t e r y .
(2) Engage t h e R (reverse) push b u t t o n . I t w i l l
be necessary f o r the control cable adapter to be i n
t h i s position ( f o r accessibility) when r e m o v i n g cable
f r o m transmission.
(3) D r a i n transmission and torque converter.
W h e n the fluid has drained, replace torque conv e r t e r d r a i n p l u g and t i g h t e n .
(4) Disconnect the f r o n t universal
fasten the propeller shaft out of t h e w a y .
joint
and
(5) Remove the brake a d j u s t i n g screw cover plate
and loosen cable clamp bolt on p a r k i n g brake support.
Disengage the ball end of t h e cable f r o m the opera t i n g lever and remove cable f r o m brake support.
(6) Disconnect the speedometer cable and housi n g at transmission extension, n e u t r a l s t a r t e r s w i t c h
w i r e and t h r o t t l e control linkage f r o m t h r o t t l e lever
a t transmission.
( 7 ) Remove the push b u t t o n control cable adjustment wheel locking screw and the n e u t r a l s t a r t e r
switch.
( 8 ) I n s e r t a screwdriver t h r o u g h t h e n e u t r a l
s w i t c h hole, contact t h e top end of the cable-toadapter locking s p r i n g and while releasing the lock,
p u l l o u t the cable ( F i g . 2 0 ) .
(9) Disconnect
transmission.
the
o i l cooling lines f r o m
the
(10) I n s t a l l t h e engine support fixture, Tool C3487. (On some models i t m a y be necessary to remove the s t a r t e r to provide clearance f o r
fixture
support ends.) I n s e r t hooks o f fixture firmly i n t o
holes i n side of f r a m e member w i t h support ends
up against the underside of o i l pan flange.
(11) A d j u s t the fixture to support the w e i g h t of
the engine. Raise engine s l i g h t l y , remove crossmember to t o r s i o n bar bracket bolts.
CAUTION
W h e n using fixture, Tool C-3487, do not lower engine
more t h a n three inches f r o m floor pan to avoid disr u p t i n g t h e set position of the w a t e r hose and other
engine attachments.
Rear m o t o r support and bracket m a y be l e f t on
t r a n s m i s s i o n extension d u r i n g transmission repairs.
W h e n i t is necessary t o replace the extension housing, i t can be t r a n s f e r r e d on the bench.
(12) Remove the t w o transmission case to torque
converter housing screws and lockwashers f r o m the
r i g h t side and install guide studs, Tool C-3276. W i t h
the t r a n s m i s s i o n supported, remove t h e t w o transmission case to torque converter housing screws and
lockwashers f r o m left side. Slide the transmission
s t r a i g h t back to avoid damage to the f r o n t oil p u m p
d r i v i n g sleeve, t h e n lower to the floor.
27. FLUSHING TORQUE CONVERTER
I n the event t h a t any p a r t of the transmission has
failed, i t w i l l be necessary to flush t h e torque conv e r t e r to insure t h a t fine metallic particles are n o t
later t r a n s f e r r e d into t h e transmission controls.
(1) U s i n g a long spouted can, slowly pour 2 quarts
of new, clean kerosene i n t o the torque converter
hub. Before t h i s can be done, i t w i l l be necessary to
reach i n t o t h e torque converter w i t h a screwdriver
and t u r n the torque converter stator h u b counterclockwise (large splined h u b ) b y l i f t i n g on t h e r i g h t
side of the spline so t h a t one of the % " x % rectangular slots on t h i s assembly is visible at the top. Since
there is a second slot d i r e c t l y below, an adequate
opening is provided f o r t h e kerosene ( i f poured
s l o w l y ) . A f t e r the kerosene is i n the torque converter, close the hub opening w i t h m a s k i n g tape.
/ /
(2) Disconnect the coil w i r e to prevent the engine
f r o m s t a r t i n g and r o t a t e the converter a p p r o x i m a t e l y 10 seconds by c r a n k i n g the engine w i t h the
starter.
(3) D r a i n the converter by r e m o v i n g t h e d r a i n
p l u g and m a s k i n g tape. Realign the s t a t o r h u b and
repeat t h e above procedure at least once (or i f there
is excessive contamination, u n t i l t h e kerosene
drained out is clear). To complete t h e flushing procedure, r o t a t e the converter w i t h the d r a i n p l u g
removed. T h i s w i l l remove any residual solvent and
trapped d i r t . Reinstall the d r a i n p l u g or plugs.
28.
PRECAUTIONS TO OBSERVE DURING
DISASSEMBLY
The f o l l o w i n g precautions should be observed d u r i n g
disassembly of t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n : Cleanliness t h r o u g h
the entire disassembly and assembly cannot be overemphasized. U n i t should be t h o r o u g h l y cleaned
w h e n removed f r o m the vehicle, preferably b y steam.
W h e n disassembling, each p a r t should be placed i n a
suitable solvent, washed, t h e n dried b y compressed
air. Do not wipe parts w i t h shop towels. A l l of the
m a t i n g surfaces i n the transmission are accurately
machined; therefore, careful h a n d l i n g of parts m u s t
be exercised to avoid nicks or b u r r s .
The use o f crocus cloth is permissible where necessary, p r o v i d i n g i t is used carefully. W h e n used on
valves, use extreme care so not to r o u n d off the
sharp edges. T h e sharp edge p o r t i o n is v i t a l l y i m p o r t a n t t o t h i s type valve. Sharp edges prevent d i r t
and foreign m a t t e r f r o m g e t t i n g between t h e valve
and body, thus reducing the possibilities of s t i c k i n g .
W h e n a vehicle has accumulated considerable mileage and i t becomes necessary to r e c o n d i t i o n the
transmission, i n s t a l l new seal r i n g s on p a r t s r e q u i r i n g t h e i r usage. The f o l l o w i n g procedures are based
on the assumption t h a t the u n i t has been removed
f r o m vehicle and prepared f o r disassembly.
29. OIL P A N REMOVAL
A t t a c h stand, Tool C-3280, t o the t r a n s m i s s i o n and
i n v e r t , as shown i n F i g u r e 32. Remove t h e o i l pan.
30. V A L V E BODY A N D TRANSFER PLATE—
REMOVAL
(1) Remove
washer.
the
t h r o t t l e valve lever
(2)
Remove t h e cable adapter stud n u t .
(3)
Remove the o i l strainer.
and
flat
(4) Remove a t t a c h m e n t n u t f r o m cable adapter
stud at manual lever and remove the adapter.
4M
60x10
Fig.
33—Removal of the V a l v e Body Assembly
31. CHECKING FRONT C L U T C H END C L E A R A N C E
P r i o r to removal o f propeller shaft flange and d r u m
assembly, measure the end clearance of f r o n t clutch
piston r e t a i n e r assembly.
(1) I n s t a l l dial indicator, Tool C-3339, as shown
i n F i g u r e 34.
( 2 ) To make t h i s measurement, p r y f r o n t clutch
f o r w a r d b y carefully i n s e r t i n g screwdriver between
the f r o n t and rear clutch piston retainers.
( 3 ) Remove screwdriver and w i t h the dial i n d i cator p o i n t contacting edge of f r o n t clutch retainer,
set dial indicator to zero.
( 4 ) P r y t h e f r o n t clutch piston retainer assembly
r e a r w a r d against rear clutch, remove screwdriver
and take indicator reading. T h i s clearance should
be f r o m .020" to .050". I f the clearance exceeds t h e
specified l i m i t , p a r t i c u l a r a t t e n t i o n should be paid
( 5 ) Remove the t r a n s f e r plate bolts and remove
the valve body assembly f r o m the t r a n s m i s s i o n
( F i g . 3 3 ) . M a t i n g surfaces are m a c h i n e d : Use ext r e m e care so as not to damage these surfaces.
Place valve body i n stand, Tool C-3528.
(6)
mm
WfWm
FRONT CLUTCH
PISTON RETAINER
ASSEMBLY
FOOL
I
mi
(:
Remove the accumulator piston s p r i n g .
REAR CLUTCH P I S T O N
RETAINER ASSEMBLY'
-STAND-TOOL
56x600
Fig.
32—Transmission A s s e m b l y Inverted in Stand
\
1
•
.
56x605 A
Fig. 34—Checking Front Clutch Piston Retainer Assembly
End C l e a r a n c e
EXTENSION
GOVERNOR
BODY-"-^
GOVERNOR
VALVE SHAFT
BI"
—-Hj
X
if
GOVERNOR
•
;
"
Fig.
••'
35—Removal
56x606 A
of Extension
32. PARKING BRAKE ASSEMBLY — REMOVAL
( 1 ) Remove the transmission flange n u t and washer. Use wrench, Tool C-3281, to hold t h e brake d r u m
and flange assembly, see F i g u r e 23.
( 2 ) A t t a c h puller, Tool C-452, i f necessary, and
remove the propeller shaft flange and t h e d r u m assembly. Inspect l i n i n g contact surfaces on brake
d r u m assembly f o r scoring and inspect the brake
l i n i n g f o r wear.
brake
VALVE
\
56x608 A
Fig. 37—Removal a n d Installation of Governor
to t h e condition of the i n p u t shaft t h r u s t washer
w h e n disassembling transmission and a t h r u s t washer o f the correct thickness selected d u r i n g assembly.
( 3 ) Remove t h e transmission
grease shield spring.
>u
- • '?
support
extension. I f a screwdriver or sharp i n s t r u m e n t is
used i n r e m o v a l of t h i s shield, care m u s t be exercised not to damage the neoprene sealing surface at
b o t t o m o f shield. N o t e the indent on the grease
shield f o r correct p o s i t i o n i n g on the extension.
( 6 ) U s i n g a suitable d r i f t , remove p i n w h i c h attaches the brake shoe anchor i n t h e extension housi n g . Slide the balance of p a r k i n g brake assembly
i n t a c t f r o m extension housing. Inspect the spacer
(neoprene) on back of support plate f o r deteriorat i o n and note the steel sleeve used between neoprene
space and extension.
33. EXTENSION HOUSING —
( 4 ) Remove C type retainer.
( 5 ) Remove the brake support grease shield f r o m
Valve
a n d Shaft
REMOVAL
( 1 ) Remove the speedometer d r i v e pinion and
sleeve assembly. N y l o n gear can be easily damaged
mw
mm
SNAP
GOVERNOR
SUPPORT
RING
ill
•.V-\\
n
SNAP
RING r'.
w
,
in
k
GOVERNOR^
LOCATING SCREW
56x607A
Fig. 36—Removal a n d Installation of Governor
V a l v e Shaft Snap
Ring
it
^
xm - A
4 in /
• 1
56x609 A
Fig. 38—Removal a n d Installation of Governor Weight
Assembly
I f extension Is removed w i t h o u t first r e m o v i n g the
speedometer d r i v e pinion and sleeve assembly.
^^^^^
UNIT N O . 1
( 2 ) Inspect the o u t p u t shaft rear o i l seal and remove ( i f necessary) using p u l l e r Tool C-3690. I f the
transmission extension housing o i l seal or b u s h i n g
are to be replaced, the seal m u s t be removed a t t h i s
t i m e before extension housing is removed f r o m transmission case.
( 3 ) Remove t h e transmission extension t o case
bolts and lockwashers. I n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C3283 and remove extension f r o m o u t p u t shaft supp o r t assembly b y t a p p i n g housing l i g h t l y w i t h a soft
hammer. H o u s i n g m a y be separated b y using a p r y
bar against support screw, as shown i n F i g u r e 35.
Remove t h e extension gasket.
34. GOVERNOR A N D REAR OIL PUMP HOUSING—
REMOVAL
( 1 ) U s i n g a small screwdriver, remove the governor valve shaft snap r i n g f r o m t h e w e i g h t assembly end, as shown i n F i g u r e 36.
(2)
37).
Remove governor valve shaft and valve ( F i g .
( 3 ) U s i n g pliers, Tool C-3229, remove governor
snap r i n g (large) as shown i n F i g u r e 38 and remove
governor w e i g h t assembly.
( 4 ) Remove t h e governor locating screw f r o m the
governor support.
( 5 ) Remove the oil p u m p housing, gear, p i n i o n
and governor assembly f r o m o u t p u t shaft. Use dye
and m a r k the face o f the p u m p gear i n r e l a t i o n to)
p u m p housing, f o r reassembly purposes. D O N O T
S C R I B E . Remove o i l p u m p pinion ball.
35. OUTPUT SHAFT SUPPORT — REMOVAL
(1)
Slide t h e o u t p u t shaft rear support assembly
56x613
Fig. 40—Removal a n d Installation of Unit No. 1
and gasket f r o m transmission case, as shown i n F i g ure 39. I f the rear support is stuck to the transmission case, i t can be loosened b y t a p p i n g l i g h t l y w i t h
a soft hammer.
( 2 ) Remove the t h r u s t washer f r o m f r o n t end of
support plate or output shaft.
( 3 ) Remove the guide studs, Tool C-3283, f r o m
transmission case.
36. REMOVING POWER TRAIN UNIT N O . 1 (OUTPUT
SHAFT, KICKDOWN PLANET PINION CARRIER
A N D INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES) —
REMOVAL
Remove b y sliding t h e u n i t out rear of the transmission case, F i g u r e 40. Support u n i t as m u c h as
possible, w h e n removing, to prevent damage to seal
r i n g s on intermediate shaft.
37. REMOVING POWER UNIT N O . 2 (SUN GEAR,
REVERSE PLANET PINION CARRIER, OVERRUNNING CLUTCH A N D REAR CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES)
— REMOVAL
(1) Loosen the lock nuts on low-reverse and k i c k down band a d j u s t i n g screws and back a d j u s t i n g
screws out 2 to 3 t u r n s .
(2) Remove the three intermediate support loc a t i n g bolts and lockwashers ( t w o outside of case
and one inside). W h e n r e m o v i n g the u n i t , i d e n t i f y
1HM
• i
56x612 A
56x614 A
Fig. 39—Removal a n d Installation of Output Shaft
Fig. 4 1 — R e m o v a l a n d Installation of Intermediate
Support
Support Locating Screw
UNIT N O . 2
56x617A
56x615 A
Fig. 42—Removal of Unit No. 2
Fig. 44—Removal and
the l o c a t i n g hole i n t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e support to
correspond w i t h t h e threaded l o c a t i n g hole inside of
case f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n purposes, F i g u r e 41.
( 3 ) Keep u n i t centered as m u c h as possible to
prevent b i n d i n g of i n t e r m e d i a t e support and remove
assembly f r o m transmisison case, as shown i n F i g ure 4 2 . Remove f r o n t c l u t c h and sun gear t h r u s t
washer.
38. REMOVING UNIT N O . 3 (FRONT CLUTCH PISTON
RETAINER A N D INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLIES) —
REMOVAL
Keep u n i t centered as m u c h as possible and remove
f r o m transmission case, as shown i n F i g u r e 4 3 .
Use extreme care w h e n r e m o v i n g t o prevent damage
to t h e seal r i n g s on i n p u t shaft and sealing surfaces
i n the reaction shaft.
Installation ©f low-Reverse B a n d
sufficiently t o remove t h e low-reverse band s t r u t .
( 2 ) Remove t h e low-reverse band assembly b y
r o t a t i n g band ends t h r o u g h rear opening i n transmission case, as shown i n F i g u r e 44, and remove
low-reverse band anchor f r o m a d j u s t i n g screw.
40. 1 I C 1 D O W N BAND — REMOVAL
(1) M a r k the band f o r reassembly purposes. Compress k i c k d o w n band ends sufficiently to remove the
k i c k d o w n band s t r u t , see F i g u r e 45, and remove t h e
k i c k d o w n band anchor f r o m a d j u s t i n g screw.
( 2 ) Remove t h e k i c k d o w n band assembly b y r o t a t i n g band ends over center support i n transmission
case, as shown i n F i g u r e 46. B o t h bands have bonded
l i n i n g and no a t t e m p t should be made to reline t h e m .
The k i c k d o w n band is w i d e r and has different l i n i n g
m a t e r i a l t h a n the low-reverse band.
39. LOW-REVERSE BAND — REMOVAL
( 1 ) .Mark the low-reverse band assembly f o r i n stallation purposes; t h e n compress ends o f band
n r K D O W N BAND STRUT
KICKDOWN BAND
ADJUSTING SCREW
UNIT NO. 3
,
56x616A
Fig. 43—Removal a n d Installation of Unit No. 3
A
A l A A
56x618
Fig. 4 5 — R e m o v a l a n d Installation of Kickdown
Band
Strut
SNAP RING
,
TOOL
56x619 A
Fig. 46—Removal and Installation of Kickdown Band
N O T E : Use extreme care w h e n r e m o v i n g band so as
not to damage lining against edges of transmission
case.
56x622A
Fig. 4 8 — R e m o v a l a n d Installation of Low-Reverse Servo
Piston Spring Retainer Snap Ring
TOOL
SNAP RING
\
41. LOW-REVERSE A N D K I C K D O W N BAND LEVE1
ASSEMBLIES — REMOVAL
mm
(1) Remove t h e k i c k d o w n and reverse lever shaft
stop p l u g at rear o f t r a n s m i s s i o n case.
( 2 ) U s i n g pliers, remove k i c k d o w n
reverse shaft lever spacer ( f l a t ) .
and
lowill
( 3 ) T h r e a d a guide stud, Tool C-3288, i n t o shaft
and remove shaft f r o m case, as shown i n F i g u r e 47,
and remove the k i c k d o w n and low-reverse servo
levers.
m
42. LOW-REVERSE SERVO — REMOVAL
( 1 ) I n s t a l l Tool C-3529 or C-3289 (modified) and
depress the reverse servo p i s t o n r e t a i n e r t o p e r m i t
t h e r e m o v a l o f t h e snap r i n g w i t h a s c r e w d r i v e r
(Fig. 48).
(2)
56x624A
Fig. 49—Removal a n d Installation of Kickdown Piston
Rod Guide Snap Ring
Remove the tool f r o m the case.
L O W A N D REVERSE
BAND LEVER
KICKDOWN
BAND LEVER
TOOLACCUMULATOR
PISTON
••yS)Bj|
l i b
GUIDE
STUD
KICKDOWN AND
REVERSE
LEVER SHAFT
Fig.
47—Removal
mm
56x620
a n d Installation of Kickdown a n d
Reverse Lever Shaft
•I
56x626 A
Fig. 50—Removal and installation ©f Accumulator Piston
TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION —
39
.SPRING SEAT
ADJUSTING S C R E W
VALVE
SLEEVE
SPRING
RETAINER-
57x236A
57x232A
Fig. 51—Removal and Installation of Regulator V a l v e
Retainer
(3) Remove piston r o d guide, piston s p r i n g and
piston assembly.
43.
KICKDOWN SEBVO — REMOVAL
(1) I n s t a l l Tool C-3529 or C-3289 (modified) and
apply sufficient pressure on the k i c k d o w n piston r o d
guide to p e r m i t t h e removal of the snap r i n g ( F i g .
49).
(2)
Remove the tool f r o m the case.
( 3 ) Remove the piston r o d guide, piston s p r i n g
and piston r o d .
(4) U s i n g pliers, Tool C-484, remove the k i c k d o w n
piston f r o m the transmission case.
44.
ACCUMULATOR PISTON — REMOVAL
U s i n g the same pliers, remove t h e accumulator piston f r o m transmission case, F i g u r e 50.
45.
FRONT OIL PUMP — R E M O V A L
(1) Remove the f r o n t oil pump drive sleeve.
( 2 ) Remove the f r o n t oil p u m p screws and washers (sealing washers, used under bolts, are made
f r o m a l u m i n u m ; discard i f damaged) and replace
w i t h a new washer.
SPRING CU?
t\
Fig. 53—Regulator V a l v e Assembly (Disassembled V i e w )
(3) Remove o i l p u m p housing f r o m transmission
case b y t a p p i n g the housing l i g h t l y w i t h a soft hammer ( F i g . 5 4 ) . U s i n g dye, m a r k the pump gears
i n r e l a t i o n t o face o f o i l p u m p housing f o r reassembly purposes. DO N O T S C R I B E .
48.
REGULATOR V A L V E BODY — REMOVAL
(1) Remove the transmission regulator valve
s p r i n g retainer, gasket, cup, spring, sleeve and valve
( F i g s . 5 1 , 52 and 5 3 ) .
(2) Remove the torque converter valve retainer,
gasket, s p r i n g and valve. A mechanical retriever,
such as a piece of w e l d i n g rod, w i l l aid i n r e m o v i n g
these valves b y i n s e r t i n g i t i n t h e end of the valve.
(3) I n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C-3288, and using
the t w o threaded holes provided i n t h e regulator
valve body, i n s t a l l the guide studs, Tool C-3283, as
shown i n F i g u r e 55.
(4) P u l l r e g u l a t o r valve body off of torque conv e r t e r reaction shaft and remove gasket. Regulator
valve body ( F i g . 56) is made o f a l u m i n u m and requires care i n h a n d l i n g to avoid damage.
HQ
SLEEVE
SPRING
EM
MM
J7x235A
FRONT
Spring
PbVvP
HOUSING
56x627 A
Fig. 52—Removal a n d Installation of Regulator
Valve
O'L
Fig
54—Removal of Front Oil Pump Housing Assembly
REACTION
SHAFT
/
TOOL
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
56x628A
- Fig. 55—Removing Regulator V a l v e Body
47. TORQUE CONVERTER. REACTION SHAFT —
REMOVAL
Refer t o "Inspection o f Torque Converter Reaction
Shaft," P a r a g r a p h 49.
( 1 ) I f inspection reveals i t is necessary to remove
the t o r q u e converter reaction shaft, remove t h e
torque converter reaction shaft seal r i n g (neoprene).
( 2 ) Remove transmission case to reaction
bolts and washers.
shaft
( 3 ) U s i n g Tool C-3531 press t h e reaction shaft o u t
of t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n case ( F i g . 5 7 ) .
48. PRECAUTIONS TO OBSERVE DURING
DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION A N D ASSEMBLY
OF COMPONENT PARTS
The f o l l o w i n g precautions should be observed d u r i n g
assembly o f component parts. W h e r e l u b r i c a t i o n is
FRONT A N D REAR
PUMP CHECK V A L V E
TORQUE CONVERTER
CONTROL V A L V E
I
56x629
57—Removal and Installation «
Converter
Reaction Shaft
required, use A u t o m a t i c Transmission F l u i d (Type
" A " — Suffix " A " ) . Do not use sealing materials on
any gasket or m a t i n g surface, always use new gaskets. T i g h t e n all bolts and nuts to correct specifications. W h e r e snap r i n g s are used, always make sure
t h e y are seated p r o p e r l y . I f m a t i n g parts do n o t go
together properly, always check reason. Do not force
parts unnecessarily.
49. TORQUE CONVERTER R E A C T I O N SHAFT —
INSPECTION
Inspect inside of torque converter reaction shaft f o r
b u r r s . Inspect splines on shaft f o r b u r r s and wear.
Inspect the reaction shaft seal r i n g (neoprene) f o r
d e t e r i o r a t i o n and hardness. Inspect t h r u s t surface
f o r wear and heavy scoring. Check the inner bronze
b u s h i n g f o r excessive scoring. B u s h i n g is serviced
w i t h reaction shaft assembly. Do n o t remove the
torque converter reaction shaft unless inspection
reveals i t is necessary t o do so.
50. TRANSMISSION CASE — INSPECTION
Inspect the transmission case f o r cracks, sand holes
and stripped threads. Check f o r b u r r s on m a t i n g surfaces. Blow compressed a i r t h r o u g h all passages t o
make sure t h e y are open. Check pressure take-off
plugs f o r tightness.
U s i n g a s t r a i g h t edge, Tool C-3335, inspect valve
body m a t i n g surface on transmission case f o r any
b u r r s or i r r e g u l a r i t y i n surface. Surfaces should be
smooth and flat.
56x651 A
REGULATOR V A L V E
Fig. 56—Regulator V a l v e Body a n d V a l v e s
Inspect the servo and accumulator bores f o r any
scores or scratches. L i g h t scratches m a y be removed
w i t h crocus cloth. Check r e g u l a t o r valve body
m a t i n g surface i n f r o n t on case f o r any i r r e g u l a r i t i e s .
D i s r e g a r d any scratches w h i c h m a y have been caused
b y torque converter reaction shaft bolt lockwashers.
I t is v i t a l l y i m p o r t a n t t h a t t h e band a d j u s t i n g
screws fit freely i n t o t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n case. W h e n
the lock n u t s are loose, t h e a d j u s t i n g screws m u s t be
finger free. I f not, inspect the screws and n u t s f o r
pulled threads or f o r e i g n m a t e r i a l i n t h e threads.
T h i s Is v e r y i m p o r t a n t i n o b t a i n i n g proper band
adjustments.
51. TRANSMISSION EXTENSION HOUSING —
INSPECTION
Inspect the extension f o r cracks i n t h e casting and
remove b u r r s f r o m the gasket surface. Inspect vent
( d r i v e t y p e ) i n top of extension and make sure i t is
open and free f r o m d i r t , undercoating, etc. The purpose o f t h i s vent is to f a c i l i t a t e d r a i n i n g and filling.
The v e n t also releases fumes and a i r pressure b u i l d up caused b y expansion of o i l due to heat. Clean outp u t shaft r e a r b u s h i n g and d r y w i t h compressed air.
Inspect bushing f o r r o u g h spots. D o n o t remove the
b u s h i n g f r o m the extension unless inspection reveals
i t is necessary t o do so.
52. OUTPUT SHAFT REAR RUSHING — R E M O V A L
I f i t is necessary to remove rear bushing, the o u t p u t
shaft rear o i l seal should be removed d u r i n g disassembly. Refer to P a r a g r a p h 33.
(1) W i t h t h e larger end of the extension housing
on a flat surface, use b u s h i n g r e m o v i n g driver, Tool
C-3689, and d r i v e b u s h i n g out of housing, as shown
i n F i g u r e 26.
53. OUTPUT SHAFT REAR BUSHING 4ND
OIL SEAL INSTALLATION
(1) Place new b u s h i n g on driver-burnisher, Tool
C-3692, w i t h the l u b r i c a t i o n hole i n b u s h i n g t o w a r d
the end of the tool.
( 2 ) A l i g n t h e hole i n b u s h i n g w i t h the l u b r i c a t i o n
hole i n t h e top side o f t h e extension housing and
drive b u s h i n g u n t i l tool bottoms, F i g u r e 27.
OUTER WEIGHT SNAP RING
^ ! N N E R W E I G H T SNAP RING
VALVE SHAFT
VALVE SHAFT
SNAP RING
— I N N E R WEIGHT
WEIGHT S P R I N G - * -
v/
OUTER W E I G H ! " — >
BODY'--->
BODY TO SUPPORT
SCREW AND
LOCKWASHER (4)
•
r
-
SUPPORT-**
.
V/.'lVE
SNAP RING
I
LOCATING SCREW
^\
-\
\
^ - ^ o u r v' O R T SEAL
S U P P
RINGS
56x716A
Fig. 58—Governor A s s e m b l y (Disassembled V i e w )
governor secondary w e i g h t and spring. Inspect a l l
p a r t s f o r b u r r s and wear. Check secondary w e i g h t
for free movement i n p r i m a r y w e i g h t b y placing
weight i n p r i m a r y weight w i t h o u t the spring. P r i m a r y w e i g h t should f a l l freely when b o t h parts are
clean and d r y . Inspect governor w e i g h t s p r i n g f o r
distortion (Fig. 58).
( 2 ) Place secondary w e i g h t and s p r i n g i n p r i m a r y
w e i g h t , compress the s p r i n g and i n s t a l l snap r i n g
(flat side f a c i n g d o w n w a r d against w e i g h t ) . Make
sure the snap r i n g is seated properly.
( 3 ) Remove and inspect t h e t w o governor support
seal r i n g s .
( 4 ) Remove t h e governor body to support bolts
TOOL
•1
( 3 ) W h i l e h o l d i n g screw of tool w i t h a w r e n c h t o
prevent t u r n i n g , use another wrench and t u r n n u t on
tool u n t i l b u r n i s h e r of tool is pulled back out of
bushing. T h i s operation c o r r e c t l y sizes t h e bushing.
Recheck the i n d e x i n g o f t h e l u b r i c a t i o n hole i n bushi n g w i t h t h e housing ( F i g . 2 8 ) .
( 4 ) U s i n g d r i v e r , Tool C-3691, i n s t a l l o u t p u t shaft
rear oil seal ( w i t h m e t a l p o r t i o n o f seal f a c i n g down
i n housing bore) u n t i l tool bottoms on extension, as
53x66
54. GOVERNOR DISASSEMBLY A N D INSPECTION
( 1 ) Remove snap r i n g w i t h Tool C-3229.
Remove
Fig. 59—Checking Clearance Between Rear Pump Body
and
Gears
42 — T O R Q U E F L I T E TRANSMISSION
and separate body f r o m support. (Washers are p a r t
of the bolt and serviced as an assembly.)
M a t i n g surfaces are machined and can be easily
damaged. Inspect oil passages and.make sure t h e y
are free f r o m d i r t or f o r e i g n m a t t e r . Clean passages
w i t h compressed air. Inspect governor valve and
body f o r s l i g h t scores. Valve should t r a v e l freely i n
governor body.
55. BEAR OIL PUMP — INSPECTION
Inspect o i l p u m p housing machined surfaces f o r nicks
and b u r r s and housing p l u g f o r leaks. Inspect o i l
pump gears f o r scoring or p i t t i n g . W i t h gears
cleaned and installed i n p u m p housing (as m a r k e d )
and using s t r a i g h t edge, Tool C-3335 (and feeler
gauge), check clearance between p u m p housing face
and face of the gears, as shown i n F i g u r e 59. Clearance l i m i t s are f r o m . 0 0 1 " to .0025". The clearance
between t h e outer gear and the p u m p housing should
be f r o m .004" to .006". Replace i f clearance exceeds
.008".
56. G O V E R N O R A S S E M B L Y — R E A S S E M B L Y
(1)
with
Suffix
port.
Lubricate
Automatic
" A " ) , and
M a k e sure
the t w o governor support seal r i n g s
T r a n m i s s i o n F l u i d (Type . " A " —
i n s t a l l t h e m on the governor supr i n g s are free to r o t a t e i n grooves.
( 2 ) P o s i t i o n governor body and support and i n stall the f o u r bolts w i t h attached lockwashers. D o
not t i g h t e n the bolts at t h i s t i m e .
( 3 ) Slide the governor support and body assembly into position i n rear oil p u m p housing. Compress
56x633
Fig. 61—Removal a n d Installation of Output Shaft Drive
Housing Snap Ring
the governor support seal r i n g s w i t h fingers as supp o r t enters o i l pump housing. D o not force.
57.
O U T P U T SHAFT S U P P O R T — I N S P E C T I O N
Inspect a l l oil passages i n o u t p u t shaft support f o r
any obstructions. Remove pressure take-off plugs
and clean passages w i t h compressed air. Check the
rear oil pump m a t i n g surface f o r b u r r s and score
m a r k s . Check f o r stripped threads i n the support.
Inspect gasket surfaces f o r b u r r s and d i r t . Inspect
the inside bearing surface f o r wear and scoring. I n spect o u t p u t shaft to support plate t h r u s t washer f o r
tangs being bent or broken. Replace the washer
when bronze is w o r n to the extent t h a t grooves i n
face of the washer are w o r n off.
58.
D I S A S S E M B L Y , I N S P E C T I O N A N D A S S E M B L Y OF
POWER
TRAIN
UNITS, UNIT
SHAFT, K I C 1 D O W N
AND
1
(OUTPUT
PLANET PINION
CARRIER
NO.
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES)
a. Disassembly
The u n i t can be placed i n the propeller flange and
brake d r u m assembly to aid i n disassembly, as shown
i n F i g u r e 60.
_ \ UNIT
/NO. 1
HAND
( 1 ) U s i n g a screwdriver, remove the ouput shaft
d r i v e housing snap r i n g ( F i g . 6 1 ) . Refer to F i g ure 62 and complete disassembly o f u n i t as f o l l o w s :
( 2 ) Remove t h e reverse annulus gear ( B ) f r o m
t h e o u t p u t shaft assembly ( K ) .
( 3 ) Remove the t h r u s t plate (C) f r o m the k i c k down planet pinion c a r r i e r ( F ) .
BRAKE
DRUM
( 4 ) Remove the i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft ( D ) and k i c k down planet pinion c a r r i e r assembly ( F ) f r o m o u t p u t
shaft assembly ( K ) .
\
56x632
Fig. 60—Using Propeller Shaft Flange a n d Brake Drum
A s s e m b l y (as a Holding Fixture for Unit No. 1)
( 5 ) Remove the o u t p u t shaft t h r u s t washer ( E )
located inside housing.
( 6 ) Remove t h e k i c k d o w n planet pinion carrier
assembly ( F ) f r o m intermediate shaft assembly ( D ) .
T h e k i c k d o w n planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r assembly used i n
A — OUTPUT SHAFT DRIVE HOUSING SNAP RING
B - R E V E R S E ANNULUS GEAR
C — T H R U S T PLATE
D—INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
E—OUTPUT SHAFT THRUST WASHER
F — K I C K D O W N PLANET PINION CARRIER ASSEMBLY
G — K I C K D O W N CARRIER THRUST WASHER
H — S U N GEAR THRUST WASHER
l - K I C K D O W N ANNULUS GEAR SNAP RING
J — K I C K D O W N ANNULUS GEAR
K - O U T P U T SHAFT ASSEMBLY
L—OUTPUT SHAFT SEAL R I N G - S M A L L
M — O U T P U T SHAFT SEAL RING —LARGE
N —INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SEAL R I N G - S M A L L
O-INTERMEDIATE SHAFT SEAL RING —LARGE
56 x 709 A
Fig. 62—Unit No. 1 (Disassembled
t h i s u n i t is i d e n t i c a l t o t h e low-reverse planet p i n i o n
c a r r i e r assembly used i n U n i t N o . 2, b u t should n o t
be interchanged due t o wear p a t t e r n s .
( 7 ) Remove bronze k i c k d o w n c a r r i e r t h r u s t w a s h er ( G ) .
(8) Remove t h e sun gear roller t y p e t h r u s t washer ( H ) f r o m t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft assembly ( D ) .
( 9 ) W i t h a screwdriver, remove k i c k d o w n annulus gear snap r i n g (1) and separate gear ( J ) f r o m
i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft assembly ( D ) .
59. OUTPUT SHAFT — INSPECTION
Inspect the speedometer d r i v e gear f o r any nicks or
b u r r s . N i c k s or b u r r s on gear surface can be removed
w i t h t h e use of a sharp edged stone. Inspect t h r u s t
surfaces, j o u r n a l s and inner b u s h i n g f o r scores o r
View)
excessive wear. Inspect t h e r i v e t i n g and h o u s i n g
f o r a n y cracks and i n t e r n a l d r i v i n g splines f o r excessive wear or b r i n n e l l i n g . The housing and o u t p u t
shaft are serviced as an assembly.
Inspect t h e i n t e r l o c k i n g seal r i n g s ( L - M ) on outp u t shaft ( K ) f o r wear or b r o k e n locks and m a k e
sure t h e y t u r n freely i n t h e grooves. D o n o t remove
r i n g s unless condition w a r r a n t s . W h e n replacing
r i n g s , use extreme care so as n o t to damage i n t e r l o c k i n g p o r t i o n of r i n g . Make sure a l l o i l passages
are open b y b l o w i n g out w i t h compressed air. Inspect
o u t p u t shaft and k i c k d o w n c a r r i e r t h r u s t washers
(E-G) f o r scratches or excessive wear. Inspect t h e
sun gear ( r o l l e r t y p e ) t h r u s t washer ( H ) f o r p i t t e d
or cracked rollers.
60. INTERMEDIATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY —
INSPECTION
Inspect a l l b e a r i n g and t h r u s t surfaces f o r scoring
or scratches. B l o w compressed a i r t h r o u g h a l l o i l
passages; make sure t h e y are open and free o f
f o r e i g n m a t t e r . Inspect t h e f o u r large ( 0 ) and t w o
small ( N ) i n t e r l o c k i n g seal r i n g s f o r excessive wear,
broken ends and make sure t h e y r o t a t e freely i n t h e
grooves. The i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft and clutch feed
tubes are serviced as an assembly.
6 1 . I 1 C I D O W N PLANET PINION CARRIER
A S S E M B L Y — INSPECTION
|.
56x634
Fig. 63—Checking Clearance Between Kickdown Annulus
G e a r Snap Ring a n d Intermediate Shaft
Assembly
Inspect planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r f o r cracks and pinions
f o r b r o k e n or w o r n gear teeth. U s i n g a feeler gauge,
measure the end clearance o n t h e i n d i v i d u a l planet
p i n i o n gears. Clearance should be .006" t o .017". I n spect t h e p i n i o n shafts f o r fit i n t h e c a r r i e r and make
sure t h e pinions are free to r o t a t e on t h e shafts
(.001 i n c h m a x . looseness i n h o l e ) . Make sure t h e
p i n i o n shaft lock pins are installed and t i g h t . Do n o t
H
1
O
P
Q
A
K
I
T
o
"
U
L
F
k4l'VJ -v.
f
1
v
E
D
B
H - O V E R - R U N N I N G CLUTCH CAM ROLLER SPRING
I — O V E R - R U N N I N G CLUTCH CAM ROLLER
J-INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT AND C A M ASSEMBLY
K - R E A R CLUTCH SNAP RING
L—PRESSURE PLATE
4
Hi
M
A - S U N GEAR THRUST WASHER
(same as output shaft thrust washer)
B - S U N GEAR REAR CLUTCH SEAL RING
C - S U N GEAR ASSEMBLY
D - R E V E R S E BAND SNAP RING
E - R E V E R S E PLANET PINION CARRIER ASSEMBLY
F—OVER-RUNNING CLUTCH HUB ASSEMBLY
G - L O W AND REVERSE BAND DRUM
Fig. 64—Unit No.
M — D R I V I N G DISC
N — C L U T C H PLATE
O - P I S T O N RETURN SPRING SNAP RING
P —RETURN SPRING RETAINER
Q - R E T U R N SPRING
R-PISTON
S - P I S T O N SEAL R I N G - O U T E R
T - P I S T O N SEAL RING—INNER
U — P I S T O N RETAINER ASSEMBLY
2 (Disassembled
56 x
710
View)
Note: Number of Clutch Plates a n d Discs Dependent Upon Vehicle Model
replace the c a r r i e r assembly unless inspection reveals
i t is necessary. The planet pinion c a r r i e r and pinions
are serviced o n l y as a complete assembly. Scuffing
of the c a r r i e r does not affect i t s operation and the
c a r r i e r should not be replaced f o r t h i s reason alone.
Inspect the k i c k d o w n c a r r i e r t h r u s t washer (G) f o r
scratches or excessive wear.
62. REVERSE A N D K I C I D O W N ANNULUS GEAH —
INSPECTION
Inspect the annulus gears f o r
broken gear t e e t h .
worn,
cracked
or
6 3 . UNIT N O . 1 (OUTPUT SHAFT, I I C I D O W N
PLANET PINION CARRIER A N D INTERMEDIATE
SHAFT ASSEMBLIES) — A S S E M B L Y
To aid i n t h e assembly of U n i t No. 1, use the propeller shaft flange and b r a k e d r u m assembly as a stand.
(1) W i t h the o u t p u t shaft assembly ( K ) i n t h e
u p r i g h t position, lubricate o u t p u t shaft t h r u s t w a s h er ( E ) w i t h A u t o m a t i c T r a n s m i s s i o n F l u i d ( T y p e
" A " — Suffix " A " ) and place i n t o position i n the
housing.
( 2 ) Place the k i c k d o w n annulus gear ( J ) i n posit i o n on i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft assembly ( D ) and i n s t a l l
snap r i n g ( I ) (select fit). U s i n g a feeler gauge,
check the clearance under the k i c k d o w n annulus gear
snap r i n g ( F i g . 6 3 ) . Clearance l i m i t s are as close
to zero as possible. Snap r i n g s are available i n the
f o l l o w i n g thicknesses:—.060" to .062" and .064" t o
.066". W h e n checking clearance, s u p p o r t annulus
gear on the edge of the bench so i n t e r m e d i a t e s h a f t
w i l l seat p r o p e r l y i n the gear. Make sure snap r i n g
seats properly.
( 3 ) Place the intermediate shaft assembly ( D ) i n
the o u t p u t shaft housing ( K ) .
( 4 ) Place the c a r r i e r assembly ( F ) i n position i n
k i c k d o w n annulus gear ( J ) . Make sure the t h r u s t
washer (G) remains i n position.
( 5 ) Place the t h r u s t plate (C) on the carrier. Be
sure the t h r u s t plate pilot enters bore i n the p i n i o n
carrier.
( 6 ) Place reverse annulus gear ( B ) i n position i n
housing ( K ) and i n s t a l l o u t p u t shaft d r i v e housing
snap r i n g . Make sure the snap r i n g seats p r o p e r l y i n
the housing.
56x636
Fig. 65—Removing Rear Clutch Piston Retainer A s s e m b l y
From Sun G e a r
OVERRUNNING
CLUTCH HUB
INTERMEDIATE
SUPPORT AND
CAM ASSY
! :
SUN GEAR
5£x637
Fig. 66—Removal a n d Installation of Sun G e a r (Reverse
Planet Pinion Carrier a n d Overrunning Clutch
Assembly)
( 7 ) L u b r i c a t e and install the sun gear (roller
t y p e ) , t h r u s t washer ( H ) over i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft
and i n t o position at the base o f t h e shaft.
8 4 UNIT N O . 2 — SUN GEAR, REVERSE PLANET
PINION CARRIER, OVERRUNNING CLUTCH, A N D
REAR CLUTCH PISTON RETAINER ASSEMBLIES
— DISASSEMBLY
The letters r e f e r r e d to i n the Disassembly, Inspect i o n and Assembly of the u n i t p e r t a i n to F i g u r e 64.
(1) W i t h the u n i t s e t t i n g i n t h e u p r i g h t position,
remove the sun gear and the f r o n t clutch t h r u s t
washer ( A ) .
INTERMEDIATE
SUPPORT AND
CAM ASSY
56x639
Fig. 68—Removal a n d Installation of Intermediate
Support a n d C a m Assembly from Overrunning Clutch
(2) U s i n g t w o screwdrivers, inserted between
clutch and i n t e r m e d i a t e support, remove the rear
clutch retainer assembly f r o m the sun gear, as shown
i n F i g u r e 65.
( 3 ) Remove t h e t w o rear clutch seal r i n g s (neoprene) f r o m sun gear and remove t h e reverse sun
gear f r o m the o v e r r u n n i n g clutch and reverse planet
p i n i o n c a r r i e r assembly, F i g u r e 66.
( 4 ) I n s t a l l gauge, Tool C-3527, i n i n t e r m e d i a t e
support and cam assembly, as shown i n F i g u r e 67.
Remove i n t e r m e d i a t e support and cam assembly
f r o m the o v e r r u n n i n g clutch hub, F i g u r e 68.
L O W AND REVERSE BAND DRUM
^
OVERRUNNING CLUTCH HUB
-TOOL
- * -.
56x638
Fig. 67—installation of Tool €=3527 in Intermediate
Support a n d C a m A s s e m b l y
•
56x640
Fig. 69—Removal a n d Installation of Overrunning Clutch
Hub in Low a n d Reverse Band Drum
( 5 ) U s i n g a screwdriver, remove the snap r i n g ( D )
f r o m t h e l o w and reverse band d r u m assembly ( G ) .
( 6 ) Remove the l o w and reverse planet pinion
c a r r i e r assembly ( E ) f r o m reverse band d r u m .
( 7 ) Remove the o v e r u n n i n g clutch hub assembly
f r o m reverse band d r u m , F i g u r e 69.
TOOL\
TOOL
( 8 ) Remove the o v e r r u n n i n g clutch cam roller
springs ( H ) and rollers ( I ) ( t e n each) b y r e m o v i n g
gauge, Tool C-3527, f r o m the i n t e r m e d i a t e support
and cam assembly. Have t h e assembly over bench
w h e n r e m o v i n g the tool.
65. BEAU CLUTCH PISTON 1ETAINEH ASSEMBLY —
DISASSEMBLY
( 1 ) U s i n g a screwdriver, remove the snap r i n g
(large) f r o m rear clutch p i s t o n retainer assembly
(Fig. 70).
( 2 ) Remove the rear clutch pressure plate ( L )
f r o m r e t a i n e r assembly.
( 3 ) I n v e r t the c l u t c h p i s t o n retainer assembly and
remove t h e clutch plates ( H ) and d r i v i n g discs ( M )
f r o m assembly.
( 4 ) U s i n g the compressor, Tool C-3575, s l i g h t l y
compress the r e a r clutch p i s t o n r e t u r n s p r i n g retainer, as shown i n F i g u r e 7 1 . Use extreme care n o t
t o damage piston r e t u r n s p r i n g retainer b y compressing the s p r i n g too f a r .
( 5 ) Remove piston r e t u r n s p r i n g r e t a i n e r snap
r i n g w i t h parallel j a w e d snap r i n g pliers, Tool C3301.
56x643
Fig. 71—Removal a n d Installation of Rear Clutch Spring
Retainer Snap Ring
( 6 ) Release t h e compressor carefully, Tool C-3575,
and remove c l u t c h r e t u r n s p r i n g retainer ( P ) and
s p r i n g (Q) f r o m clutch piston r e t a i n e r assembly.
T h e s p r i n g r e t a i n e r m a y require g u i d i n g past snap
r i n g groove as tool is released.
( 7 ) U s i n g a t w i s t i n g motion, remove the clutch
piston assembly ( R ) f r o m retainer. Remove the inner
and outer (S and T ) seal r i n g s f r o m piston.
66. CLUTCH D11V1NG DISC A N D PLATE —
INSPECTION
Inspect d r i v i n g disc f o r evidence o f b u r n i n g , glazing
and flaking off o f f a c i n g m a t e r i a l . Check the discs
b y s c r a t c h i n g facings w i t h finger nail;. i f m a t e r i a l
collects under n a i l , replace all of the d r i v i n g discs.
Replace t h e d r i v i n g discs i f t h e splines have become
damaged. Inspect t h e steel clutch plates and pressure plate surfaces f o r evidence of b u r n i n g , scoring
or damaged d r i v i n g l u g s ; replace i f necessary.
67. PISTON A N D SEAL HINGS — INSPECTION
Inspect the seal r i n g surfaces i n the piston r e t a i n e r
f o r nicks or deep scratches. L i g h t scratches w i l l n o t
i n t e r f e r e w i t h sealing of neoprene r i n g s . Inspect t h e
i n n e r and outer piston seal r i n g s (neoprene) f o r det e r i o r a t i o n , wear and hardness. Inspect t h e seal r i n g
groove i n the piston f o r nicks or b u r r s .
Inspect t h e inside bore of t h e p i s t o n f o r score
m a r k s ; i f l i g h t , remove w i t h crocus c l o t h ; i f heavy,
replace the p i s t o n . Inspect t h e piston s p r i n g , ret a i n e r and snap r i n g f o r d i s t o r t i o n .
56x641
Fig. 70—Removal a n d Installation of Rear Clutch Piston
Retainer Snap Ring
68. BEAU CLUTCH PISTON BETAINER ASSEMBLY —
INSPECTION
N o t e t h e ball check i n the clutch retainer. T h e p u r pose o f t h e ball check is t o relieve c e n t r i f u g a l o i l
pressure and to prevent p a r t i a l clutch engagement
when the transmission is i n n e u t r a l or o p e r a t i n g i n
drive ( b r e a k a w a y ) w h e n t h e engine speeds are i n creased; otherwise, clutch m a y engage. Make sure
the ball operates freely.
Inspect t h e band contacting surface f o r deep
scores and burns, especially i f the band l i n i n g is w o r n
to the point where the steel band has been contacting
the rear clutch piston retainer. Do n o t machine the
piston retainer i n a lathe to remove score m a r k s .
Inspect the steel clutch plate c o n t a c t i n g surfaces
f o r b u r r s or b r i n e l l i n g . Make sure the clutch d r i v i n g
lugs on steel plates t r a v e l freely i n t o retainer. Remove any m e t a l pickup on t h e hub of retainer.
69. REAR CLUTCH PISTON RETAINER — ASSEMBLY
( 1 ) L u b r i c a t e and i n s t a l l inner piston seal r i n g
( T ) on hub o f clutch retainer. M a k e sure t h a t the
l i p o f the seal is facing down and the seal Is properly
seated i n groove.
( 2 ) L u b r i c a t e and i n s t a l l the outer seal r i n g (S)
on clutch p i s t o n ( l i p of seal t o w a r d piston head).
( 3 ) Place the piston assembly ( R ) i n the clutch
retainer ( U ) and w i t h a t w i s t i n g motion, seat t h e
piston i n b o t t o m of the retainer.
( 4 ) I n s t a l l t h e piston r e t u r n s p r i n g on hub and
position s p r i n g retainer and snap r i n g on s p r i n g .
( 5 ) U s i n g a compressor, Tool C-3575, compress
the clutch s p r i n g sufficiently to p e r m i t the snap r i n g
t o enter the groove i n the hub and snap the r i n g i n
place as shown i n F i g u r e 7 1 . The p i s t o n s p r i n g ret a i n e r m a y require g u i d i n g past t h e clutch hub.
Make v e r y sure the snap r i n g is p r o p e r l y seated.
( 6 ) Remove t h e compressor, Tool C-3575.
( 7 ) L u b r i c a t e all clutch plates and d r i v e discs
w i t h A u t o m a t i c F l u i d (Type " A " — Suffix " A ) . A s semble by p l a c i n g one of t h e rear clutch steel plates
i n the clutch retainer followed by a d r i v i n g disc.
A l t e r n a t e l y repeat t h i s procedure u n t i l all discs and
plates have been installed.
, J
The number of discs and plates v a r y according t o
the engine and transmission equipment. T h e rear
c l u t c h pistons are of various thicknesses. Therefore,
t h e correct p i s t o n m u s t always be used w i t h t h e
n u m b e r o f discs and plates. A s an example, i f a five
plate piston is used w i t h a f o u r pack disc and plate
combination excessive slippage of t h e clutch w i l l
result.
(8) I n s t a l l the pressure plate ( L ) and snap r i n g
( K ) . Make sure the r i n g is p r o p e r l y seated.
70. REVERSE SUN GEAR ASSEMBLY — I N S P E C T I O N
Inspect the gears f o r cracked or broken teeth. I n spect the steel back bronze type b u s h i n g f o r scoring
or excessive wear. B u s h i n g and reverse sun gear
are serviced as an assembly. Inspect intermediate
support b e a r i n g surface of gear f o r wear and s l i g h t
scores. Inspect the rear c l u t c h seal r i n g groove on
the gear f o r nicks or b u r r s . Inspect the inner r i n g
sealing area i n bore o f sun gear f o r grooves or
scratches.
Inspect t h e t h r u s t area of sun gear f o r nicks,
scratches or b u r r s . Inspect seal r i n g s (neoprene)
for d e t e r i o r a t i o n , wear, nicks or hardness. Inspect
t h e f r o n t c l u t c h and sun gear t h r u s t washer f o r
scratches or excessive wear.
71. INTERMEDIATE SUPPORT AND C A M ASSEMBLY
— INSPECTION
Inspect the r i v e t i n g of cam to intermediate support.
Inspect the cam roller surface f o r b r i n e l l i n g . Inspect
t h e roller s p r i n g r e t a i n i n g tabs f o r being bent or
distorted. Inspect the bearing surface on hub f o r
scoring.
Inspect the steel back bronze type b u s h i n g i n hub
f o r scratches, scoring or excessive wear. The bushi n g and i n t e r m e d i a t e support are serviced as an
assembly. Inspect the o v e r r u n n i n g clutch cam r o l l ers f o r being p i t t e d or scored. Inspect the o v e r r u n n i n g cam r o l l e r springs f o r d i s t o r t i o n . Replace i f
necessary.
72. L O W A N D REVERSE PLANET PINION CARRIER
ASSEMBLY — INSPECTION
Inspect t h e planet pinion carrier f o r cracks and the
pinions f o r b r o k e n or w o r n gear teeth. U s i n g a feeler
gauge, check t h e end clearance on i n d i v i d u a l planet
pinion gears. Clearance should be .006" to .017".
Inspect the pinion shafts f o r fit i n c a r r i e r and
make sure pinions are free to rotate on the shafts.
Make sure shaft lock pins are installed and t i g h t .
Do not replace c a r r i e r assembly unless inspection
reveals it is necessary. The planet pinion c a r r i e r and
pinions are serviced only as a complete assembly.
Scuffing of t h e carrier does n o t affect i t s operation
and the c a r r i e r should n o t be replaced f o r t h i s
reason alone.
73. L O W A N D REVERSE BAND DRUM—INSPECTION
Inspect the band contacting surface f o r deep
scratches and burns, especially i f band l i n i n g is w o r n
t o the p o i n t where steel band has been contacting
the d r u m . Do n o t a t t e m p t to machine the d r u m in
lathe to remove score m a r k s . Inspect the d r i v i n g
splines inside the d r u m f o r excessive wear.
assembly ( E ) i n position i n low and reverse band
drum (G).
( 3 ) W i t h the d r u m supported, select snap r i n g to
give m i n i m u m clearance. Snap r i n g s are available
i n three thisknesses: .060-.062, .064-.066 and .068.070 inch.
( 4 ) Place Tool C-3527 i n position i n the i n t e r mediate support and cam assembly and i n s t a l l cam
s p r i n g and rollers, as shown i n F i g u r e 72. Make
definitely sure t h a t cam springs and rollers are prope r l y seated against c a m ; otherwise, damage to
springs w i l l result w h e n o v e r r u n n i n g c l u t c h h u b Is
installed.
mm
#
56x645
Fig. 72—Installation of Overrunning Clutch toilers and
Springs in Intermediate Support and Cam Assembly
74. OVERRUNNING CLUTCH HUB ASSEMBLY—
INSPECTION
Inspect the cam roller c o n t a c t i n g surface f o r b r i n e l l i n g . Inspect the steel back bronze t y p e b u s h i n g
i n h u b f o r s c r a t c h i n g or scoring and excessive wear.
The b u s h i n g and hub are serviced as an assembly.
Inspect the l u b r i c a t i n g hole and make sure i t is
free f r o m f o r e i g n m a t t e r b y cleaning w i t h compressed air. Inspect the reverse band d r u m snap
r i n g (select fit) f o r being distorted.
75. UNIT N O . 2 — (SUN GEAR. REVERSE PLANET
PINION CARRIER, OVERRUNNING CLUTCH A N D
REAR CLUTCH RETAINER)—ASSEMBLY (Fig. 84)
( 1 ) I n s t a l l o v e r r u n n i n g c l u t c h hub assembly ( h u b
first) I n t o the snap r i n g side o f t h e l o w and t h e reverse band d r u m ( F i g . 6 9 ) .
( 2 ) Place low and reverse planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r
O
B
A
C
G
( 5 ) W i t h the intermediate support and cam assembly r e s t i n g on bench, lubricate b u s h i n g and i n stall the low and reverse band d r u m assembly over
hub.
( 6 ) W h i l e h o l d i n g the t w o assemblies together,
remove Tool C-3527. L u b r i c a t e t h e bearing surface
on the reverse sun gear and i n s t a l l intermediate supp o r t and planet pinion carrier assembly.
( 7 ) L u b r i c a t e the t w o sun gear rear clutch seal
r i n g s (neoprene) and i n s t a l l t h e m on the reverse sun
gear.
( 8 ) I n s t a l l the rear c l u t c h piston retainer assembly on the reverse sun gear. To prevent personal
i n j u r y , do not place fingers under the clutch retainer assembly w h e n i n s t a l l i n g .
( 9 ) I n s t a l l the f r o n t c l u t c h and sun gear t h r u s t
washer ( A ) . L u b r i p l a t e m a y be used to hold the
t h r u s t washer i n position.
76. UNIT N O . 3 — (INPUT SHAFT A N D FRONT
CLUTCH PISTON RETAINER ASSEMBLIES) —
DISASSEMBLY
The letters referred to i n disassembly, inspection
and reassembly of t h i s u n i t , p e r t a i n to F i g u r e 73.
D
I
K
M
N
Q
58x754
Fig. 73—Front Clutch (Disassembled V i e w )
(1)
(A)
Remove t h e i n p u t shaft fiber t h r u s t washer
( 2 ) Remove the snap r i n g ( B ) and l i f t the i n p u t
shaft (C) f r o m t h e r e t a i n e r ( R ) .
LEVER RETAINER
\
CUSHION
SPRING
' *
CLUTCH
RETAINER
/
( 3 ) I n v e r t the r e t a i n e r ( R ) , remove d r i v i n g discs
( D ) , plates ( E ) , pressure plate ( F ) and h u b ( G ) .
(4) I n s t a l l the compressor, Tool C-3575, and compress s p r i n g r e t a i n e r ( I ) .
( 5 ) Use pliers, Tool C-3301, t o remove s p r i n g retainer snap r i n g ( H ) .
(6) Slowly release t h e s p r i n g pressure and remove the compressor.
( 7 ) Remove the s p r i n g r e t a i n e r ( I ) , s p r i n g ( J ) ,
levers ( L ) , lever r e t a i n e r ( K ) , and cushion s p r i n g
washer ( M ) and cushion s p r i n g ( N ) f r o m t h e retainer ( R ) .
( 8 ) W i t h a t w i s t i n g m o t i o n , remove the piston
(Q) f r o m retainer ( R ) .
77. INPUT SHAFT R E A C T I O N SHAFT AND FRONT
C L U T C H — INSPECTION
PISTON
LEVER
58x753
Fig. 75—Installing Piston Levers
should be smooth, free f r o m scratches and excessive
wear. D o n o t unlock or remove r i n g s except f o r replacement unless the condition w a r r a n t s . Seal r i n g s
should have sharp, unbroken edges and unbroken
lock ends. The side clearance should n o t exceed .005
inch. T h e outer surface should show no evidence of
wear.
Cleaning and Inspection
Clean c l u t c h discs w i t h clean, damp w i p i n g cloths.
Clean t h e m e t a l p a r t s i n kerosene, m i n e r a l s p i r i t s or
s i m i l a r solvents. B l o w t h e solvent t h r o u g h o i l passages w i t h compressed a i r u n t i l clean.
(1) Inspect the i n p u t shaft t h r u s t washer ( A )
f o r cracks or excessive wear. Inspect t h e shaft (C)
lugs f o r nicks and b u r r s . Splines should be smooth,
w i t h o u t scratches, nicks or b u r r s . T h e b u s h i n g
( 2 ) Do n o t remove t h e reaction shaft f o r inspect i o n . Inspect splines f o r nicks, b u r r s and uneven excessive wear. Inspect i n n e r bore. The i n p u t shaft
seal r i n g contact area should not be w o r n . T h e t h r u s t
washer contact area on end o f shaft should be smooth
and u n m a r k e d .
(3) Inspect the d r i v i n g discs ( D ) f o r
flaking,
glazing, b u r n i n g and excessive wear (grooves n o t
e v i d e n t ) . Spline teeth should slide freely on d r i v i n g
disc hub splines ( G ) .
.020"-.040"
( 4 ) T h e steel clutch plates ( E ) and pressure plate
( F ) should be smooth and lugs should slide f r e e l y
i n piston retainer ( R ) .
(5) Inspect the snap r i n g ( H ) , s p r i n g retainer
( I ) and r e t u r n s p r i n g ( J ) and lever r e t a i n e r ( K ) f o r
d i s t o r t i o n , breakage and cracks.
( 6 ) Inspect the levers ( L ) , cushion s p r i n g ( N )
and cushion s p r i n g washer ( M ) f o r wear, d i s t o r t i o n
or evidence of scoring.
Fig. 74—Cushion Spring Washer Position
(7) Inspect the piston (Q) and piston r e t a i n e r
( R ) . Remove any nicks, b u r r s or l i g h t score m a r k s
w i t h crocus cloth. Check ball i n r e t a i n e r m u s t operate freely. Inspect the p i s t o n seal r i n g s (S and T )
for d e t e r i o r a t i o n , nicks, d i s t o r t i o n or excessive wear.
50 — T O R Q U E F L I T E T R A N S M I S S I O N
78. INPUT SHAFT A N D FRONT CLUTCH (UNIT N O . 3)
—ASSEMBLY (Fig. 73)
( 1 ) L u b r i c a t e and i n s t a l l t h e new rubber seal r i n g
( T ) i n hub groove of retainer ( R ) w i t h l i p of seal
t o w a r d rear of retainer.
( 2 ) L u b r i c a t e and i n s t a l l the new outer seal r i n g
(S) on piston (Q) w i t h l i p of seal t o w a r d rear of
piston.
( 3 ) U s i n g a t w i s t i n g m o t i o n , seat the piston i n the
b o t t o m of t h e retainer,
( 4 ) Place the cushion s p r i n g ( N ) on t h e piston
w i t h cupped (concave) side t o w a r d piston.
( 5 ) Place cushion s p r i n g washer ( M ) on cushion
s p r i n g w i t h chamfer up, t o w a r d f r o n t on assembly
(Fig. 74).
( 6 ) Place lever r e t a i n e r ( K ) on piston hub and
i n s t a l l levers ( F i g . 7 5 ) .
( 7 ) Position the r e t u r n s p r i n g ( J ) , retainer ( I )
and snap r i n g ( H ) on r e t a i n e r hub. Use Tool C-3575
t o compress s p r i n g sufficiently to seat snap r i n g i n
t h e groove w i t h pliers C-3301 and t h e n remove compressor. Be v e r y sure snap r i n g is p r o p e r l y seated.
( 8 ) I n s t a l l the plate ( F ) (smooth side up) i n ret a i n e r and t h e n install discs ( D ) and plates ( E )
alternately.
( 9 ) Check the clutch t r a v e l (free play f o r complete disengagement). U s i n g the t r u c k transmission
f r o n t clutch spacer plate, P a r t N u m b e r 1824319, as
a special tool, place the spacer against shoulder i n
retainer above the top clutch disc. The clearance between tool and top disc should be .020" to .040".
Clutch discs are available i n three thicknesses:
.060-.063, .073-.076 and .087-.090 inch. Usually, i t
w i l l only be necessary t o repla e the top plate to
provide clearance w i t h i n t h i s range. W h e n proper
clearance is obtained, remove tool.
(10) I n s t a l l the clutch hub (G) and i n p u t shaft
(C) i n retainer and install snap r i n g ( B ) .
(11) I n s t a l l the t h r u s t washer ( A ) over the i n p u t
shaft, against the flange of the shaft.
SERVOS, BANDS AND M I S C E L L A N E O U S INSPECTION
79. BAND —INSPECTION
A l l letters referred to i n the inspection of these parts
p e r t a i n to F i g u r e 76. Make visual inspection of
bands and l i n i n g f o r wear and bond t o m e t a l . I f
the l i n i n g is w o r n to the p o i n t t h a t the grooves are
no longer visible, band assemblies m u s t be replaced.
The l i n i n g is bonded to the band and no a t t e m p t
should be made to reline t h e m . Inspect bands f o r
d i s t o r t i o n or cracked ends. The reverse band is
n a r r o w e r t h a n the k i c k d o w n band and the l i n i n g is
of a different composition. Therefore, i t should be
identified to prevent i m p r o p e r i n s t a l l a t i o n .
80. LEVER ASSEMBLIES —INSPECTION (Fig. 76)
Inspect the levers ( J and K ) f o r being cracked or
w o r n and make sure t h e y are free to t u r n on the
shaft and have side clearance when installed. Inspect
the lever shaft ( I ) f o r excessive wear.
81. REVERSE SERVO PISTON ASSEMBLY— INSPECTION (Fig. 76)
Inspect the lever contacting surface on p l u g ( L ) f o r
excessive wear. Remove and inspect reverse servo
piston seal r i n g ( Z ) (neoprene) f o r d e t e r i o r a t i o n and
hardness. Inspect seal r i n g groove f o r nicks . or
b u r r s . Inspect servo piston r e t u r n s p r i n g ( O ) , retainer ( N ) and snap r i n g (Q) f o r being distorted.
82. KICKDOWN PISTON ASSEMBLY — INSPECTION
(Fig. 76)
Inspect the r i v e t i n g of k i c k d o w n piston r o d ( T ) .
Inspect the guide ( R ) contacting surface f o r nicks
or burrs. Inspect seal r i n g (CC) on t h e guide f o r
wear and make sure i t t u r n s freely i n the groove.
Check the fit of the guide ( R ) on the piston rod. I n spect the three r i n g s ( F F , E E , D D ) ( t w o i n t e r locking) on piston f o r wear or broken locks. Make
sure t h e y t u r n freely i n t h e groove. I t is n o t necessary to remove the r i n g s unless the condition w a r r a n t s . W h e n replacing new r i n g s , use extreme care
so as n o t t o damage the i n t e r l o c k i n g p o r t i o n of the
r i n g . Inspect k i c k d o w n piston ( U ) f o r l i g h t scores
and wear. Inspect t h e k i c k d o w n p i s t o n s p r i n g (S)
and the r o d guide snap r i n g ( M ) f o r being distorted.
t o remove r i n g s unless condition w a r r a n t s . W h e n
replacing t h e new I n t e r l o c k i n g seal rings, use ext r e m e care so as not to damage the I n t e r l o c k i n g
p o r t i o n of t h e r i n g .
Inspect the accumulator p i s t o n ( V ) f o r nicks,
b u r r s and excessive wear. Inspect the accumulator
s p r i n g ( W ) f o r b e i n g distorted.
88. ACCUMULATOR PISTON A N D SPRING —
INSPECTION (Fig. 78)
84. DRIVE SLEEVE —INSPECTION
Inspect t h e t w o seal r i n g s ( X and Y ) (one i n t e r l o c k i n g ) f o r w e a r or broken locks and make sure
t h e y t u r n freely I n t h e grooves. I t Is not necessary
Inspect the f r o n t seal r i n g (neoprene) f o r nicks,
d e t e r i o r a t i o n and hardness. Inspect t h e i n t e r l o c k i n g
seal r i n g f o r wear or broken locks and make sure I t
A—LOW AND REVERSE BAND
B—REVERSE BAND STRUT
C-ANCHOi
D—KICKDOWN BAND
E—KICKDOWN BAND STRUT
F—ANCHOR
G —LEVER SHAFT PLUG
H-LEVER SHAFT SPACER
I —LEVER SHAFT
DD
"—EE
vx-
-Z
-P
-BB
~L
flCC-
-GG
-HH
- C
J - L O W AND REVERSE BAND LEVER
K - KICKDOWN BAND LEVER
L - L O W AND REVERSE SERVO PISTON
M —PISTON ROD GUIDE SNAP RING
N - l O W AND REVERSE SERVO PISTON
O - L O W AND REVERSE SERVO PISTON
P - L O W AND REVERSE SERVO PISTON
Q-SPRING RETAINER SNAP RING
R-PISTON ROD GUIDE
S-KICKDOWN SERVO PISTON SPRING
T-PISTON ROD
U-KICKDOWN SERVO PISTON
V—ACCUMULATOR PISTON
W—ACCUMULATOR SPRING
X-PSSTON RING-LARGE
Y-PISTON RING-SMALL
Z - L O W A N D -REVERSE SERVO PISTON
,4 A
L'"-JC A £7 A, s%
' ,* N* G ,! -v "7
—
'PLUG
SPRING RETAINER
SPRING
RING
5
C C - ? ; $ 7 0 N R O D GUOc SEAL R!NG
—PISTON' SEAL K'NG—SMALL
£ £ - - ? ; S T O N SEAL RiNG
MzDiUM
r r —PISTON SEAL R I N G — L A R G E
S 3 - B A N D ADJUSTING SCREW
-ADJUSTING SCREW LOCK NUT
\ t — TRANSMISSION CASE
DD
—
F-
HHGG-
56 x 708B
Fig. 76—Servos a n d Bands (Disassembled V i e w )
52 — T O R Q U E F L I T E
TRANSMISSION
t u r n s freely i n groove. I t is n o t necessary t o remove
the r i n g s unless t h e conditions w a r r a n t t h e i r replacement. Inspect t h e d r i v i n g lugs f o r excessive wear
and the bearing surface on outer diameter f o r nicks,
b u r r s or deep scratches.
85. F I O N T O I L PUMP—INSPECTION A N D
OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
Inspect f r o n t o i l p u m p housing outer " 0 " r i n g seal
(on circumference of the housing) and the f r o n t o i l
seal f o r d e t e r i o r a t i o n and hardness. Do n o t remove
t h e f r o n t o i l seal f r o m t h e h o u s i n g unless inspection
reveals t h a t i t is necessary. To remove o i l seal, use
a brass d r i f t and d r i v e t h e seal out o f housing. W i t h
new seal l i p t o w a r d s r o t o r bore ( m e t a l p o r t i o n o f t h e
seal d o w n ) , use d r i v e r , Tool C-3278, and d r i v e the
seal u n t i l tool bottoms on the face o f housing, as
shown i n F i g u r e 77. Inspect the d r i v e sleeve seal r i n g
contacting surface i n h o u s i n g f o r wear and scratches.
Inspect the steel back bronze t y p e b u s h i n g i n bore
f o r deep scratches or scoring and excessive wear.
( B u s h i n g and h o u s i n g are serviced as an assembly).
Remove the o i l p u m p r o t o r s and inspect the r o t o r
contacting surfaces f o r scratches, b u r r s or g r o o v i n g .
Inspect the r e g u l a t o r valve body c o n t a c t i n g surface on p u m p housing face f o r nicks or b u r r s . I n spect housing passages and make sure t h e y are free
f r o m d i r t and f o r e i g n m a t t e r . Clean and i n s t a l l o i l
p u m p gears i n housing. Replace gears, as identified
w h e n removed, w i t h counterbore i n t h e p i n i o n gear
f a c i n g down. U s i n g s t r a i g h t edge, Tool C-3335, and
feeler gauge, measure t h e clearance between t h e
p u m p housing face and the face o f the r o t o r s , as
.' o
-
IDOL
"RONT O i l
PL'.-AP. H O U S I N G
~™
53x28
Fig. 77—Installing Front Pump Housing O i l Seal
••
' .^^^^^^^m^^^
TOOL
56x650
Fig. 78—Checking Clearance between front Pump Body
and Gears
shown i n F i g u r e 78. Clearance l i m i t s are f r o m . 0 0 1 "
to .0025". A f t e r measuring p u m p gear clearance,
lubricate t h e p u m p r o t o r s w i t h A u t o m a t i c T r a n s mission F l u i d (Type " A " — S u f f i x " A " ) .
Measure the t i p clearance between t h e r o t o r lobes.
The m a n u f a c t u r i n g l i m i t s are .005 t o .010 i n c h . Replace the r o t o r s i f t h i s clearance exceeds ,,012 i n c h .
Measure the clearance between the outer r o t o r and
p u m p housing bore. The m a n u f a c t u r i n g l i m i t s are
.008 i n c h ( m a x i m u m ) . Replace the r o t o r s or p u m p
housing i f t h i s clearance exceeds .010 inch.
86. REGULATOR V A L V E BODY A N D VALVES —
INSPECTION
Place the body and valves i n pan c o n t a i n i n g a clean
solvent, w a s h t h o r o u g h l y and d r y w i t h compressed
air. Inspect the reaction seal r i n g surface i n bore
f o r scratches, nicks or b u r r s . Inspect b o t h valves
f o r free movement i n t h i s valve b o d y ; t h e y should
f a l l i n and out of bores w h e n b o t h t h e valves and
body are d r y . Crocus cloth m a y be used t o polish
valves p r o v i d i n g care is exercised not t o r o u n d t h e
sharp edge p o r t i o n o f t h e valves. The sharp edge
p o r t i o n is v i t a l l y i m p o r t a n t to t h i s t y p e of valve, i t
helps t o prevent d i r t and f o r e i g n m a t t e r f r o m g e t t i n g
between the valve and body, t h u s r e d u c i n g the possibilities o f s t i c k i n g .
Check a l l fluid passages f o r obstructions and i n spect a l l m a t i n g surfaces f o r b u r r s and d i s t o r t i o n .
I f t h e r e g u l a t o r valve body should have a s l i g h t n i c k
or raised p o r t i o n on m a t i n g surfaces, i t m a y be
removed b y u s i n g a surface plate and N o . 400 or
finer, g r i t w e t or d r y , sandpaper. Inspect t h e f r o n t
and r e a r p u m p check valve f o r proper seating on
b o t h surfaces. I f necessary t o remove valve use a
p a i r of l o n g nose pliers.
Inspect the r e g u l a t o r valve s p r i n g seat (snap
r i n g ) . A f t e r the valves and r e g u l a t o r body have been
t h o r o u g h l y cleaned and inspected, the valves should
be reinstalled i n body ( F i g . 5 6 ) . Place assembly
on a clean surface and cover w i t h a paper towel
(line free) u n t i l ready f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n . Inspect regu-
l a t o r valve and torque converter c o n t r o l valve springs
for
distortion.
Inspect the r e g u l a t o r valve s p r i n g
sleeve and cup f o r b u r r s .
Inspect the
adjusting
screw and l o c k n u t i n r e t a i n e r f o r freeness and pulled
threads.
A S S E M B L Y O F UNITS IN TRANSMISSION C A S E
87. TORQUE CONVERTER REACTION SHAFT —
INSTALLATION
I f t h e torque converter reaction shaft was removed,
r e i n s t a l l i t as f o l l o w s :
(1) U s i n g heat lamps, steam or h o t water, heat
the f r o n t o f the transmission case to a p p r o x i m a t e l y
170 t o 190 degrees F . ( v e r y h o t w h e n touched b y
fingers).
I f steam or h o t w a t e r are used, be sure
case and passage w a y s are a l l t h o r o u g h l y d r i e d out
w i t h compressed air.
( 2 ) I n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C-3283, i n the f r o n t
face of reaction shaft flange. L u b r i c a t e p o r t i o n of
reaction shaft t h a t presses i n t o case and t h e n posit i o n i n t o f r o n t o f transmission case so t h a t guide
studs i n shaft a l i g n w i t h threaded holes i n case.
( 3 ) U s i n g Tool C-3531, press reaction shaft i n t o
place, as shown i n F i g u r e 57. Remove t h e guide
studs and install the bolts and washers. T i g h t e n the
bolts down evenly to prevent any possible m i s a l i g n m e n t o f the shaft i n the case and t i g h t e n 30 t o 35
foot-pounds torque.
( 4 ) L u b r i c a t e t h e torque converter reaction shaft
seal (neoprene) and i n s t a l l on shaft.
Fig. 80—Installing Front O i l Pump Drive Sleeve
88. REGULATOR V A L V E B O D Y — I N S T A L L A T I O N
( 1 ) I n s t a l l the guide studs, Tool C-3288, as shown
i n F i g u r e 55.
( 2 ) I n s t a l l t h e r e g u l a t o r valve body gasket over
guide studs i n t o position on transmission case and
w i t h a r o t a t i n g m o t i o n i n s t a l l torque converter and
regulator valves i n t o the r e g u l a t o r valve body (cent e r i n g tool hole i n ends of valves goes towards outside) . Be sure the f r o n t and rear p u m p check valve
is i n proper p o s i t i o n i n r e g u l a t o r valve body ( F i g .
56).
( 3 ) W i t h (neoprene) seal r i n g i n position on t h e
reaction shaft, slide t h e r e g u l a t o r valve body over t h e
shaft and guide studs i n t o p o s i t i o n against t h e case.
G U I D E STUDS
89. FRONT OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY — INSTALLATION
(1) W i t h t h e i n n e r and outer seals l u b r i c a t e d and
t h e p u m p r o t o r s i n position i n housing ( F i g . 79)
(counterbore i n pinion gear f a c i n g down as identified
w h e n removed) place the o i l p u m p h o u s i n g over
studs and slide i n t o position.
56x652
-
MARKS
VALVE
BODY
Fig. 79—Installing Front O i l Pump A s s e m b l y
( 2 ) S t a r t t h e bolts and a l u m i n u m sealing washers and t i g h t e n evenly u n t i l t h e housing is seated i n t o
t h e transmission case. Remove the guide studs and
TOOL
I n s t a l l the r e m a i n i n g bolts and washers and t i g h t e n
14 t o 16 foot-pounds torque. I m p r o p e r t i g h t e n i n g of
these bolts m a y cause p u m p gears t o b i n d .
( 3 ) L u b r i c a t e the f r o n t p u m p d r i v e sleeve. W i t h
a s l i g h t r o t a t i n g back and f o r t h m o t i o n i n s t a l l sleeve
(smooth bearing surface f i r s t ) being sure t h e d r i v e
lugs engage i n the o i l p u m p inner r o t o r and can be
r o t a t e d freely, F i g u r e 80. T h e m a i n body of the d r i v i n g sleeve should be l u s h w i t h o i l pump housing
w h e n p r o p e r l y installed and the neoprene seal r i n g
w i l l n o t be visible. I f t h e r o t o r s do n o t t u r n freely,
remove t h e pump and check f o r f o r e i g n m a t t e r between t h e p u m p r o t o r s and h o u s i n g ( F i g . 8 1 ) .
( 4 ) I n s t a l l t h e torque converter c o n t r o l valve
s p r i n g , r e t a i n e r and gasket and t i g h t e n 35 to 40 f o o t pounds torque.
( 5 ) I n s t a l l the regulator valve s p r i n g , sleeve, cup,
gasket and r e t a i n e r ( w i t h a d j u s t i n g screw and lock
n u t installed) and t i g h t e n 45 t o 50 foot-pounds
torque.
90. K I C K D O W N PISTON — I N S T A L L A T I O N
( 1 ) L u b r i c a t e p i s t o n seal r i n g s and i n s t a l l t h e m
on t h e k i c k d o w n piston.
(2)
Compress outer r i n g and s t a r t assembly i n t o
SEAL
RING
IS
KICKDOWN
PISTON R O D
KfaCDOWN
PISTON SPRING
—-KICKDOWN
PISTON R O D
56x625 A
Fig.
82—Removal a n d Installation of Kickdown Piston
Rod G u i d e a n d Spring
case. W i t h t h e piston p r o p e r l y centered so as not t o
damage the rings, tap l i g h t l y u n t i l p i s t o n bottoms
i n t h e case.
( 3 ) Place the k i c k d o w n piston r o d assembly i n the
piston and slide the piston s p r i n g over k i c k d o w n
p i s t o n rod.
( 4 ) I n s t a l l Tool C-3529 or C-3289 (modified) on
case and place k i c k d o w n p i s t o n r o d guide over t h e
s p r i n g w h i l e g u i d i n g piston r o d guide, as shown i n
F i g u r e 82.
(5) U s i n g extreme care, compress the k i c k d o w n
p i s t o n s p r i n g t o t h e p o i n t t h a t the p i s t o n r o d guide
seal r i n g s l i g h t l y binds on t h e case and t h e n w o r k
the seal r i n g i n t o position b y g r a d u a l l y compressing
t h e spring, i n s t a l l the snap r i n g and loosen the compression p o r t i o n o f the tool.
DRIVE
SLEEVE
mm
TOOL
mmWm\
DRIVE SLEEVE
;
\
L O W - R E V E R S E SERVO'
S P R I N G RETAINER
Fig. 81—Front Pump Drive Sleeve Installation — Incorrect
Installation (Top V i e w ) — Correct Installation
(Bottom; View)
'
;
56x623A
Fig. 83—Compressing Low a n d Reverse Servo Spring
and
Retainer
9 L LOW-REVERSE SERVO PISTON —
INSTALLATION
( 1 ) L u b r i c a t e t h e low-reverse servo p i s t o n seal
r i n g and i n s t a l l o n t h e piston ( l i p of seal f a c i n g top
end of p i s t o n ) . I n s t a l l the cushion s p r i n g and p l u g
i n t o piston and fasten w i t h t h e snap r i n g .
( 2 ) I n s t a l l t h e p i s t o n assembly i n t o t h e transmission case t h e n place reverse servo piston s p r i n g over
piston and position s p r i n g r e t a i n e r over s p r i n g .
U s i n g compressing tool f o r reverse servo p i s t o n i n stallation, compress s p r i n g sufficiently to i n s t a l l snap
r i n g . S p r i n g r e t a i n e r m a y r e q u i r e g u i d i n g i n t o case
(Fig. 83).
( 3 ) Remove compressing tool.
92, K I C K D O W N BAND — INSTALLATION
(1) I n s t a l l t h e k i c k d o w n band assembly i n same
position as m a r k e d upon disassembly, b y r o t a t i n g
t h e band ends over center support i n transmission
case, as shown i n F i g u r e 46. Use extreme care w h e n
i n s t a l l i n g bands t o prevent damage t o t h e l i n i n g on
edges o f transmission case.
be made a t t h i s t i m e b y selection o f proper i n p u t
shaft t h r u s t washer. To accomplish t h i s , use a
m i c r o m e t e r and measure t h e thickness of the t h r u s t
washer w h i c h was removed. Then, select a t h i c k e r
or t h i n n e r washer t o give proper clearance. T h r u s t
washers are available i n t h e f o l l o w i n g thicknesses:
Thicknesses
.115"
.097"
.078"
.059"
to
to
to
to
.117"
.099"
.080"
.061"
Color
Natural
Red
Black
Orange
( 1 ) Select t h e proper thickness t h r u s t washer and
position i t on the i n p u t shaft.
( 2 ) W i t h t h e i n p u t shaft seal r i n g s lubricated,
s t a r t t h e u n i t t h r o u g h t h e r e a r of t h e transmission
case, as shown i n F i g u r e 43. B y s u p p o r t i n g and keepi n g t h e u n i t centered as m u c h as possible, guide
t h r o u g h bands and reaction shaft i n t o position.
96. UNIT N O . 2 — (SUN GEAR, REVERSE PLANET
PINION CARRIER, OVERRUNNING CLUTCH A N D
REAR CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES)—INSTALLATION
( 2 ) I n s t a l l the anchor on t h e k i c k d o w n band adj u s t i n g screw.
(1)
case.
9 3 . LOW-REVERSE BAND — INSTALLATION
( 2 ) A l i g n t h e identified l o c a t i n g hole i n i n t e r m e d i ate support w i t h threaded l o c a t i n g hole inside o f
t r a n s m i s s i o n case ( F i g . 8 4 ) .
(1) I n s t a l l the anchor on reverse band a d j u s t i n g
screw.
( 2 ) I n s t a l l the band b y r o t a t i n g ends t h r o u g h rear
opening i n case, i n t h e same p o s i t i o n as m a r k e d upon
disassembly, as shown i n F i g u r e 44.
9 4 LOW-REVERSE A N D K I C K D O W N BAND LEVER
ASSEMBLIES A N D STRUTS — INSTALLATION
(1) Place t h e levers i n p o s i t i o n i n the case, as
S t a r t the u n i t t h r o u g h rear of transmission
( 3 ) B y s u p p o r t i n g and keeping u n i t centered as
m u c h as possible, guide i t t h r o u g h t h e bands u n t i l i t
contacts t h e hub of the f r o n t clutch. W h i l e p u s h i n g
i n on assembly, r o t a t e the sun gear t o engage clutch
plates at the rear clutch on hub o f f r o n t clutch.
W h i l e r o t a t i n g t h e sun gear, make sure t h e u n i t
IDENTIFIED L O C A T I N G
( 2 ) Remove t h e guide stud, Tool C-3288, f r o m the
threaded end of shaft and i n s t a l l i n case to hold
levers, followed b y spacer (flat) and p l u g . T i g h t e n
p l u g securely.
( 3 ) Position the k i c k d o w n band anchor over t h e
a d j u s t i n g screw, compress band and i n s t a l l k i c k d o w n
band s t r u t .
( 4 ) Position t h e low-reverse band anchor over adj u s t i n g screw, compress band and w i t h the aid o f a
screwdriver, i n s t a l l t h e s t r u t .
95. UNIT N O . 3 — FRONT CLUTCH A N D INPUT
SHAFT ASSEMBLIES — INSTALLATION
I f w h e n transmission was disassembled, the end
clearance was found t o be incorrect, correction can
Fig. 8 4 - l n s t a l l i n g Unit No. 2
does not bind on bands or i n i n t e r m e d i a t e support.
B o n o t use excessive force w h e n i n s t a l l i n g t h i s u n i t
so as to prevent damage t o clutch discs i n rear c l u t c h .
A d r i f t m a y be used to assist i n a l i g n m e n t o f i n t e r mediate l o c a t i n g holes.
(4) I n s t a l l the i n t e r m e d i a t e support locating bolts
and lockwashers and t i g h t e n 25 to 30 foot-pounds
torque. Test t h e i n p u t shaft and sun gear f o r free
rotation.
97. UNIT N O . 1 — (OUTPUT SHAFT, K I C I D O W N
PLANET PINION GABBIER A N D INTEBMEDIATE
SHAFT ASSEMBLIES)—-INSTALLATION
Be sure reverse sun gear t h r u s t washer (roller t y p e )
is i n position on the i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft.
(1) I n s t a l l the planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r anti-scuff
plate i n t o p o s i t i o n ( p i l o t flange goes i n t o the inside
bore of the k i c k d o w n planet pinion c a r r i e r ) against
planet p i n i o n housing. L u b r i c a t e plate, seal r i n g s
and bearing surface on i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft w i t h A u t o m a t i c Transmission F l u i d T y p e " A " , Suffix " A " .
( 2 ) Place t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft i n sun gear, as
shown i n F i g u r e 40. K e e p i n g u n i t centered as m u c h
as possible and w h i l e slowly t u r n i n g o u t p u t shaft,
slide into p o s i t i o n (large seal r i n g on o u t p u t shaft
m u s t be flush w i t h rear of transmission case).
N O T E : Use e x t r e m e care w h e n i n s t a l l i n g t o p r e v e n t
damage t o seal r i n g s on i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft.
Fig. 86—Removal a n d Installation of Rear O i l Pump
Pinion
t a t e the washer to find the location t h a t w i l l provide
a m i n i m u m amount of r o t a t i o n ( F i g . 8 5 ) . L u b r i p l a t e
should be used to hold t h e washer i n place.
( 2 ) W i t h the guide studs, Tool C-3283, installed
i n rear of transmission case, place o u t p u t shaft supp o r t gasket over guide studs and i n t o position on
rear of case.
( 3 ) L u b r i c a t e the o u t p u t shaft seal r i n g s . I n s t a l l
t h e support over the shaft and guide studs and posit i o n against transmission case ( F i g . 3 9 ) .
9 8 . OUTPUT SHAFT SUPPOBT — INST ALL A T I O N
N O T E : Use care w h e n i n s t a l l i n g support so as not
to damage r i n g sealing surfaces.
(1) Position the o u t p u t shaft support t h r u s t
washer w i t h the f o u r tabs spaced between t h e webs
on t h e f r o n t side o f t h e o u t p u t shaft support. Ro-
( 4 ) I n s t a l l the one ( s h o r t ) o u t p u t shaft support
t o transmission case bolt and lockwasher and t i g h t e n
finger t i g h t .
THRUST
WASHER
99. BEAB O I L PUMP A N D GOVERNOB ASSEMBLIES
— INSTALLATION
N O T E : T h e o i l p u m p gears were m a r k e d upon disassembly f o r ease of identification and should be reassembled i n t h e same manner.
(1) Place the rear o i l p u m p p i n i o n ball i n ball
pocket i n o u t p u t shaft.
( 2 ) L u b r i c a t e the r e a r oil p u m p d r i v e pinion.
Place over t h e o u t p u t shaft and slide i n t o p o s i t i o n
a l i g n i n g t h e k e y w a y i n p i n i o n w i t h ball i n shaft, as
( 3 ) L u b r i c a t e the r e a r o i l p u m p gear and position
i t i n t h e p u m p housing, rounded edge down.
Fig 85—Installing Thrust W a s h e r on
Output Shaft Support
( 4 ) Slide the rear o i l p u m p and governor assemblies over the o u t p u t shaft and p o s i t i o n i t against
t h e support, as shown i n F i g u r e 87. There are t w o
e x t r a holes i n the housing w h i c h are used f o r vents.
valve b y t u r n i n g t h e o u t p u t shaft. B o t h shall f a l l
freely i n governor b o i y .
.101. TBANSMISSION EXTENSION — INSTALLATION
(1) I n s t a l l t h e new transmission extension gasket
over guide studs and i n t o position against o u t p u t
shaft support. D o n o t use any sealing m a t e r i a l on
gaskets.
OUTPUT
SHAFT
G O V E R N O R A N D REAR O I L
PUMP H O U S I N G ASSEMBLIES
Fig.
56x611 A
87—Removal and Installation of Governor and
Rear Oil Pump Housing Assemblies
Make definitely sure t h a t no a t t e m p t is made t o i n s t a l l bolts i n these holes. Check each threaded hole
before i n s t a l l i n g bolts.
( 5 ) I n s t a l l the r e a r o i l p u m p h o u s i n g t o o u t p u t
shaft support bolts. These special bolts do not require washers. T i g h t e n the bolts d o w n evenly and
torque 10 to 12 foot-pounds torque. A f t e r the bolts
have been p r o p e r l y torqued, t u r n t h e o u t p u t shaft t o
make sure the p u m p gears are free t o rotate. I f not,
disassemble the p u m p t o determine cause.
( 2 ) Place t h e extension housing over o u t p u t shaft
and guide studs and slide i n t o position against supp o r t being careful n o t to damage rear o i l seal or
bushing. I n s t a l l the extension to case bolts and lockwashers and t i g h t e n 25 to 30 foot-pounds t o r q u e .
A f t e r these bolts have been p r o p e r l y torqued, t u r n
t h e o u t p u t shaft t o make sure i t t u r n s freely.
( 3 ) I n s t a l l the speedometer d r i v e pinion and
sleeve assembly i n t h e transmission extension and
t i g h t e n 40 t o 45 foot-pounds t o r q u e .
102.
P A B I I N G BBA1E — INSTALLATION
(1) I n s t a l l brake shoe anchor and anchor p i n i n
t h e extension housing.
( 2 ) I n s t a l l the brake support spacer (neoprene)
i n p o s i t i o n o n back o f b r a k e support and spacer sleeve
i n center o f support. Slide p a r k i n g brake assembly
( i n t a c t ) over rear of extension and anchor p i n . Make
sure spacer sleeve remains i n center o f support.
G O V E B N O l WEIGHTS A N D V A L V E ASSEMBLY
— INSTALLATION
( 3 ) I n s t a l l brake support grease shield on extension housing.
( 1 ) A l i g n t h e l o c a t i n g hole i n o u t p u t shaft t o
locating bolt hole i n governor support and i n s t a l l
locating bolt, t i g h t e n 60 to 80 i n c h pounds torque.
I f the governor body has been removed, t i g h t e n t h e
f o u r governor body screws.
I n d e n t i n the shield is f o r correct p o s i t i o n i n g on
t h e extension. The shield m u s t be located o n t h e
extension f a r enough t o p e r m i t i n s t a l l a t i o n of t h e
spring.
100.
( 2 ) D r y the governor w e i g h t assembly and valve
w i t h compressed air, b u t do not l u b r i c a t e w h e n assembling. Place the governor w e i g h t assembly (secondary w e i g h t snap r i n g facing o u t ) , i n t o governor
body ( F i g . 8 8 ) , and using pliers, Tool C-3229, i n s t a l l
t h e snap r i n g ( F i g . 3 8 ) , beveled side o u t w a r d .
( 3 ) Place t h e governor valve ( s m a l l end up) on
governor shaft, slide assembly i n t o g o v e r n o r body
t h r o u g h t h e o u t p u t shaft and governor w e i g h t assembly ( F i g . 3 7 ) ; a t t h e same t i m e p o s i t i o n i n g valve i n
body and t h e n i n s t a l l the governor valve shaft snap
r i n g ( w e i g h t assembly end), ( F i g . 3 6 ) . M a k e v e r y
sure snap r i n g s on b o t h ends of t h e governor valve
shaft fit securely. A f t e r snap r i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n , apply
sufficient pressure t o b o t h ends of t h e valve shaft t o
force snap r i n g s to outer p o r t i o n of snap r i n g grooves.
Check operation of governor w e i g h t assembly and
56x610
Fig. 88—Removal a n d Installation of Governor Weight
Assembly
BRAKE S H O E A N C H O R PIN
^
BRAKE A N C H O R W A S H E R
Fig. 89—Internal Expanding Hand Brake (Drum Removed)
( 4 ) I n s t a l l the brake support grease shield s p r i n g
(opening i n the s p r i n g t o w a r d a d j u s t i n g sleeve).
Make sure t h e s p r i n g is p r o p e r l y seated i n groove.
( 5 ) Slide the brake shoe r e t u r n s p r i n g behind t h e
grease shield s p r i n g and hook i n t o position, as shown
i n F i g u r e 89.
(6)
I n s t a l l " C " type brake anchor washer.
(7) I n s t a l l propeller shaft flange and d r u m assembly, washer and n u t . W h i l e h o l d i n g flange w i t h Tool
C-3281, t i g h t e n t o 175 foot-pounds torque.
transmission w i l l have t o be p a r t i a l l y disassembled
to allow an i n p u t shaft t h r u s t washer of proper
thickness to be installed by the f o l l o w i n g additional
steps:
( 4 ) Remove t h e bolts f r o m transmission extension and i n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C-3283.
( 5 ) A s a complete assembly, remove t h e p a r k i n g
brake, extension, o u t p u t shaft support and U n i t N o .
HAND BRAKE ASSY.
103. HECHECIING FBONT CLUTCH
END CLEA1ANCE
P r i o r t o i n s t a l l i n g the valve bodies and t r a n s f e r plate
assembly, recheck f r o n t c l u t c h end clearance u s i n g
dial indicator, Tool C-3339, as shown i n F i g u r e 34.
(1) I n s t a l l the dial indicator and p r y the c l u t c h
f o r w a r d b y carefully i n s e r t i n g s c r e w d r i v e r between
the f r o n t and r e a r c l u t c h .
( 2 ) Remove the s c r e w d r i v e r and w i t h p o i n t of dial
i n d i c a t o r contacting edge of f r o n t c l u t c h retainer, set
the i n d i c a t o r t o zero.
( 3 ) P r y t h e f r o n t c l u t c h assembly r e a r w a r d
against rear c l u t c h and take i n d i c a t o r reading. T h i s
clearance should be f r o m .020" t o .050".
I f the clearance is n o t w i t h i n these l i m i t s ,
the
o6x6.56A
Fig.
90—Removal of Output Shaft Support, Extension,
H a n d b r a k e Assembly a n d Unit No. 1 a s a n Assembly
TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION—
59
1, as shown i n F i g u r e 90. Support assemblies as m u c h
as possible w h e n r e m o v i n g to prevent damaging the
seal r i n g s on t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e shaft. Refer t o "Power
T r a i n U n i t s — Removal," U n i t N o . 2 and U n i t N o . 3.
( 6 ) U s i n g a micrometer, measure t h e thickness
of the i n p u t shaft t h r u s t washer and select a washer
t h a t w i l l provide correct clearance. T h r u s t washers
are available i n t h e f o l l o w i n g thicknesses:
Thickness
.116"
.097"
.078"
.059"
to
to
to
to
.117"
.099"
.080"
.061"
Color
Natural
Red
Black
Orange
( 7 ) Reinstall the power t r a i n u n i t s . Refer t o
"Power T r a i n U n i t s — I n s t a l l a t i o n ; " U n i t N o . 3 and
U n i t N o . 2.
( 8 ) I n s t a l l t h e p a r k i n g b r a k e assembly, extension,
o u t p u t shaft support and U n i t N o . 1 i n one assembly
as removed, f o l l o w i n g t h e procedure as described i n
the i n s t a l l a t i o n of U n i t N o . 1.
(9) I n s t a l l the extension housing bolts and
washers (remove t h e guide studs and replace
the r e m a i n i n g bolts and lockwashers) and
t i g h t e n a l l extension housing bolts 25 to 30
pounds torque.
lockwith
then
foot-
( 1 0 ) Rotate the o u t p u t shaft to make sure i t t u r n s
freely and t h e n recheck the f r o n t clutch end clearance.
104. BAND ADJUSTMENTS
Since b o t h band assemblies have been removed, i t
is v e r y i m p o r t a n t t h a t t h e p a r k i n g brake d r u m is
t u r n e d i n a clockwise and counter-clockwise direc-
Fig. 92—Installing Oil Strainer on V a l v e Body a n d
Transfer Plate A s s e m b l y
t i o n t o center the bands on t h e d r u m s p r i o r t o m a k i n g
band adjustments.
Low-Reverse (Rear) Band
Refer t o ''Maintenance A d j u s t m e n t s Test,"
graph 8 ( b ) .
Para-
Kickdown (Front) Band
Refer to "Maintenance, A d j u s t m e n t s
Paragraph 8 (a).
and
Tests,"
105. ACCUMULATOR PISTON — INSTALLATION
( 1 ) L u b r i c a t e t h e p i s t o n seal r i n g s and place t h e
accumulator i n t o position i n t h e transmission case.
Compress t h e outer seal r i n g and tap l i g h t l y i n t o
the t r a n s m i s s i o n case and t h e n place t h e accumulator
piston s p r i n g down i n t o the accumulator piston.
106. V A L V E BODY A N D TRANSFER PLATE
ASSEMBLY — INSTALLATION
( 1 ) Inspect t h e m a t i n g surfaces of the valve body
assembly f o r cleanliness. Place t h e manual lever i n
t h e reverse position ( a l l t h e w a y i n ) .
( 2 ) U s i n g a suitable guide, such as a piece o f
w e l d i n g r o d , inserted t h r o u g h the push b u t t o n cable
opening i n t h e transmission case, slide t h e cable
adapter over the end o f the guide, as shown i n F i g u r e
91, w i t h t h e adapter a t t a c h i n g s t u d f a c i n g t o w a r d
the b o t t o m of t h e transmission case.
( 3 ) Place t h e valve body and t r a n s f e r plate assemb l y i n t o position on the transmission case, and at the
same t i m e g u i d i n g t h e cable adapter stud i n t o the
hole i n the manual c o n t r o l lever ( F i g . 3 3 ) .
•4
Fig. 91—Installing C a b l e A d a p t e r
60x9
(4) I n s t a l l the cable adapter s t u d n u t and t i g h t e n
securely.
( 5 ) I n s t a l l the transfer plate bolts (leaving f o u r
holes vacant to attach the o i l s t r a i n e r ) , t i g h t e n
evenly and torque 14 to 16 foot-pounds.
( 6 ) W i t h the sealing washers on the ends of the
s t r a i n e r tubes, place strainer i n position on t h e
t r a n s f e r plate. I n s t a l l r e m a i n i n g bolts and torque 14
to 16 foot-pounds ( F i g . 9 2 ) .
( 7 ) I n s t a l l the n e u t r a l s t a r t e r s w i t c h and sealing
washer and t i g h t e n 15 to 20 foot-pounds torque.
Make sure manual lever contacts the s w i t c h plunger
w h e n i n n e u t r a l position.
107.
OIL PAN — I N S T A L L A T I O N
Use a new gasket, install the oil pan and t i g h t e n
bolts 12 to 17 foot-pounds torque. Do not overt i g h t e n , as a leak at the gasket m a y result due t o
possible d i s t o r t i o n of the flange of the pan.
108.
INSTALLING TRANSMISSION I N VEHICLE
( 1 ) I n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C-3276, i n the t w o
transmission m o u n t i n g holes i n t h e r i g h t side o f
torque converter housing.
( 2 ) W i t h f r o n t o i l pump d r i v e sleeve lubricated,
i n s t a l l i t , m a k i n g sure the d r i v i n g lugs are p r o p e r l y
engaged w i t h the oil p u m p pinion. The m a i n p o r t i o n
of d r i v e sleeve w i l l be l u s h w i t h the f r o n t o f t h e
p u m p housing when p r o p e r l y installed ( F i g . 8 1 ) .
( 3 ) Note the position of the d r i v i n g lugs inside
the torque c o n v e r t e r - h u b , t h e n position f r o n t o i l
p u m p d r i v e sleeve on the transmission accordingly,
to aid i n proper engagement w h e n transmission is
installed.
( 4 ) Slide the transmission over the guide studs
and i n t o position against the converter housing. M a k e
sure d r i v i n g lugs on f r o n t o i l p u m p d r i v e sleeve
properly engage the torque converter. To avoid
damage t o the f r o n t o i l pump, do not use t r a n s m i s -
sion to torque converter housing screws t o force
transmission and housing together. I f the o i l pump
drive sleeve and i n p u t shaft have been properly
aligned, the transmission should slide i n t o position
relatively easy. Do not force.
( 5 ) I n s t a l l t w o transmission case to torque converter housing screws and lockwashers i n the left
side, do not t i g h t e n . Remove the guide studs and
install t h e t w o transmission case to housing screws
and lockwashers i n the r i g h t side. T i g h t e n the f o u r
down evenly to specifications.
(6) Place crossmember i n t o position and i n s t a l l
t h e crossmember to torsion bar bracket bolts. T i g h t e n
to specifications. L o w e r the engine and at the same
t i m e a l i g n m o u n t i n g bolts i n insulator bracket w i t h
holes i n rear s p r i n g m o u n t plate. I n s t a l l the nuts
and lockwashers, t i g h t e n to specifications.
( 7 ) Remove the support fixture, Tool C-3487, f r o m
the side of t h e frame member.
(8) I n s t a l l the o i l cooling lines. Connect n e u t r a l
s t a r t i n g s w i t c h w i r e to s w i t c h . I n s t a l l o i l pan filler
tube n u t and t i g h t e n the n u t to specifications. Connect speedometer cable. Engage ball end of the p a r k i n g brake cable i n operating lever and t i g h t e n cable
clamp bolt. I n s t a l l a d j u s t i n g brake screw cover plate
on p a r k i n g brake support. Connect t h e f r o n t u n i versal j o i n t and t i g h t e n nuts to 37 foot-pounds
torque. I n s t a l l the starter ( i f removed).
( 9 ) Connect t h r o t t l e control linkage to t h r o t t l e
lever on the transmission. I n s t a l l push b u t t o n cont r o l cable i n the adapter m a k i n g sure s p r i n g lock
engages the cable. A d j u s t t h e manual control cable.
Refer to Paragraph 7. T i g h t e n the cable adjustable
m o u n t i n g bracket n u t securely. L o w e r the vehicle
and connect the b a t t e r y . Refill transmission w i t h
A u t o m a t i c Transmission F l u i d (Type " A " , Suffix
" A " ) . A d j u s t the t h r o t t l e linkage (Paragraph 1 0 ) .
RECONDITION V A L V E BODY AND T R A N S F E R
PLATE ASSEMBLIES
109. V A L V E BODY — R E M O V A L FROM TRANSFER
PLATE A N D DISASSEMBLY
To f a c i l i t a t e t h e reassembly o f t h e valve body i t is
suggested t h a t the valves, springs, and plugs removed
f r o m one side o f the valve body be k e p t i n separate
containers, a p a r t f r o m the parts removed f r o m t h e
o t h e r p o r t i o n of the valve body. The parts used i n
t h i s new one piece valve body are not interchangeable w i t h those of earlier p r o d u c t i o n models.
( 1 ) Place the valve body and t r a n s f e r plate assemb l y i n stand, Tool C-3528, w i t h the operating lever
shafts i n the d o w n w a r d position, as shown i n F i g u r e
TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION —61
TRANSFER
PLATE
TOOL
VALVE
VALVE
BODY
BODY
PLATE
60x7
60x26
Fig. 93—Valve Body a n d Transfer Plate Assembly
Fig. 95—Location of Check V a l v e Balls in V a l v e Body
in Stand
valve s p r i n g ( C ) . Remove the snap r i n g ( J ) and slide
out s h u t t l e valve ( I ) .
93. Never clamp a n y p o r t i o n o f any valve body assembly i n a vise or use force w h e n r e m o v i n g or i n s t a l l i n g t h e valves and plugs,
( 6 ) Remove t h e 1-2 r e l a y valve s p r i n g ( D ) and
1-2 relay valve ( E ) .
( 2 ) Remove t h e blocker valve
blocker valve and s p r i n g , F i g u r e 94.
retainer
plate,
( 3 ) Remove t h e cross recess screws t h a t hold t h e
t r a n s f e r plate, valve body and valve body cover together. A l l screws are o f equal l e n g t h . W h e n the last
screw i s removed, t h e valve body should be held and
lowered cautiously t o prevent loss of any o f the six
ball check valves. Observe the location o f these balls
and t h e n remove t h e balls. A l l check valve balls are
of t h e same size ( F i g . 9 5 ) .
( 4 ) Remove t h e s h u t t l e valve and governor p l u g
cover plate ( A ) (larger of the t w o covers). (Refer
t o F i g . 96.)
(5)
Remove the s h u t t l e valve p l u g ( B ) and shuttle
BLOCKER
VALVE
BLOCKER
VALVE
( 7 ) Remove the 1-2 ( F ) and 2-3 (G) s h i f t valve
governor plugs.
( 8 ) Remove t h e s h i f t valve cover plate ( L ) . H o l d
t h e cover plate w h i l e releasing the s p r i n g tension to
prevent possible loss o f springs w h i l e the cover is
removed. (Refer to F i g . 97.)
( 9 ) Remove t h e 1-2 ( M ) and 2-3 ( N ) s h i f t valve
springs and valves ( O P ) .
(10) Remove t h e
(Q) and valve ( R ) .
t h r o t t l e compensating
spring
(11) Remove the t h r o t t l e valve cover plate ( S ) ,
t h r o t t l e valve ( T ) , t h r o t t l e valve s p r i n g ( U ) , k i c k down valve ( V ) and detent ( W ) .
F o r general cleaning purposes i t is n o t usually
necessary to disassemble and remove the m a n u a l
valve, manual valve lever, t h r o t t l e o p e r a t i n g lever,
or t h e manual valve lever detent ball and s p r i n g .
However, i f i t is deemed advisable to remove these
parts, p e r f o r m the f o l l o w i n g additional steps:
SPRING
THROTTLE LEVER
STOP
SCREW
' T H R O T T L E VALVE
"OPERATING
LEVER
MANUAL
VALVE
OPERATING
60x8
" LEVER
Fig. 94—Removal a n d Installation of Blocker V a l v e
( 1 2 ) Remove t h e t h r o t t l e control lever shaft snap
r i n g and w h i l e h o l d i n g t h e manual valve o p e r a t i n g
lever detent ball against the s p r i n g to prevent loss
of the ball and s p r i n g , slide o u t t h r o t t l e and manual
valve levers. Remove t h e detent ball and s p r i n g
(Fig. 94).
(13) Carefully slide the manual valve out of the
valve body.
(14) Remove blocked valve plate, s p r i n g and valve
(Fig. 94).
62 —TORQUEFLITE
TRANSMISSION
mmmWl
••H
-D
-A
A.
B.
60x5
Shuttle Valve and Governor
Plug Cover
Shuttle Valve Plug
Fig. 96—Shuttle a n d Relay V a l v e Side of V a l v e Body
C.
D.
E.
Shuttle Valve Spring
1-2 Relay Valve Spring
1-2 Relay Valve
F. 1-2 Shift Valve Governor Plug
G . 2-3 Shift Valve Governor Plug
H. Manual Valve
I.
J.
K.
Shuttle Valve
Shuttle Valve Snap Ring
Valve Body
V
i
60x6
L. Shift Valve Cover Plate
M. 1-2 Shift Valve Spring
N. 2-3 Shift Valve Spring
u
/
Fig. 97—Shift a n d Throttle V a l v e Side of V a l v e Body
O. 1-2 Shift Valve
P. 2-3 Shift Valve
Q. Throttle Compensating Valve Spring
R.
S.
T.
Throttle Compensating Valve
Throttle Valve Cover
Throttle Valve
U. Throttle Valve Spring
V. Kickdown Valve
W. Kickdown Vatve Detent
TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION—
110. V A L V E BODY, V A L V E BODY PLATE AND
TRANSFER PLATE — C L E A N I N G AND
INSPECTION
Place a l l p a r t s i n clean solvent, wash t h o r o u g h l y and
d r y w i t h compressed a i r . M a k e definitely sure all
passages are free f r o m obstructions. W h e n inspecting, also check f o r porous castings. Inspect a l l m a t i n g
surfaces f o r b u r r s , nicks and grooves. The small ones
m a y be removed w i t h v e r y fine w e t or d r y sand
paper ( 4 0 0 g r i t ) ; otherwise, t h e damaged parts m u s t
be replaced w i t h new parts. U s i n g straightedge, Tool
C-3335, check a l l m a t i n g surfaces f o r d i s t o r t i o n .
U s i n g a pen l i g h t , inspect t h e bores i n t h e valve
body f o r score marks, p i t s , and i r r e g u l a r i t i e s . I n spect a l l springs f o r d i s t o r t i o n and collapsed coils.
Inspect a l l valves and plugs f o r b u r r s , nicks and
scores. The small scratches m a y be removed w i t h
crocus cloth p r o v i d i n g e x t r e m e care is used n o t to
r o u n d off t h e s h a r p edge p o r t i o n o f v a l v e . The sharp
edge p o r t i o n is v i t a l l y i m p o r t a n t to t h i s t y p e valve
as i t helps t o prevent d i r t and f o r e i g n m a t t e r f r o m
g e t t i n g between valves and body, thus reducing possibilities o f s t i c k i n g . Check t h e valves and plugs f o r
free operation i n bores; t h e y m u s t f a l l freely i n bores
w h e n clean and d r y .
Inspect the valve body plate f o r nicks, scratches,
or b u r r s ; and make sure m e t e r i n g holes are open.
Inspect the t r a n s f e r plate f o r p o r o s i t y . Inspect t h e
machined surfaces f o r nicks and b u r r s .
The t h r o t t l e operating lever stop screw should be
inspected f o r being loose o r w o r n . Be sure the lock
n u t is t i g h t .
T h i s screw s h o u l d n e v e r be r e m o v e d o r
i t s position changed.
I t is pre-set a n d controls the
base t h r o t t l e p r e s s u r e s e t t i n g . S h o u l d i t become loose
it w i l l r e q u i r e c a r e f u l r e a d j u s t m e n t w i t h a s p e c i a l
s e r v i c e tool. R e f e r to P a r a g r a p h 10 ( e ) f o r a d j u s t ment procedure.
Inspect the manual and t h r o t t l e valve o p e r a t i n g
levers a n d shafts f o r being bent, w o r n , or the levers
loose on t h e i r shafts. I f bent or w o r n t h e y should be
replaced. I f t h e levers are loose o n shafts, t h e y m a y
be silver soldered only, otherwise t h e y m u s t be r e placed w i t h new parts.
All valves should be installed d r y and w i t h a r o t a t ing motion.
111. V A L V E BODY, V A L V E BODY PLATE A N D
TRANSFER PLATE — ASSEMBLY
( 1 ) W h i l e h o l d i n g the valve body, w i t h t h e o i l
passage ways f a c i n g d o w n w a r d , insert the manual
valve operating lever detent s p r i n g i n t o t h e valve
63
body recess followed b y t h e detent ball. H o l d t h e b a l l
against t h e s p r i n g w i t h t h e fingers t o prevent loss.
( 2 ) Slide the t h r o t t l e lever shaft up t h r o u g h t h e
valve body w i t h the smallest cam c o n t a c t i n g the end
of t h r o t t l e lever stop screw, as shown i n F i g u r e 94.
( 3 ) W h i l e c o n t i n u i n g t o hold the detent ball
against s p r i n g , slide t h e manual o p e r a t i n g lever
down over t h e t h r o t t l e valve shaft and at the same
t i m e index t h e a r m on the lever i n t o the end groove
of the m a n u a l valve. The detent notches i n the lever
should slide down against the detent ball.
( 4 ) I n s t a l l t h e snap r i n g over t h e t h r o t t l e lever
shaft. R o t a t e the manual lever t o see t h a t detent
and valve operate freely.
(5) (Refer t o F i g . 97,) Slide the k i c k d o w n detent
( W ) (counterbored end f i r s t ) over t h e machined end
of the k i c k d o w n valve ( V ) , and t h e n slide the assembly ( W - V ) , detent end first, i n t o the valve body.
I n s t a l l t h e t h r o t t l e valve s p r i n g ( U ) i n t o t h e valve
body followed b y the t h r o t t l e valve ( T ) , s p r i n g p i l o t
end first. I n s t a l l the t h r o t t l e valve cover plate (S)
and t i g h t e n the screw 2 5 t o 3 0 inch-pounds torque.
( 6 ) I n s t a l l the 1-2 and 2-3 s h i f t valves (O-P) w i t h
the s p r i n g p i l o t ends pointed o u t w a r d followed b y
springs ( M - N ) .
( 7 ) I n s t a l l the t h r o t t l e compensating valve ( R )
w i t h s p r i n g p i l o t end o u t w a r d followed b y the
t h r o t t l e compensating pressure s p r i n g ( Q ) .
( 8 ) I n s t a l l t h e s h i f t valve cover plate ( L ) and
t i g h t e n the screws 25 t o 30 inch-pounds torque.
( 9 ) T u r n t h e valve body over and refer to F i g u r e
96. I n s t a l l t h e shuttle valve ( I ) , small end first i n t o
valve body and i n s t a l l t h e snap r i n g ( J ) . T h e snap
r i n g should be replaced i f i t does not f i t securely.
( 1 0 ) I n s t a l l s h u t t l e valve s p r i n g (C) followed b y
t h e s h u t t l e valve p l u g ( B ) .
( 1 1 ) I n s e r t t h e 1-2 relay valve ( E ) , s p r i n g p i l o t
end o u t w a r d , followed b y relay valve s p r i n g ( D ) i n t o
valve body.
( 1 2 ) I n s t a l l the 1-2 and 2-3 s h i f t valve governor
plugs ( F - G ) .
( 1 3 ) Place the s h u t t l e valve and governor p l u g
plate cover ( A ) on valve body and t i g h t e n screws
2 5 to 30 inch-pounds torque.
( 1 4 ) Place the six ball checks i n t h e i r respective
positions i n the valve body, as shown i n F i g u r e 9 5 .
( 1 5 ) Set t h e t r a n s f e r plate cover ( t h i n steel p l a t e )
over the stand pilots, Tool C-3528, as shown i n F i g u r e
LINE P R E S S U R E CHART
(Ram
Manifold Cars O n l y )
Push B u t t o n
Position
Rear Wheels
R
N
D (Shifted into Direct)
2
1
D
Free t o T u r n
Free
Free
Free
Free
93, followed by the t r a n s f e r plate so t h a t all screw
holes line up.
(16) W i t h a l l ball check valves i n place, position
the valve body up against the t r a n s f e r plate and
cover, a l i g n i n g the screw holes and i n s t a l l the a t t a c h i n g screws and washers. T i g h t e n all screws evenly
25 to 30 inch-pounds torque.
(17) I n s e r t the reverse blocker valve s p r i n g into
top o f t r a n s f e r plate, as shown i n F i g u r e 94, f o l lowed by t h e blocker valve. The slot i n the lower
p o r t i o n of the blocker valve m u s t index w i t h the bar
of t r a n s f e r plate cover so t h a t the valve can be
depressed flush w i t h the top o f t r a n s f e r plate.
(18) Position the blocker valve cover plate over
the blocker valve so t h a t a l l openings i n the t r a n s f e r
plate are completely covered and t i g h t e n screws 25
to 30 inch-pounds torque.
N O T E : I f t h i s plate is i n c o r r e c t l y positioned, governor pressure leakage w i l l result. W h e n c o r r e c t l y
installed, the edge of the plate w i l l align up flush
w i t h the edge of the valve body t r a n s f e r plate,
completely covering the blocker valve bore and governor pressure passage i n the t r a n s f e r plate.
112.
SERVICE I N F O R M A T I O N
a. TorqueFlite Transmission — Ram Manifold Engines
T h e f o l l o w i n g i n f o r m a t i o n w i l l acquaint the service
—
to
Turn
to T u r n
to T u r n
to Turn
Engine
Speed
(rpm)
Line
Pressure
(psi)
1600
1200
1200
1200
1200
3500
235-275
100-110
104-106
100-110
100-110
108-115
technician w i t h the procedures t h a t differ f r o m the
standard TorqueFlite transmission and the one used
on cars equipped w i t h the r a m manifold.
Disassembly, inspection, and assembly procedures
are the same. There is a difference, however, i n line
pressure, governor pressure, planet pinion carrier,
and t h r o t t l e linkage a d j u s t m e n t ; t h e y are as follows:
( 1 ) The line pressure is increased f r o m 90 to 105
psi, (refer to r a m manifold line pressure c h a r t ) . I n
order to achieve t h i s change, a heavier regulator
valve spring is used.
( 2 ) Governor pressure is also changed. (Refer to
r a m m a n i f o l d governor pressure chart.) I n t h i s case,
t h e governor w e i g h t assembly incorporates a heavier
s p r i n g along w i t h a l i g h t e r outer w e i g h t .
( 3 ) Due to the increased torque provided b y r a m
induction, the k i c k d o w n and reverse planet p i n i o n
c a r r i e r assemblies differ, they embody a planet pinion
c a r r i e r t h a t is made of a different a l u m i n u m alloy.
( 4 ) The t h r o t t l e linkage is designed to conform
w i t h the r a m manifold equipped engine. (Refer to
Fig. 98).
I t is very i m p o r t a n t t h a t the t h r o t t l e linkage be
set i n the following order:
GOVERNOR P R E S S U R E CHART
(Ram
M a n i f o l d Cars O n l y )
Push B u t t o n
Position
Rear Wheels
PS-1, PS-3
Car Speed
D
D
D
Free to T u r n
Free to T u r n
Free to T u r n
20-24
35-41
53-60
PC-3, C300F
Car Speed
21-24
36-43
55-62
Governor
Pressure
15 psi
50 psi
75 psi
b. Positioning the Accelerator Shaft
( 1 ) Loosen t h e a d j u s t i n g nuts " A " and " B " (accelerator shaft to transmission r o d and accelerator
shaft to t h r o t t l e shaft lever r o d ) .
( 2 ) I n s e r t a piece o f 3/16 inch d r i l l rod, 10 inches
long i n t o t h e accelerator shaft bracket and t h r o u g h
the hole i n the lever.
(3) Move t h e transmission t h r o t t l e control lever
f o r w a r d u n t i l i t stops. T i g h t e n t h e locknut " A "
securely. T h i s positions t h e accelerator shaft.
Co Positioning the Accelerator Pedal
( 1 ) Unsnap t h e accelerator pedal t o shaft r o d .
( 2 ) T u r n the threaded end o f r o d either i n or o u t
u n t i l a n angle measurement of 114 degrees is ob-
-RIGHT BANK CARBURETOR ROD
BELL CRANK
ADJUSTING LINK
3/16"x3" PIN
(WELDING ROD)
(6) LOCKING BOLT A N D NUT
TOP VIEW
ADJUSTING LINK
(D L O C K I N G NUT
©
LOCKING
BOLT AND NUT
ACCELERATOR SHAFT
TO TRANSMISSION ROD
TRANSMISSION
THROTTLE CONTROL LEVER
KICKDOWN POSITION
WIDE OPEN
THROTTLE POSITION
LEFT BANK
CARBURETOR ROD
L O C K I N G NUT
0
ANTI-STALL UNIT
BELL CRANK
IDLE POSITION
ACCELERATOR PEDAL TO SHAFT ROD
3/16"xl0" PIN (WELDING ROD)
ACCELERATOR SHAFT
TO THROTTLESHAFT LEVER ROD
ACCELERATOR SHAFT BRACKET
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
ACCELERATOR PEDAL TO SHAFT ROD
ACCELERATOR SHAFT T O TRANSMISSION ROD
SIDE VIEW
@
L O C K I N G NUT"
ADJUSTING LINK
Fig. 9 8 — T h r o t t l e L i n k a g e — R a m M a n i f o l d (Schematic V i e w )
60x191
tained between the floor of car and the flat face of the
accelerator pedal.
and r i g h t bank carburetor r o d s ) .
( 3 ) T h i s angle can be obtained w i t h a p r o t r a c t o r .
( 3 ) Back off t h e anti-stall a d j u s t i n g plunger f a r
enough to allow the bellcrank to be pivoted.
( 4 ) A f t e r correct measurement has been obtained,
connect the r o d . Remove the locating p i n f r o m accelerator shaft bracket.
( 4 ) P i v o t the bellcrank u n t i l a 3/16 inch piece of
d r i l l rod 3 inches long can be inserted t h r o u g h the
bellcrank hole and down into the intake manifold.
d. Setting the Bellcrank
( 5 ) T i g h t e n locking nuts " C " and " D " securely.
Remove the % inch d r i l l r o d f r o m the bellcrank.
( 1 ) Inspect each carburetor to be sure the choke
valves are open; t h a t the fast idle cams are released
and the t h r o t t l e valves are closed.
( 2 ) Loosen t h e locking nuts " C " and " D " (left
6
( 6 ) Push r e a r w a r d on the accelerator shaft to
t h r o t t l e shaft lever rod a d j u s t i n g l i n k , u n t i l the stop
is reached. T i g h t e n locking n u t securely.
TORQUE CONVERTER
SERVICE PROCEDURES
113. REMOVAL A N D INSTALLATION OF TORQUE
C O N V E R T E R A N D HOUSING
moved f r o m
flanges.
a. Removal
( 2 ) Measure the crankshaft flange r u n o u t ( m a x i m u m is . 0 0 2 inch t o t a l indicator reading) b y using
dial indicator set, Tool C-3339, at one of the engine
block to housing bolt holes. Checking the crankshaft
flange r u n o u t w i l l determine w h e t h e r or not the
crankshaft flange m a y be c o n t r i b u t i n g to torque
converter hub r u n o u t .
( 1 ) Remove the transmission as outlined i n Paragraph 2 6 .
( 2 ) Remove the converter housing dust shield and
s t a r t i n g motor. Remove the torque converter housing-to-engine block, (or adapter plate) bolts and
washers. A s the housing is doweled to t h e engine
block (or adapter p l a t e ) , care m u s t be exercised
d u r i n g removal. Do not h a m m e r or p r y between the
m a t i n g surfaces t o loosen, as the m e t a l m a y be dist o r t e d w h i c h can result in m i s a l i g n m e n t .
( 3 ) A f t e r r e m o v i n g t h e housing, inspect t h e m a t i n g surfaces of t h e housing and engine block (or
adapter p l a t e ) . Remove a l l b u r r s or r o u g h spots w i t h
emery cloth. Remove all obstructions, d i r t , etc. f r o m
vent hole screens ( w h e n so equipped).
( 4 ) U s i n g wrench, Tool C-589, remove the s t u d
nuts and lock washers w h i c h hold the converter
u n i t to the c r a n k s h a f t . The torque converter assembly is a welded u n i t and cannot be serviced, except
as an assembly.
the
converter
and crankshaft
drive
I f the crankshaft flange r u n o u t is w i t h i n tolerance,
proceed to install the torque converter and housing
as f o l l o w s :
( 3 ) Position t h e torque converter u n i t on the
crankshaft flange. U s i n g wrench, Tool C-589, t i g h t e n
the stud nuts to specifications.
Before i n s t a l l i n g the torque converter housing, i t
is recommended t h a t the torque converter hub r u n out be checked (and corrected i f necessary) as outlined i n Paragraph 115. I f the torque converter hub
r u n o u t is w i t h i n specifications, continue t o i n s t a l l
the housing i n the f o l l o w i n g m a n n e r :
b. Installation
( 4 ) Position t h e housing over the dowels and
against m a t i n g face of the engine block (or adapter
p l a t e ) . T i g h t e n the m o u n t i n g bolts j u s t snug enough
to r e t a i n the housing i n position.
( 1 ) [ f a new torque converter is being installed,
make sure a l l visible f o r e i g n m a t t e r , such as raised
metal around studs, b u r r s , chips, etc. have been re-
( 5 ) Check (and correct i f necessary) t h e torque
converter housing bore and face r u n o u t as outlined
i n Paragraph 4. I f the bore and face r u n o u t are
w i t h i n specifications, t i g h t e n h o u s i n g bolts to specifications. I n s t a l l t h e m e t a l dust shield and s t a r t i n g
motor. I n s t a l l t h e transmission as outlined i n the
t r a n s m i s s i o n Group, P a r a g r a p h 108.
114.
REPLACING STARTER RING GEAR
Boiling Water
Place the r i n g gear i n a shallow container, add water,
and heat f o r a p p r o x i m a t e l y e i g h t minutes a f t e r the
w a t e r has come to a boil.
Steam
a. Removing Ring Gear
(1) Remove t h e t o r q u e converter and housing as
outlined i n P a r a g r a p h — .
( 2 ) Place the converter on t h e bench and carefully
remove the s t a k i n g lugs. T h i s can be done b y f i l i n g
or b y carefully k n o c k i n g the head off t h e l u g w i t h a
hammer and chisel.
( 3 ) Place t h e t o r q u e converter on blocks of wood
(for s u p p o r t ) w h i l e r e m o v i n g t h e gear. U s i n g a
b l u n t chisel, or d r i f t , t a p around t h e r i n g gear u n t i l
i t comes off the t o r q u e converter as shown i n F i g u r e
99.
N O T E : A small a m o u n t o f heat, directed on gear,
w i l l a i d i n i t s r e m o v a l i f r i n g gear is t o be discarded.
b. Installing Ring Gear
Remove the b u r r s or raised spots ( l e f t on t h e gear
contact surface of t h e torque converter) w i t h a file.
Do n o t remove more m e t a l f r o m the torque converter
t h a n is required t o remove the b u r r s and r o u g h
surfaces.
A n y of the f o l l o w i n g methods m a y be used t o heat
the s t a r t e r r i n g gear f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n on converter.
Place the r i n g gear on a flat surface and d i r e c t the
steam flow around t h e gear f o r a p p r o x i m a t e l y t w o
minutes.
Flame
Place the r i n g gear squarely on a flat surface. U s i n g
a medium-size t i p , direct a slow flame around the
i n n e r r i m of the gear, being careful not to direct t h e
flame onto t h e teeth of the r i n g gear. Place a few
drops o f w a t e r on t h e face of t h e gear at i n t e r v a l s
d u r i n g t h e h e a t i n g process. W h e n t h e gear is h o t
enough t o boil the drops of w a t e r , i n s t a l l a t i o n o f
the gear to the torque converter can be made.
Place the s t a r t e r gear over flange surface of the
torque converter, m a k i n g sure t h a t t h e rear face o f
gear contacts flange on the torque converter evenly
around t h e entire diameter.
Reweld t h e r i n g gear t o the torque converter,
u s i n g extreme care to place, as nearly as possible,
the same amount of m e t a l i n exactly the same locat i o n as on t h e o r i g i n a l assembly. T h i s is necessary
i n order to m a i n t a i n proper balance of t h e u n i t . Place
t h e welds a l t e r n a t e l y on opposite sides of t h e converter to minimize distortion.
Oven
Use Oven, C-794, and set t e m p e r a t u r e at 150 degrees
F. A l l o w r i n g gear to r e m a i n i n t h e oven f o r a p p r o x i m a t e l y 15 to 20 m i n u t e s .
The f o l l o w i n g suggestions are offered as an a i d i n
m a k i n g the w e l d :
(a)
Use a w e l d i n g c u r r e n t of 200 amps.
( b ) Use a D.C. welder t h a t is set s t r a i g h t p o l a r i t y
or an A . C . welder.
(c) Use 5/32 i n c h diameter, N o . 47 or 5/32 i n c h
d i a m e t e r N o . W 2 B w e l d i n g rods ( o r t h e i r equival e n t ) . T o prevent b u r n i n g t h r o u g h the torque converter, t h e arc should be directed at the intersection
of t h e gear and t h e housing f r o m an angle o f a p p r o x i m a t e l y 45 degrees f r o m t h e face o f the gear. D O
NOT GAS W E L D .
Before i n s t a l l i n g t h e torque converter, inspect a l l
gear teeth and remove a l l nicks w h e r e m e t a l is raised,
w e l d i n g splatter, etc., as these w i l l cause noisy
s t a r t e r operation.
53x91
Fig. 99—Removing Starter Ring G e a r
I n s t a l l torque converter and housing.
P a r a g r a p h 113.
Refer
to
115. TORQUE CONVERTER HUB RUNOUT
a. Checking Hub Runout
I t is n o t necessary t o remove t h e torque converter
housing t o make t h i s check.
( 1 ) I n s t a l l attachment, Tool C-3613, t o dial i n d i cator set, Tool C-3339, as shown i n F i g u r e 100.
i
( 2 ) I n s t a l l dial indicator support r o d i n one o f t h e
t r a n s m i s s i o n t o torque converter housing m o u n t i n g
bolt holes, as shown i n F i g u r e 100. Disconnect at
coil t o d i s t r i b u t o r secondary cable.
( 3 ) W i t h t h e remote c o n t r o l s t a r t e r s w i t c h , Tool
C-763, p r o p e r l y installed a t a convenient " h o t "
t e r m i n a l , crank t h e engine w h i l e n o t i n g i n d i c a t o r
needle deflection. Torque converter h u b r u n o u t m u s t
not exceed .004 inch.
Fig.
b. Correcting Hub Runout
I f t h e h u b r u n o u t exceeds .004 i n c h t o t a l i n d i c a t o r
reading, correct b y using heat. Before using heat,
make definitely sure that the torque converter has
been d r a i n e d .
( 1 ) I t is n o t necessary t o remove t h e h o u s i n g t o
correct r u n o u t w i t h heat application, as shown i n
F i g u r e 101.
( 2 ) M a r k t h e position o f t h e h u b l o w spot as
accurately as possible on t h e impeller shell. Rotate
t h e converter so t h a t t h i s m a r k is d i r e c t l y down.
( 3 ) U s i n g a piece o f chalk, m a r k t h e f r o n t cover
radius d i r e c t l y opposite t h e h u b low spot p r e v i o u s l y
m a r k e d on t h e impeller shell. T h e subsequent heati n g operation can now be done a t t h i s location, as
The size o f t h e spot t o be heated is governed b y
t h e m a g n i t u d e of hub r u n o u t and is usually about
(TOOL)
§111111™
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ • ^ ^ ^ K i
f* i^m^^^^ ' i . ' <<^^»^^-Si*|iBiiB^Bi^^^R^
: : ::
:
;
:
IK
K i l l (TOOL) lllilw
101J—Heating Torque Converter Showing
Heating
Operation
y i n c h diameter f o r .008 inch t o t a l indicator readi n g . U s i n g an acetylene t o r c h containing a N o . 3 t i p ,
and set t o m i n i m u m heat, apply i t t o t h e selected
spot u n t i l i t becomes a d u l l red. Rapid h e a t i n g o f a
local area is essential and i f t h e t o r c h is adjusted
properly, t h e spot w i l l become r e d w i t h i n a f e w
seconds. I f sparks are noted, i t is an indication t h a t
the t o r c h is too close and t h e m e t a l is s t a r t i n g t o
b u r n ; move back s l i g h t l y .
2
CAUTION
Care should be taken t o remove t h e t o r c h t h e i n s t a n t
t h e selected spot becomes a d u l l r e d , t o avoid over
correction o r damage t o t h e u n i t .
T h e area is t h e n quenched (as r a p i d l y as possible)
w i t h cold w a t e r (hose or w e t r a g s ) . I t is suggested
t h i s be done b y s t a r t i n g around t h e heated area and
w o r k i n g i n t o w a r d t h e spot. T h i s prevents t h e heat
f r o m spreading.
T h e h u b r u n o u t should n o t be rechecked u n t i l t h e
converter has r e t u r n e d t o a u n i f o r m r o o m temperature.
I f t h e converter h u b r u n o u t exceeds .016 inch t o t a l
i n d i c a t o r reading, remove t h e converter and recheck
t h e d r i v e flanges f o r raised metal chips. Check
crankshaft flange r u n o u t ( m a x i m u m .002 i n c h ) . I f
t h e h u b r u n o u t remains i n excess o f .016 inch t o t a l
i n d i c a t o r reading, i n s t a l l a new converter.
116. CHECKING A N D CORRECTING HOUSING FACE
A N D BORE RUNOUT
Fig. H00—Checking Torque Converter Hub Runouft
(Typical)
a. Bore Runout
T h e torque converter housing bore and face alignment, as well as converter h u b r u n o u t , should be
checked a n y t i m e t h a t a P o w e r F l i t e o r T o r q u e F l i t e
transmission is removed t o correct leakage a t t h e
PUMP DRIVE LUG
TORQUE
CONVERTER
MPELLER HUB
Fig.
102—Torque Converter Hub Showing Tool
C-3461 Installed
f r o n t p u m p o i l seal or f r o n t p u m p f a i l u r e — also
whenever a n engine replacement is made.
( 1 ) M o u n t Tool C-3461, shown i n F i g u r e 102, i n side the converter w i t h the ears of the washer beh i n d the converter pump d r i v e lugs. The square end
of the bolt can be held w i t h a w r e n c h as t h e n u t is
t i g h t e n e d . The dial indicator set, Tool C-3339, can
now be attached, as shown i n F i g u r e 103.
( 2 ) Locate the i n d i c a t o r so t h a t i t is b e a r i n g on
the transmission p i l o t bore of the converter housing
and r o t a t e t h e converter.
( 3 ) The r u n o u t m u s t not exceed .010 i n c h t o t a l
indicator reading.
To i l l u s t r a t e the recommended correction procedure, assume t h a t the t o t a l i n d i c a t o r r e a d i n g is
.016 inch, i n a d i r e c t i o n w h i c h approximates 2 o'clock
^ l«^^^^^^^B
f
Fig.
104—Eccentric Dowel (Schematic Diagram)
on engine block. (Refer to F i g . 104.) I n t h i s case,
the housing is off c r a n k s h a f t centerline .008 i n c h
(one-half t o t a l i n d i c a t o r reading) w h i c h is .003 i n c h
greater t h a n the allowable l i m i t of .005 (one-half
total indicator reading).
To correct an off-center condition, three
dowels are available.
W h e n selecting dowels to be used f o r a p a r t i c u l a r
job, take t h e dowel closest to one-half the t o t a l i n dicator reading. Refer to c h a r t .
I n t h e case, under consideration, use of the
i n c h offset dowels ( p a i r ) w i l l b r i n g the r u n o u t
w i t h i n the allowable l i m i t o f .005 inch, or .008
m i n u s .007 i n c h (offset dowels) equals .001 inch
out. The dowels m u s t be used i n pairs (same
number).
(TOOL)
INDICATOR
A
Fig. 103—Checking Housing l o r e Runout (Typical)
.007
well
inch
runpart
To i n s t a l l the dowell pins ( p a i r ) , remove t h e torque
converter h o u s i n g as outlined i n P a r a g r a p h 1 ( a ) .
DOWEL
58x1
off-set
57x524
Fig.
105—Removing Dowel Pin
E C C E N T R I C DOWEL CHART
Total Indicator
Reading
One-Half Total
Indicator Reading
Size Dowel
To B e Used
Dowel P a r t
Number
.012" to .020"
.022" to .034"
.036" to .052"
.006" to .010"
.011" to .017"
.018" to .026"
.007"
.014"
.021"
1736347
1736348
1736353
Select the eccentric dowels ( p a i r ) as indicated i n
the Eccentric Dowel Chart.
i t m a y be necessary to use the n e x t higher step
dowels, a d j u s t i n g these dowels w i t h t h e housing
installed to b r i n g the housing bore w i t h i n tolerance.
B o t h dowels should be inserted i n t o the engine block
(or adapter plate) up t o offset shoulder.
I n s t a l l b o t h dowels w i t h the slots parallel and
aligned i n t h e d i r e c t i o n to correct the bore r u n o u t .
(Slot indicates the d i r e c t i o n of m a x i m u m dowel ecc e n t r i c i t y . ) M a j o r i t y o f corrections w i l l be f o r one
direction o n l y ; b u t i t is possible t h a t the housing
bore m a y be out i n t w o directions. I n the l a t t e r case,
I n s t a l l and t i g h t e n the converter housing bolts to
specifications. Remount the dial indicator and recheck the bore r u n o u t . Small corrections can be made
by loosening the housing m o u n t i n g bolts and t u r n i n g
dowels w i t h a screwdriver to s h i f t the housing and
b r i n g the bore w i t h i n l i m i t s .
Remove the dowel pins f r o m engine block (or adapter
plate) as shown i n F i g u r e 105.
SHIM T H I C K N E S S - L O C A T I O N T A B L E
Location o f H o u s i n g
Face L o w P o i n t
(a) Near one o f the
lower trans, to
hsg. bolt holes.
Location of
Shim
(a) Place s h i m on bolt
w h i c h w i l l enter
t h i s hole.
T o t a l I n d i c a t o r Reading
Observed on Housing Face
Total Shim
Thickness
(a) 1)
2)
3)
.005 to .010"
.010 to .015"
.015 to .020"
(a) 1)
2)
3)
.013"
.020"
.026"
(b)
Near one o f the
upper trans, to
hsg. bolt holes.
(b)
Place s h i m on b o l t
w h i c h w i l l enter
t h i s hole.
(b)
1)
2)
3)
.005 to .010"
.010 to .015"
.015 to .020"
(b)
1)
2)
3)
.014
.021"
.029"
(c)
Between the t w o
lower t r a n s , to
hsg. bolt holes
(c)
Place shims on b o t h
bolts t h a t w i l l
enter these holes.
(c)
1)
2)
3)
.005 to .010"
.010 to .015"
.015 to .020"
(c)
1)
2)
3)
.010"
.015"
.020"
(d)
Between the t w o
upper trans, to
hsg. bolt holes.
(d)
Place shims on b o t h
bolts w h i c h w i l l
enter these holes.
(d)
1)
2)
3)
.005 to .010"
.010 to .015"
.015 to .020"
(d)
1)
2)
3)
.003"
.012"
.016"
(e) 1)
.005 to .010"
(e) 1)
2)
.010 to .015"
2)
3)
.015 to .020"
3)
(e) Between t h e upper
and lower trans.
to hsg. bolt holes.
(e) Place shims on b o t h
bolts w h i c h w i l l
enter these holes.
u p p e r - -.010"
lower— -.014"
u p p e r - -.015"
lower— -.020"
upper— -.020"
lower—.027
;
POWERFLITE TRANSMISSION — 71
as shown i n F i g u r e 106.
(2)
Rotate t h e converter.
( 3 ) I f t h e t o t a l i n d i c a t o r r e a d i n g is greater t h a n
.008", note t h e amount of t h e t o t a l i n d i c a t o r reading
and t h e location o f the lowest i n d i c a t o r reading (i.e.,
the p o i n t w h e r e the i n d i c a t o r a r m or follower is
extended t h e f u r t h e s t ) .
( 4 ) Place t h e s h i m or shims on one or more o f t h e
transmission housing bolts i n position between t r a n s mission and housing.
CONSULT T H E " S H I M THICKNESS — LOCAT I O N T A B L E * FOR S E L E C T I O N O F CORRECT
S H I M OR S H I M S TO B E U S E D I N C O R R E C T I O N
PROCEDURES.
9
INDfCAIoi^
(TOOL) K '
^B^^
I
Fig.
58x2 A
106—Checking Face Runout (Typical)
b . Face Runout
(1)
Relocate the dial i n d i c a t o r set, Tool C-3339,
(5)
T i g h t e n the housing bolts to specifications.
( 6 ) I n s t a l l the transmission as outlined i n Parag r a p h 108, Transmission Group.
P O W E R F L I T E TRANSMISSION
CONTENTS
A s s e m b l i n g t h e Transmission
Paragraph
9
Page
95
I n s t a l l i n g K i c k d o w n B a n d A d j u s t i n g Screw
I n s t a l l i n g t h e Torque Converter Reaction Shaft
Installing the Kickdown Piston
I n s t a l l i n g the Reverse Servo P i s t o n
I n s t a l l i n g the Regulator V a l v e B o d y
Installing the Front Oil Pump
I n s t a l l i n g the K i c k d o w n B a n d and Levers
A s s e m b l i n g t h e D i r e c t C l u t c h Piston Retainer
I n s t a l l i n g Reverse B a n d and Levers Assembly
I n s t a l l i n g t h e Planet P i n i o n Carriers i n H o u s i n g
I n s t a l l i n g the O u t p u t Shaft Support, Planet
P i n i o n Carriers and H o u s i n g Assembly
I n s t a l l i n g the Rear O i l P u m p
I n s t a l l i n g t h e Governor on the O u t p u t Shaft
I n s t a l l i n g t h e Transmission Extension, O i l
Seal and B e a r i n g
Checking Transmission E n d Play
A d j u s t m e n t of Bands (on bench)
Checking f o r O i l Leaks
_
Leaks N o t R e q u i r i n g Removal o f Transmission
F r o m Vehicle
Leaks R e q u i r i n g Removal of Transmission
F r o m Vehicle
4
81
72 —POWERFLITE TRANSMISSION
Paragraph
Page
Disassembly and Inspection (Transmission)
Checking Transmission E n d Play
Removal of H a n d Brake Assembly
Removal, Disassembly and Inspection of
Transmission Extension
Governor
Rear O i l P u m p
Removal of O u t p u t Shaft Support, Planet P i n i o n
Carriers and D i r e c t C l u t c h Assemblies
Removal and Inspection of Planet Carriers
Disassembly and Inspection o f the D i r e c t
Clutch P i s t o n Retainer
Removal and Inspection of K i c k d o w n B a n d
Removal of t h e Reverse and K i c k d o w n B a n d Levers
Removal of the F r o n t O i l P u m p
Removal of Regulator Valve Body
Removal of Reverse Servo Piston
Removal of K i c k d o w n Piston
Removal of Torque Converter Reaction Shaft
8
86
E x p l a n a t i o n of Index Items (Trouble Diagnosis C h a r t )
1
77
H y d r a u l i c C o n t r o l Pressure Checks
3
80
11
105
2
78
7
86
10
101
L i n e Pressure
T h r o t t l e Pressure
Governor Pressure
D i r e c t Clutch Pressure
L u b r i c a t i o n Pressure
I n s t a l l i n g the Transmission i n Vehicle
Operation
.
_
Torque Converter
Gearshift C o n t r o l Push B u t t o n
Gearshift C o n t r o l H o u s i n g
Neutral Starting Switch
S t a r t i n g t h e Engine
Push S t a r t i n g
H o w t o D r i v e the Vehicle
Towing
Checking F l u i d L e v e l
R e m o v i n g Transmission F r o m Vehicle
.
Servicing the Valve Body and T r a n s f e r Plate
Disassembling the Valve Body and T r a n s f e r Plate
Cleaning and Inspecting the Valve Body and
T r a n s f e r Plate
A s s e m b l i n g t h e Valve Body and T r a n s f e r Plate
I n s t a l l i n g the V a l v e Body and T r a n s f e r Plate
Paragraph
Page
Servicing Gearshift C o n t r o l U n i t
Removal of Gearshift Control U n i t
I n s t a l l i n g Gearshift Control U n i t
R e m o v i n g Gearshift Control Cable
I n s t a l l i n g Gearshift Control Cable
Replacing Back-Up L i g h t S w i t c h ( i f so equipped)
Replacing P u s h B u t t o n U n i t L a m p B u l b
Removal and Inspection o f Cable Assembly,
Transmission E n d
5
82
Transmission and Controls — A d j u s t m e n t
T h r o t t l e Pressure and T h r o t t l e L i n k a g e A d j u s t m e n t
Throttle Linkage Adjustments
T h r o t t l e Pressure A d j u s t m e n t
A d j u s t m e n t o f K i c k d o w n ( F r o n t ) Band
Reverse (Rear) B a n d A d j u s t m e n t
A d j u s t i n g the Gearshift Control Cable
Cable and N e u t r a l S t a r t i n g S w i t c h A d j u s t m e n t
Road T e s t i n g
6
83
T r o u b l e Diagnosis C h a r t
—
76
DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
Type
A u t o m a t i c T w o Speed w i t h
Torque Converter
Torque Converter D i a m e t e r
(inches)
11%
Oil Capacity of Transmission and Torque Converter
20 pt. ( A u t o m a t i c Transmission
F l u i d — T y p e " A " Suffix " A " )
M e t h o d of Cooling
Water
Lubrication
Pumps ( R o t o r Type)
N u m b e r of C l u t c h Plates
6
GEAR RATIOS
Low
Drive — Breakaway
1.72 to 1
.
1.72 t o 1
Drive — Direct
1
to 1
Reverse
2.39 t o 1
FRONT-REAR PUMPS
Type
E n d Clearance ( F r o n t P u m p )
E n d Clearance (Rear P u m p )
GOVERNOR (3-STAGE)
Type
Clearance Between Governor Valve and Body
Gear ( R o t a r y )
.
.0012 to .0022"
.001 t o .003"
Centrifugal
.002 t o .005"
DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (Continued)
THRUST WASHERS
Direct Clutch P i s t o n Retainer ( F i b r e )
.078 to .080"
.095 to .097"
.112 to .114"
K i c k d o w n Planet P i n i o n C a r r i e r
_
.062 to .064"
K i c k d o w n A n n u l u s Gear
.062 to .064"
Planet P i n i o n C a r r i e r H o u s i n g
.078 t o .080"
SNAP RINGS
Planet P i n i o n C a r r i e r H o u s i n g
.062 t o .064"*
.072 to .074"*
.082 to .084"*
K i c k d o w n Sun Gear
.058 to .060"
.062 to .064"
Reverse A n n u l u s Gear
.078 to .080"
.082 t o .084"
.086 to .088"
I f t h i s selection of snap r i n g s fails to provide m i n i m u m clearance, use k i c k d o w n sun gear snap r i n g
( . 0 5 8 - .060").
S P E C I A L TOOLS
C-452
Puller
C-3288
Pilots
C-484
Pliers
C-3292
Gauge
C-589
Wrench
C-3293
Gauge
C-748
Puller
C-3294
Stand
Pilots
C-760
Pliers
C-3295
C-811
Wrench
C-3297
Remover-Installer
C-3201A
Jack
C-3301
Pliers
C-3202A
Jack
C-3335
Straightedge
C-3204
Driver
C-3339
Set-Dial Indicator
C-3205
Driver
C-3380
Wrench
C-3275
Driver
C-3461
Fixture
C-3276
Pilots
C-3487
Support
C-3278
Driver
C-3529
Compressor-
C-3279A
W rench
Servo S p r i n g
C-3280
Stand
C-3575
Compressor
C-3281
Wrench
C-3583
Adapter-For
C-3283
Pilots
DD-1150
Tachometer
C-3287
Puller
C-3380 Torque W r e n c h
TIGHTENING R E F E R E N C E
Foot-Pounds
Case to Converter H o u s i n g B o l t
Case O i l L i n e P l u g
Inch-Pounds
45
-
120
-
Case to Reaction Shaft B o l t
-
15
30
Direct Clutch Shift Valve Plug Bolt
E x t e n s i o n to Case B o l t
25
F r o n t O i l P u m p H o u s i n g Bolt —
.—
.
180
—
Governor Body B o l t
90
Governor L o c a t i n g B o l t
.
45
Governor O i l Pressure Take Off P l u g
120
K i c k d o w n Band A d j u s t i n g B o l t N u t .
40
K i c k d o w n Band L e v e r Shaft P l u g
.
25
180
K i c k d o w n Strainer Support B o l t
Manual Control Lever N u t
7
l
N e u t r a l Starter S w i t c h — I n i t i a l E l e c t r i c a l Contact Plus / to y T u r n
s
Oil Pan B o l t and Lockwasher
.
7 5 Max.
2
180
..
Oil Pan F i l l e r Tube Bracket B o l t N u t
_
20
Oil Pan F i l l e r Tube N u t
40
O u t p u t Shaft Support B o l t
O u t p u t Shaft Support Pipe P l u g
Rear O i l P u m p H o u s i n g Bolt
25
.
120
-
180
.
Regulator Valve S p r i n g Retainer
50
Reverse Band Lever A d j u s t i n g B o l t N u t
35
Shaft Flange N u t
Speedometer P i n i o n Sleeve
T h r o t t l e Control Lever N u t
175
45
7
120
T h r o t t l e O i l Pressure Take Off P l u g
T h r o t t l e V a l v e A d j u s t i n g Bolt P l u g
25
Torque Converter C o n t r o l Valve S p r i n g Retainer
40
45
T r a n s f e r Plate Cover B o l t — L o n g
T r a n s f e r Plate Cover B o l t — S h o r t
T r a n s f e r Plate B o l t — L o n g
T r a n s f e r Plate B o l t — S h o r t
V a l v e Body E n d Cover L o n g B o l t
V a l v e Body E n d Cover B o l t
V a l v e Body E n d Cover Short B o l t
45
180
180
25
25
25
Cable C o n t r o l
Cable Clip to Column Jacket B o l t
70
Push B u t t o n Box to I n s t r u m e n t Panel, Plate or B r a c k e t Assembly N u t
20
Transmission Cable B r a c k e t B o l t
15
76 — POWERFLITE
TRANSMISSION
S E R V I C E DIAGNOSIS CHART
(PowerFlite Transmission)
OPERATING
STEMS
Shift A b n o r m a l i t i e s
T O CHICK
Miscellaneous
Response
m
A. Oil Level
B.
Throttle
C.
Gearshift Control
Link
Adj.
•
#
Cable Adj.
D. Pressure Checks—
Line Lube, etc.
E. K.D. Band Adj.
m
*
m
m
m
m
l
1
#
•
%
•
• •
•
#
•
o
•
G. Engine Idle
H. Neutral Start SW.
I. Handbrake Adj.
J. Regulator Valves—
Springs
I
m
K. Converter Control
Valve
L. Breather
M.
Output Shaft Rear
Bushing
N.
T.C.
O. K.D. Servo-Band
Linkage
P. R. Servo Band
Linkage
Q. Oil Strainer
•
•
•
R. Valve Body-Bolts—
Mating Surfaces
m
•
m
m
m
m
m
S. Speedometer
Pinion
T. Governor
#
• •
• • •
•
• •
• •
•
#
m
•
•
•
•
m
#
i
•
•
•
#
U. Rear Pump
a. Front Pump—
Drive Sleeve
b. Reg. Valve Body,
Gasket, Surfaces
m
o
•
m
c. Converter-Housing
e. Planetary Gear Set
f. Seal Rings
•
m
d. Direct Clutch
•
m
•
j #
#
•
j
|
!
m
®
•
•
• •
• •
•
•
#
m
•
m
1
• •
• • •
•
•
•
m
m
•
•
•
Starter Won't
Energize
Impossible to Push
Start Engine
Trans.
Overheats
Grating, Scraping, Growling
Noises
Drags or
Locks
Moves Backward
in Neutral
•
m
®
F. Reverse Band Adj.
No Drive in
Any Range
Moves Forward in
Neutral
• • • • •
• •
•
• m • •
•
• •
Reverse Band
Slips
No Drive
in D-L
Slips in All
Ranges
Slips in
Drive Position
#
Shifts
Erratically
First
No K.D. or
Normal Downshift
G
No
Upshift
C, and
Harsh Upshift
and K D.
Always
Runaway on Upshift
and K.D.
NOTE:
Check Items A , B
Delayed
N to D
ITEM
Harsh N to R
or N to D
INDEX
Trans. Hard to FillOil Blows Out Fill Tube
Explanation
of I n d e x I t e m s
Buzzing
Noise
See
DIFFICULTY
POWERFLITE TRANSMISSION—77
1. EXPLANATION OF INDEX ITEMS O N TROUBLE
DIAGNOSIS C H A 1 T
THROTTLE PRESSURE TAKEOFF PLUG
TORQUE
CONVERTER
CONTROL
T h e Trouble Diagnosis C h a r t has t h e o p e r a t i n g difficulties listed i n three groups. A f t e r road t e s t i n g ,
m a t c h t h e t r o u b l e found to i t s p a r t i c u l a r group and
t o t h e specific difficulty under t h a t group. The I n d e x
and I t e m i n the " I t e m s to Check" column are n e x t
checked against t h e " E x p l a n a t i o n o f I n d e x I t e m s " .
C a p i t a l l e t t e r items refer t o those operations w h i c h
m a y be performed w i t h o u t r e m o v i n g t h e t r a n s m i s sion. The small l e t t e r items refer to those operations
done after the transmission is removed f r o m t h e
vehicle.
7/
•
VALVE
-O;L
6,
C. Gearshift c o n t r o l cable—Refer to P a r a g r a p h 6.
D . Pressure tap check — H y d r a u l i c pressure taps
have been provided to check t h e f o l l o w i n g pressures:
FILLER
TUBE
OPENING
KICKDOWN BAND
ADJUSTING S C R E W
.
56x109 A
LUBRICANT PRESSURE
TAKEOFF
^
THROTTLE C O N T R O L
LEVER S H A F T
A . O i l level • Refer t o L u b r i c a t i o n G r o u p o f t h i s
Manual.
B . T h r o t t l e linkage — Refer t o P a r a g r a p h
" T r a n s m i s s i o n and C o n t r o l A d j u s t m e n t s . "
TRANSMISSION
REGULATOR
DIRECT CLUTCH PRESSURE TAKEOFF PLUG
Never remove a transmission f r o m a vehicle u n t i l
a l l the possible " i n car" causes have been checked
f o r the operating difficulty and t h e o i l p a n has been
removed t o check f o r d i r t , m e t a l chips, band m a t e r i a l ,
b r o k e n band ends and burned or scored band contacti n g surfaces. Inspect t h e manual c o n t r o l cable and
t h r o t t l e linkage f o r adjustment and wear.
LVE
0
NEUTRAL
START ; \ G
J N E PRESSURE
"AKEOFF
PLUG
CONTROL CABLE
ENTRANCE HOLETHROTTLE V A L V E
ADJUSTING SCREW-
"""
?LUG
GOVERNOR
56x110B
PRESSURE TAKEOFF PLUG
REAR E X T E N S I O N BREATHER
Fig, 2—Exterior V i e w s of Transmission
line, l u b r i c a t i o n , d i r e c t clutch, governor and t h r o t t l e
(Refer t o F i g . 2 ) . These pressures should f a l l w i t h i n
specified l i m i t s stated i n H y d r a u l i c C o n t r o l Pressure
Check Charts.
LATCHED P O S I T I O N
LOCK SPRING
UNLATCHED POSITION
57x430
Fig. 1—Gearshift Control Unit ( O p e r a t i o n a l Sketch)
E . K i c k d o w n band adjustment — The k i c k d o w n
band adjustment screw is f o u n d on t h e left side o f
transmission case ( F i g . 2 ) . Refer t o P a r a g r a p h 6,
"Transmission and C o n t r o l A d j u s t m e n t s . "
F . Reverse band adjustment — The o i l p a n m u s t
be removed t o m a k e t h i s adjustment. The adjustm e n t is made b y b a c k i n g off a d j u s t i n g screw lock
n u t . Torque t h e a d j u s t i n g screw 20 to 25 i n c h pounds torque t h e n back a d j u s t i n g set screw o u t 12
t u r n s . W h i l e h o l d i n g t h e a d j u s t i n g screw a t t h i s
position, t i g h t e n lock n u t 30 to 35 foot-pounds torque.
78 — POWERFLITE TRANSMISSION
G. Engine idle — A d j u s t to 475 to 500 r . p . m .
H . N e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h — Check w i r e connections and s w i t c h .
N O T E : I f j u m p e r w i r e is used f o r c r a n k i n g engine
( w h e n t a k i n g compression readings, etc.) i t is i m p o r t a n t t h a t j u m p e r leads be connected to b a t t e r y
t e r m i n a l s and to s t a r t e r s w i t c h t e r m i n a l (located tow a r d rear of c a r ) of t h e solenoid.
I . Handbrake—Check f o r excessive drag. A d j u s t
as outlined i n Brakes Group of t h i s manual.
J. Regulator valve s p r i n g —
may be removed by r e m o v i n g
s p r i n g retainer w h i c h is on the
mission case ( F i g . 2 ) . Check f o r
valve and/or buckled s p r i n g .
The regulator valve
the r e g u l a t o r valve
r i g h t side of t r a n s a stuck or scratched
K . Converter c o n t r o l valve, s p r i n g — The conv e r t e r control valve m a y be removed b y r e m o v i n g
the converter c o n t r o l valve s p r i n g retainer w h i c h is
on r i g h t side of transmission case ( F i g . 2 ) . Check
f o r a stuck or scratched valve a n d / o r buckled s p r i n g .
face — Check f o r loose bolts, b u r r s or scratches on
m a t i n g surfaces. Clean valve body assembly. Check
f o r stuck valves, d i r t , scratched valves or body and
b u r r s on valves. Torque valve body bolts to specifications.
S. Speedometer pinion — Check n y l o n teeth f o r
wear, shredding.
T. Governor — Clean assembly and check w e i g h t
assembly and valve f o r burrs, scratches or s t i c k y
operation. E x a m i n e the governor valve shaft, shaft
snap r i n g s and seal r i n g s .
U . Rear p u m p — Clean and inspect assembly f o r
side and d i a m e t r a l clearance. N o t e whether rear o i l
p u m p pinion ball is i n place. E x a m i n e o u t p u t shaft
support face f o r scoring.
a. F r o n t p u m p and d r i v e sleeve — Clean and i n spect assembly f o r side and d i a m e t r a l clearance.
E x a m i n e oil p u m p inner and outer r o t o r f o r scoring.
Check f r o n t pump d r i v e sleeve seal r i n g .
M . O u t p u t shaft rear bearing, snap r i n g — C h e c k
f o r r o u g h bearing a n d / o r unseated snap r i n g . Snap
r i n g s are available i n t w o sizes.
b. Regulator valve body, m a t i n g surfaces, gasket
— Clean and inspect valve body f o r scratches and
scoring on valve bores and face w h i c h bears against
the f r o n t p u m p housing. Examine valve body to
determine i f secondary reaction orifice is free of d i r t .
Check gasket f o r uniformness of compression by
valve body.
N . Torque converter housing cooling a i r passages
— Check f o r d i r t , m u d or other f o r e i g n m a t e r i a l on
screens or torque converter cooling fins.
c. Converter — F l u s h out converter and check
converter hub runout. (Refer to Torque Converter
Page.)
O. K i c k d o w n servo, band and linkage — Check f o r
broken seal rings, stuck servo piston or broken
linkage.
d . D i r e c t clutch — Clean and inspect discs, plates,
d r i v e hub, r e t u r n s p r i n g and piston.
L . B r e a t h e r — Check to determine
breather is free of d i r t , undelegating, etc.
whether
P. Reverse servo, band and linkage — Check f o r
t o r n seal, stuck or broken band a n d / o r linkage.
Q. O i l strainer and suction tubes — Check f o r
possible a i r leakage at f r o n t p u m p suction tube, or
rear pump suction tube.
R. Valve body a t t a c h i n g bolts and m a t i n g sur-
e. Planetary gear set — Clean and inspect gear
set f o r w o r n t h r u s t washers, nicked or r o u g h gear
teeth and excessive pinion and clearance.
f.
Seal r i n g s — Check f o r b u r r s , broken ends.
N O T E : Refer to F i g u r e 35 f o r i l l u s t r a t i o n showing
location of the various drilled passages i n transmission case.
SERVICE PROCEDURES
2. O P E H A I i O N
P o w e r F l i t e combines a h i g h l y efficient torque conv e r t e r and a simple a u t o m a t i c two-speed transmission w h i c h provides exceptionally smooth performance t h r o u g h o u t the e n t i r e speed range. The
transmission is equipped w i t h a n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g safe-
t y s w i t c h w h i c h prevents s t a r t i n g the car i n gear.
A l l normal d r i v i n g can be done i n the d r i v e ( D )
range, w h i c h accelerates the car i n low range t h e n
automatically upshifts t h e transmission i n t o direct
d r i v e at the proper t i m e , depending upon the degree
of acceleration desired by the d r i v e r . The s h i f t is
f u l l y automatic, allowing t h e d r i v e r t o keep constant pressure on the accelerator a t a l l times. I n stantaneous acceleration, w i t h t h e D ( D r i v e ) push
b u t t o n engaged, is accomplished b y pressing the
accelerator pedal t o the floor. T h i s action downshifts
the transmission to low gear.
w i l l move to t h e n e u t r a l position. The d r i v e r is t h e n
required t o again select the proper gear range.
c. Gearshift Control Housing (Refer to Fig. 1)
The L (low) range is provided t o keep the transmission i n low gear regardless of speeds f o r unusual
d r i v i n g conditions such as c l i m b i n g o r descending
mountains or d r i v i n g t h r o u g h sand.
Mechanical connection between the gearshift control
housing and t h e transmission manual control valve
is obtained t h r o u g h the use of a single push-pull
cable. One end o f the w i r e cable is secured to the
cable actuator i n the gearshift housing, while the
other end enters the transmission case t o engage
the manual c o n t r o l valve lever assembly.
" R o c k i n g " the car, when m i r e d i n m u d or snow,
is easily accomplished by a l t e r n a t e l y engaging t h e
R (reverse) and L (low) push buttons.
A back-up l i g h t s w i t c h ( w h e n so equipped) is i n corporated i n the g e a r s h i f t control housing and is
operated by the R (reverse) push b u t t o n slide.
a. Torque Converter
d. Neutral Starting Switch
The torque converter receives i t s o i l supply at a
constant pressure f r o m the f r o n t o i l pump i n t h e
transmission.
The s t a r t i n g m o t o r is w i r e d i n such a w a y t h a t t h e
engine cannot be s t a r t e d unless t h e N ( n e u t r a l ) button is engaged. E n g a g i n g t h e N ( n e u t r a l ) b u t t o n
closes the s t a r t i n g m o t o r c i r c u i t at the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g switch, located on t h e transmission case ( F i g .
2).
The u n i t is bolted to and supported by the crankshaft flange. I t consists of three basic p a r t s : an
impeller, a t u r b i n e and a stator. The impeller, w h i c h
f o r m s the outer sh^ll of the converter u n i t , is d r i v e n
by the engine. The t u r b i n e is d r i v e n b y the force o f
oil f r o m the impeller vanes. T h e t u r b i n e is splined
to the i n p u t shaft of the transmission. The stator,
located between the impeller and t u r b i n e , serves to
redirect the flow of oil i n t h e u n i t , t h u s m u l t i p l y i n g
engine torque. The stator is m o u n t e d on an overr u n n i n g clutch w h i c h permits i t t o r o t a t e only i n the
direction of impeller and t u r b i n e r o t a t i o n .
e. Starting the Engine
(1) A s a safety precaution, apply handbrake
foot brake.
(2)
Push the N ( n e u t r a l ) b u t t o n .
(3)
Depress accelerator pedal s l i g h t l y .
(4)
tion.
or
T u r n i g n i t i o n key t o extreme clockwise posi-
T h e torque converter is serviced only as a complete
assembly.
(5) W h e n engine starts, release pressure on i g n i t i o n key.
b. Gearshift Control Push Button
1 Push Starting
P o w e r F l i t e Transmission equipped cars have f o u r
gearshift control buttons located t o t h e left of t h e
steering column on the i n s t r u m e n t panel, as shown
i n F i g u r e 1. The buttons, w h i c h control the transmission are identified by the l e t t e r s R (reverse),
N ( n e u t r a l ) , D (drive) and L ( l o w ) . T h e buttons are
illuminated for night driving.
I f t h e engine fails to s t a r t i n the n o r m a l manner,
because of a discharged b a t t e r y , i t m a y be started
by pushing t h e car. T o w i n g the car to s t a r t is not
recommended due to the sudden surge of power w h e n
the engine s t a r t s .
W h e n operating the gearshift c o n t r o l , the b u t t o n
selected must be pushed to the f u l l extent of i t s
t r a v e l . T h i s w i l l automatically release a previously
selected b u t t o n f o r r e t u r n to i t s n o r m a l position.
A hydraulic interlock prevents t h e d r i v e r f r o m i n advertently pushing the R (reverse) b u t t o n t o t h e
reverse position when the vehicle is t r a v e l i n g i n t h e
D ( d r i v e ) position above 15 m p h .
Should the reverse b u t t o n be pushed " i n " a t a
speed i n excess of 15 mph., the m a n u a l valve lever
T u r n the i g n i t i o n s w i t c h on, then push " i n " on
the N ( n e u t r a l ) b u t t o n . A f t e r t h e car has been
pushed to a speed of 25 m.p.h. ( a p p r o x i m a t e l y ) ,
push i n on the L ( l o w ) b u t t o n . T h i s w i l l allow the
transmission t o d r i v e the engine by power transm i t t e d f r o m t h e r e a r wheels.
g. How to Drive the Vehicle
(1) A f t e r t h e engine is started, better fuel econom y and quicker engine w a r m up can be obtained b y
s t a r t i n g to d r i v e i m m e d i a t e l y . I f the engine is cold
apply the foot brake t o prevent a creep tendency
when pushing t h e b u t t o n s i n D (drive) or R (re-
LINE P R E S S U R E
CHART
Gearshift
Position
Rear
Wheels
Engine
Speed
Line
Pressure
R*
N
D*
Free to T u r n
1400 R . P . M .
800 R . P . M .
800 R . P . M .
225 to 275 P.S.I.
85 t o 95 P.S.I.
85 to 95 P.S.I.
Brakes A p p l i e d
* Engine m u s t be at operating temperature.
verse) positions and avoid fast acceleration
d r i v i n g (regardless of the m i l e a g e ) .
(5) K i c k d o w n or forced d o w n s h i f t -— A t speeds
between 15 to a p p r o x i m a t e l y 55 m p h i n D ( d r i v e ) ,
after the transmission has upshifted t o direct, m a x i m u m acceleration can be obtained f o r passing or
c l i m b i n g a steep grade by pressing the accelerator
wide open. T h i s w i l l cause the transmission to downs h i f t . I t w i l l automatically u p s h i f t to direct i f the
accelerator is released or a speed o f about 61 m p h
is reached. A n y v a r i a t i o n i n d o w n s h i f t speed l i m i t s
m a y be due to permissible o p e r a t i n g fluid leakage
w i t h i n t h e transmission,
when
(2) A l l n o r m a l d r i v i n g w i l l be done i n D ( d r i v e )
range. The vehicle w i l l have a s l i g h t tendency t o
creep after p u s h i n g the b u t t o n f r o m N ( n e u t r a l ) to
D ( d r i v e ) at idle due to s l i g h t torque o u t p u t f r o m
t h e torque converter. T h i s can be prevented b y app l y i n g the foot brake. A s soon as the accelerator
is depressed, the vehicle w i l l move f o r w a r d i n the
d r i v e ( b r e a k a w a y ) range.
A t speed o f between a p p r o x i m a t e l y 15 and 61
mph and the a m o u n t the accelerator is depressed, the
transmission w i l l u p s h i f t to direct. W h e n s l o w i n g
the car d o w n at t h r o t t l e openings s h o r t , of wide
open, the transmission w i l l a u t o m a t i c a l l y d o w n s h i f t
f r o m a p p r o x i m a t e l y 9 t o 11 m p h .
h.
Towing
(1) Transmission inoperative — T o w t h e car w i t h
a rear end pickup or remove the propeller shaft.
( 2 ) Transmission O p e r a t i n g P r o p e r l y — The car
m a y be towed safely i n N ( n e u t r a l ) at moderate
speeds. However, f o r long distance t o w i n g (over 100
m i l e s ) , the propeller shaft should be removed.
( 3 ) L ( l o w ) provides d r i v i n g
characteristics
s i m i l a r to D ( d r i v e ) except the t r a n s m i s s i o n w i l l n o t
u p s h i f t ( i n t o d i r e c t ) at any car speed. T h i s position
provides excellent h a n d l i n g ease i n m o u n t a i n d r i v i n g
and superior p u l l i n g qualities i n sand and snow. I t
is possible to push the buttons f r o m L ( l o w ) to D
( d r i v e ) and D ( d r i v e ) to L ( l o w ) at a n y speed
below 65 m p h . Damage m a y result i f a s h i f t f r o m
D ( d r i v e ) to L ( l o w ) is made above 65 m p h .
L Checking Fluid Level
Refer to L u b r i c a t i o n Group O o f t h i s manual.
3. HYDRAULIC C O N T I O L PRESSURE CHECKS
a. Line Pressure
Remove the pipe p l u g f r o m the line pressure takeoff hole located on the f r o n t left side of the t r a n s mission case ( F i g . 2 ) . I n s t a l l pressure gauge, Tool
C-3293 (300 p s i ) , at t h i s p o i n t .
(4) Reverse — Stop the vehicle and w i t h the foot
brake applied, push the R (reverse) b u t t o n t o f u l l
l i m i t of t r a v e l . U p o n depressing t h e accelerator,
the vehicle w i l l move i n reverse. Do n o t depress the
R (reverse) b u t t o n w h e n the car is m o v i n g f o r w a r d
at a speed above 5 m p h .
b. Throttle Pressure
Remove the p l u g f r o m the t h r o t t l e pressure take-off
hole located on the r i g h t - h a n d side of the t r a n s m i s -
THROTTLE PRESSURE
*Do
Gearshift
Position
D
D
CHART
Brakes T h r o t t l e
Engine
Speed
Throttle
Pressure
A p p l i e d Closed
A p p l i e d W i d e Open*
Idle
1400 to 1500 R . P . M .
13 t o 15 P.S.I.
80 t o 90 P.S.I.
not hold t h r o t t l e wide open f o r longer t h a n a few
seconds.
POWERFLITE TRANSMISSION— 81
GOVERNOR PRESSURE CHART
Gearshift
Position
Car
Speed
Wheels
Governor
Pressure
D
Free to T u r n
I S t o 15 M . P . H .
15 P.S.I.
D
Free t o T u r n
24 t o 82 M . P . H .
45 P.S.I.
D
Free to T u r n
51 t o 60 M . P . H .
60 P.S.L
sion ease ( F i g . 2 ) . I n s t a l l pressure gauge, Tool
C-3292 (100 p s i ) , at t h i s point.
W h e n checking t h r o t t l e pressure, always follow
up by checking t h r o t t l e linkage adjustment (Parag r a p h 6 ) . I f t h r o t t l e pressure does n o t conform t o
specifications, refer to Paragraph 6.
c. Governor Pressure
Remove the pipe p l u g f r o m the governor pressure
take-off hole located on the lower l e f t side of the output s h a f t support ( F i g . 2 ) . I n s t a l l pressure gauge,
Tool C-3292 (100 p s i ) , at t h i s p o i n t .
d. Direct Clutch Pressure
Remove t h e pipe p l u g f i t t i n g f r o m t h e pressure takeoff hole tapped i n the k i c k d o w n servo ( F i g . 2) and
install pressure gauge, Tool C-3292 (100 p s i ) . W i t h
the rear wheels free to t u r n , accelerate t h e engine
slowly u n t i l an u p s h i f t occurs. D u r i n g the upshift,
the pressure gauge attached to the k i c k d o w n servo
should show a v e r y r a p i d pressure rise f r o m 0 to
final c l u t c h or line pressure. T h i s rise should n o t
take more t h a n l / to 2 seconds.
l
2
W i t h an engine speed o f n o t less t h a n 650 r p m
(transmission upshifted) the direct clutch pressure
should read not lower t h a n 10 psi below line pressure.
Should a slow rise i n clutch pressure be observed,
or a clutch pressure of more t h a n 10 psi lower t h a n
line pressure be obtained, i t is an i n d i c a t i o n o f abn o r m a l leakage.
e. Lubrication Pressure
Remove the oil cooler f i t t i n g f r o m the l u b r i c a t i o n
pressure take-off hole located on the l e f t side of t h e
transmission case ( F i g . 2 ) . I n s t a l l gauge, Tool C3292 (100 p s i ) . W i t h engine r u n n i n g at 800 r p m I n
neutral, l u b r i c a t i o n pressure should read not below
10 psi m i n i m u m . I f t h e pressure Is Incorrect, check
line pressure and T r o u b l e Diagnosis Chart,
4. CHECKING F O R O I L LEAKS
I f the transmission Is leaking oil, check the f o l l o w i n g
points:
a. Leaks Not Requiring Removal of Transmission from
Vehicle
(1)
Transmission o u t p u t shaft rear oil seal.
(2)
Speedometer pinion assembly.
(3)
O i l filler tube to oil pan connector.
(4)
O i l pan to transmission case.
(5) Regulator valve and torque converter control
valve retainers.
(6)
Test pressure hole plugs.
( 7 ) I f oil is found inside converter housing, check
torque converter d r a i n plug.
Leaks at these locations should be corrected regardless of how s l i g h t .
b. Leaks Requiring Removal of Transmission from
Vehicle
(1)
Sand hole i n transmission case.
(2)
Sand hole i n f r o n t oil p u m p housing.
(3) F r o n t o i l pump housing bolts loose or sealing
washers damaged.
(4) Torque converter impeller hub seal (located
on f o r w a r d end of f r o n t o i l p u m p h o u s i n g ) . W h e n
correcting, make sure torque converter hub r u n o u t
is w i t h i n l i m i t s . (Refer to Torque Converter, Page
—).
(5) F r o n t oil pump housing o i l seal (located on
outside diameter o f f r o n t o i l p u m p h o u s i n g ) .
W h e n replacement of the f r o n t o i l p u m p housing is
made or whenever i t is necessary t o correct a leak
due to t h i s " O " seal r i n g , the f o l l o w i n g precautions
should be t a k e n :
( a ) I n s t a l l a new " O " r i n g seal i n i t s groove i n
the f r o n t oil pump housing.
( b ) Make sure t h a t the seal has n o t been t w i s t e d
d u r i n g t h i s i n s t a l l a t i o n , as t h i s alone w i l l cause a
leak.
(c)
Measure the amount t h e seal protrudes above
t h e f r o n t o i l p u m p housing completely around t h e
O.D. I f , a t any point, the seal protrudes less t h a n
.010 inch, or i f considerable v a r i a t i o n exists i n t h e
amount t h e seal protrudes, a new f r o n t pump housing
should be selected.
Leaks at these points m a y be remedied b y t i g h t e n i n g loose bolts or replacing damaged or f a u l t y parts.
(2) Remove gearshift c o n t r o l housing and cable
as outlined under " S e r v i c i n g Gearshift Control U n i t , "
Removal, Paragraph 5.
( 3 ) F r o m inside of vehicle, pull cable assembly
t h r o u g h rubber g r o m m e t (or remove g r o m m e t ) i n
dash panel.
5. SERVICING GEARSHIFT CONTROL UNIT
a. Removing Gearshift Control Unit
(1)
mission assembly, as outlined under "Removal and
Inspection o f Cable Assembly—Transmission E n d , "
Paragraph 5 " G " , steps 1 and 2.
d.
Disconnect one b a t t e r y cable.
( 2 ) Disconnect back-up l i g h t s w i t c h ( i f so
equipped) and i l l u m i n a t i n g lamp lead wires, a t the
rear of the i n s t r u m e n t panel.
( 3 ) Remove the push b u t t o n face plate screws,
t h e n remove t h e push b u t t o n s b y p u l l i n g t h e m off
the push b u t t o n slide. Remove lamp bolt.
( 4 ) Remove t h e c o n t r o l housing stud n u t s t h a t
are now accessible and remove c o n t r o l and cable
f r o m r e a r of i n s t r u m e n t panel.
( 5 ) Remove h a i r p i n securing c o n t r o l cable to
actuator and the screws h o l d i n g the cable bracket
to t h e c o n t r o l housing.
b. Installing Gearshift Control Unit
Installing Gearshift Control Cable
(1) F r o m inside of vehicle, i n s t a l l transmission
end of cable t h r o u g h rubber g r o m m e t i n dash panel.
(2) I n s t a l l cable at g e a r s h i f control housing as
outlined i n "Servicing Gearshift C o n t r o l U n i t , " I n stallation, Paragraph 5.
( 3 ) I n s t a l l cable assembly i n t o transmission case.
(Refer to P a r a g r a p h 5, " A d j u s t i n g the Gearshift
Control Cable.)
e. Replacing the Back-Up Light Switch (when so
equipped)
( 1 ) Remove gearshift c o n t r o l housing and plate
assembly as outlined under " S e r v i c i n g Gearshift
Control U n i t , " Removal, Paragraph 5.
( 1 ) I n s e r t end o f cable o n actuator and reassemble
h a i r p i n clip. Place cable bracket on control u n i t and
i n s t a l l screws securely ( F i g . 3 ) .
( 2 ) Back-up l i g h t s w i t c h is fastened to the cont r o l u n i t b y four tabs. S t r a i g h t e n tabs to remove
switch.
(2) Carefully guide the u n i t i n t o position f r o m
the r e a r of the i n s t r u m e n t panel and i n s t a l l t h e att a c h i n g s t u d nuts f r o m the f r o n t side of the i n s t r u m e n t panel.
( 3 ) I n s t a l l repaired or replacement s w i t c h and
bend tabs to secure s w i t c h to gearshift control
housing.
( 3 ) I n s t a l l l a m p bulb i n push b u t t o n c o n t r o l and
r e i n s t a l l push b u t t o n s onto c o n t r o l actuator slides.
Replace face plate.
(4)
I n s t a l l gearshift control housing assembly.
f. Replacing Push Button Unit Lamp Bulb
(1)
Remove the face plate r e t a i n i n g screws.
(4) Connect back-up s w i t c h and push b u t t o n i l l u m i n a t i n g l a m p wires.
(2)
ance.
c. Removing Gearshift Control Cable
(3) Replace defective or burned out bulb, using
Tool C-3399.
(1)
Remove g e a r s h i f t c o n t r o l cable f r o m
trans-
(4)
CABLE
i BRACKET
.
/
/
CABLE
ASSY.
^ ^ ^ ^
ACTUATOR^
Fig.
HAiRP^CLIP
56x55 A
3—Exterior V i e w of Gearshift Control Housing
(Typical)
Remove one or more push buttons f o r clear-
Replace face plate. Test operation of u n i t .
g. Removal and Inspection of Cable Assembly
(Transmission End)
(1) Push i n the R (reverse) push b u t t o n to posit i o n cable adapter f o r removal of cable lock s p r i n g ,
and placing cable adapter i n close p r o x i m i t y to cable
entrance hole i n transmission case ( f o r r e i n s t a l l a t i o n
of cable). Raise car on hoist and remove n e u t r a l
s t a r t i n g s w i t c h f r o m transmission case. Some fluid
w i l l d r a i n out. Transmission fluid m a y be h o t ! I
POWERFLITE TRANSMISSION — 8 3
( 2 ) Loosen cable to transmission
adjustable
m o u n t i n g bracket screw. Place screwdriver blade
t h r o u g h n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h hole, and push
against cable lock s p r i n g . W i t h the other hand, w i t h d r a w cable assembly f r o m transmission case.
(3) E x a m i n e " 0 " r i n g seal on cable f e r r u l e . Replace seal i f i t shows signs o f roughness, shredding
or d e t e r i o r a t i o n . Inspect f i t of bracket slot and cable
f e r r u l e groove. The bracket should f i t j u s t freely i n t o
f e r r u l e groove t o f u l l depth o f bracket slot. I f cable
bracket slotted section does not meet t h i s requirement, remove excess m e t a l w i t h a file.
6. TRANSMISSION AND CONTROLS —
ADJUSTMENTS
a. Throttle Pressure and Throttle Linkage Adjustment
A c c u r a t e adjustment of the transmission t h r o t t l e
linkage and s e t t i n g of the t h r o t t l e o i l pressure is
v e r y i m p o r t a n t f o r proper operation of t h e PowerF l i t e transmission. Therefore, t h e f o l l o w i n g procedures should be v e r y carefully p e r f o r m e d :
b. Throttle Linkage Adjustments (Refer to Fig. 4)
( 1 ) W i t h the engine at o p e r a t i n g temperature,
c a r b u r e t o r off the fast idle cam and t r a n s m i s s i o n i n
n e u t r a l , adjust idle speed to 475-500 r . p . m . (use
tachometer).
( 2 ) Loosen the t h r o t t l e linkage a d j u s t m e n t lock
nuts on b o t h the carburetor r o d and the transmission
throttle rod.
( 3 ) I n s e r t a 3 / 1 6 " r o d or d r i l l b i t i n the hole and
open slot of the accelerator shaft bracket and i n t o
the elongated hole of the t h r o t t l e lever.
( 4 ) W i t h the r o d i n position, hold the t r a n s m i s sion t h r o t t l e valve lever all the w a y f o r w a r d (closed
p o s i t i o n ) , and t i g h t e n transmission to accelerator
lever assembly rod a d j u s t i n g lock n u t " A " , F i g u r e 4.
( 5 ) Remove r o d f r o m accelerator lever, shaft and
b r a c k e t assembly.
( 6 ) W i t h the carburetor t h r o t t l e lever off t h e
idle cam and against the idle stop screw, move
r e a r h a l f of the c a r b u r e t o r r o d r e a r w a r d u n t i l
stop i n the transmission is felt, t i g h t e n lock
" B " , F i g u r e 4.
fast
the
the
nut
( 7 ) The accelerator pedal should be at an angle of
113 t o 114 degrees to the h o r i z o n t a l . I f necessary to
correct, adjust pedal angle by r e m o v i n g the accelerat o r pedal end of the bellcrank to pedal rod, and
s h o r t e n i n g or l e n g t h e n i n g the r o d by loosening t h e
lock n u t at t h e swivel end and r o t a t i n g the swivel.
R e i n s t a l l the r o d and t i g h t e n the lock n u t . Be sure
the rod is properly aligned to prevent binding. Poor
engine performance due to carburetor throttle not
opening fully or lack of kickdown may result if
accelerator pedal angle is incorrect.
c. Throttle Pressure Adjustment
( 1 ) W i t h t h r o t t l e linkage properly adjusted and
tachometer attached, s t a r t engine and recheck idle
s e t t i n g (475-500 r p m ) w i t h transmission i n n e u t r a l
and h a n d brake set. Raise vehicle on hoist.
( 2 ) Remove the t h r o t t l e oil pressure take off p l u g
located between reverse and k i c k d o w n servos on
r i g h t side of transmission. (Refer to F i g . 2.) Connect 100 psi pressure gauge, Tool C-3292.
(3) Push i n the D ( D r i v e ) push b u t t o n . ( W h e n
the manual c o n t r o l lever is moved i n t o d r i v e range,
engine speed w i l l drop a p p r o x i m a t e l y 50 r p m ) . Check
t h r o t t l e pressure.
Oil pressure should read 13 t o 15 psi. I f t h e pressure is not w i t h i n specifications, adjust as f o l l o w s :
( 4 ) Remove the t h r o t t l e valve a d j u s t i n g screw
p l u g ( F i g . 2 ) . A b o u t 1 q u a r t of transmission fluid
w i l l d r a i n out.
( 5 ) I n s e r t a d j u s t i n g screw wrench, Tool C-3279A,
and adjust t h r o t t l e pressure to 13-15 psi, as shown
i n F i g u r e 5. T u r n screw O U T to increase pressure
and I N to decrease pressure.
( 6 ) Replace the t h r o t t l e valve a d j u s t i n g
p l u g and torque f r o m 20 to 25 foot-pounds.
ADJUSTMENT
LOCK NUT " A "
Fig. 4—Throttle Linkage Adjustment
60x171
screw
( 7 ) W i t h the accelerator pedal f u l l y released, and
engine at 475 to 500 r p m , the pressure should read
13 to 15 psi.
N E U T R A L STARTER
SWITCH C A M
Fig. 7—Neutral S t o r t i n g Switch C a m Centered i n
Switch M o u n t i n g
Fig. 5—Adjusting T h r o t t l e Pressure
(Typical)
( 8 ) Move t h e accelerator pedal or lever f r o m u n derneath, v e r y slowly.
W i t h t h r o t t l e pressure and l i n k a g e p r o p e r l y adj u s t e d , t h e t h r o t t l e pressure w i l l rise ( a p p r o x i m a t e l y
6-8 psi) the i n s t a n t engine r p m Is increased. Do not
use t h r o t t l e r o d . W h e n m a k i n g t h i s check, use accele r a t o r pedal lever located on underside of floor pan.
( 9 ) Remove oil pressure gauge and i n s t a l l p l u g .
Torque f r o m 10 to 12 foot-pounds.
( 1 0 ) I f t h e t h r o t t l e pressure was adjusted, replace the fluid t h a t drained out, w i t h A u t o m a t i c
T r a n s m i s s i o n F l u i d ( T y p e " A " , Suffix " A " ) .
( 1 1 ) Check accelerator pedal h e i g h t at wide open
t h r o t t l e . There should be sufficient clearance between
t h e t i p o f the pedal and t h e floor m a t . A d j u s t pedal
t o accelerator shaft r o d assembly.
d. Adjustment of Kickdown (Front) B a n d
( 1 ) U s i n g a % i n c h open-end w r e n c h loosen t h e
Hole
locknut ( F i g . 2 ) . Check the freeness of the a d j u s t i n g
screw i n t h e transmission case. I f free, use i n c h pound torque wrench, Tool C-3380 ( w i t h extension
C-3583), and t i g h t e n t h e a d j u s t i n g screw f r o m
40-43 inch-pounds* torque. D i s r e g a r d m u l t i p l i c a t i o n f a c t o r on Extension, C-3583. Use a reference m a r k of chalk or colored pencil on t h e corner
of the a d j u s t i n g screw square and t h e transmission
case. U s i n g extreme care, back the a d j u s t i n g scêw
out exactly 2 % t u r n s . N o w , hold t h e a d j u s t i n g screw
s t a t i o n a r y w i t h wrench and t i g h t e n the l o c k n u t
securely. E x t r e m e care m u s t be exercised i n perf o r m i n g t h i s operation to insure correct a d j u s t m e n t
otherwise serious damage w i l l occur w h e n t r a n s m i s sion is operated.
* I f Tool C-3380 ( w i t h extension C-3583) Is n o t used,
t h e n , use wrench, Tool C-3380, and t i g h t e n a d j u s t i n g
screw t o 72 inch-pounds torque.
e
e
R e v e r s e (Bear) B a n d A d j u s t m e n t
( 1 ) D r a i n transmission and remove transmission
oil pan.
( 2 ) Loosen reverse band a d j u s t i n g screw l o c k n u t
and t i g h t e n a d j u s t i n g screw f r o m 20 to 25 i n c h pounds, as shown i n F i g u r e 6. Rack o u t a d j u s t i n g
screw 12 t u r n s . H o l d i n g a d j u s t i n g screw i n t h i s locat i o n , t i g h t e n l o c k n u t securely (30-35 foot-pounds
torque).
( 3 ) Replace the transmission o i l pan, u s i n g a new
gasket and refill transmission w i t h A u t o m a t i c T r a n s mission F l u i d , Type " A " , Suffix " A " .
f. Adjusting the Gearshift Control Cable
Fig. 6—Adjusting the Reverse l a n d (Typical)
Push i n L ( l o w ) push b u t t o n . Place t r a n s m i s s i o n
manual valve lever i n reverse detent b y m o v i n g
n e u t r a l s w i t c h contact p a r t of lever f u l l t r a v e l t o w a r d s rear of car manually, b y u s i n g screwdriver
(or other suitable tool) i n n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h
hole. W i t h L ( l o w ) push b u t t o n held t i g h t l y i n ( f u l l
t r a v e l ) , i n s e r t cable assembly i n t o t r a n s m i s s i o n case
engaging cable f e r r u l e groove w i t h lock s p r i n g i n
cable adapter. P u s h and p u l l the cable, using l i g h t
pressure, to be sure groove i n cable f e r r u l e has engaged lock s p r i n g . Replace adjustable m o u n t i n g
bracket and t i g h t e n cap screw finger t i g h t .
g. Cable and Neutral Starting Switch Adjustment
Move the cable and bracket assembly ( m a n u a l l y )
at the transmission, as required, t o position the
manual valve lever i n t o n e u t r a l detent. H o l d the N
( n e u t r a l ) b u t t o n t i g h t l y " i n " a t f u l l t r a v e l . The
n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h cam should t h e n be centered
i n the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h hole, as shown i n
F i g u r e 7.
Use a f r e e - f i t t i n g flat-faced shaft, inserted t h r o u g h
the n e u t r a l s w i t c h m o u n t i n g hole ( F i g . 8 ) , and apply
l i g h t pressure against t h e m a n u a l valve lever to
m a i n t a i n t h e n e u t r a l detent position of the manual
lever. I f tool is not available, lever m a y be held by
finger pressure.
Carefully move cable assembly " i n " and " o u t "
w i t h o u t m o v i n g t h e manual lever, t o determine t o t a l
free play t r a v e l o f cable. Locate the cable i n m i d position o f the free play, release the pressure against
the manual lever and t i g h t e n the m o u n t i n g bracket
securely. Do not allow the cable to move when tightening the bracket.
N O T E : Excessive tightening may damage case and
interfere with push button control.
Check transmission fluid level
L u b r i c a t i o n Group of t h i s M a n u a l .
l
s
2
Frp
J&a
outlined i n
h. Road Testing
W h e n f a u l t y operation of the t r a n s m i s s i o n is reported, t r a n s m i s s i o n fluid level and engine idle should
be checked before a n y t h i n g else. Good transmission
operation also depends on good engine operation.
Therefore, before b l a m i n g any r o u g h s h i f t i n g on the
transmission, i t is necessary to make sure t h e engine
is o p e r a t i n g at f u l l efficiency.
If, when tuning the engine, the throttle linkage
between the carburetor and the transmission is disturbed, it will be necessary to readjust the linkage.
Refer to "Throttle Pressure and Throttle Linkage
Adjustment," Paragraph 6.
A f t e r all t h e adjustments and pressure checks are
completed, road test the car under v a r y i n g road conditions. The t r a n s m i s s i o n should respond according
to t h e f o l l o w i n g s h i f t p a t t e r n s :
A l l shift speeds may vary somewhat due to production tolerances, however, the quality of the shifts
should be smooth, responsive, and without noticeable
engine runaway.
Replace the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h . I n s t a l l the
concave (cupped) s p r i n g washer over t h e threads of
the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h so t h a t the concave
(cupped) side of the washer is t o w a r d t h e t r a n s m i s sion case. I n s t a l l the " 0 " r i n g seal over the threads
of the n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h and u p against the
washer.
W i t h proper cable adjustment assured and N (neut r a l ) b u t t o n depressed, make c e r t a i n t h a t s w i t c h is
properly aligned i n center of n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g s w i t c h
hole. W i t h test leads connected t o b a t t e r y c u r r e n t
and t e r m i n a l of t h e s w i t c h , screw s w i t c h i n t o transmission case u n t i l test l i g h t l i g h t s , t h e n t u r n s w i t c h
an additional / t o y t u r n . Do n o t exceed 75 footpounds torque.
as
•
•
PS
l
g C A B l £ RETAINER
FERRULE
x
56 x ",54A
Fig.
N E U T R A L STARTER
SWITCH C A M
8—"Locking" M a n u a l V a l v e Lever in Neutral
Position (Oil Pan Removed fro Show Operation)
p g m ^ i
aaa
I3M sate tJsi
CJU B
Upshift
Downshift
Light
Throttle
Wide
Open
Throttle
Light
Throttle
Wide
Open
Throttle
Kickdown
Limit
14 t o 19
51 to 61
9 t o 11
9 to 17
41 to 57
?
0
REMOVING TRANSMISSION F R O M VEHICLE
( 1 ) D r a i n transmission b y disconnecting o i l filler
tube connector at o i l pan. Remove torque converter
housing cover. Then, remove the torque converter
d r a i n plug. A f t e r d r a i n i n g , replace p l u g and t i g h t e n
securely. Replace torque converter housing cover.
Remove oil cooler lines f r o m t h e transmission.
( 2 ) Disconnect f r o n t propeller shaft
j o i n t and secure shaft to frame.
universal
( 3 ) Remove brake a d j u s t i n g screw cover plate and
loosen cable clamp bolt on hand brake cable support.
Disengage ball end of handbrake cable f r o m operati n g lever and remove cable f r o m handbrake cable
support.
( 4 ) Disconnect speedometer cable and housing.
To avoid damage to neutral starting switch, remove
switch from transmission case before removing
transmission from vehicle.
( 5 ) Disconnect t h r o t t l e linkage f r o m lever
transmission. Remove g e a r s h i f t control cable.
at
( 6 ) Remove engine rear support insulator bolts
f r o m crossmember.
( 7 ) I n s t a l l engine support f i x t u r e , Tool C-3487.
A d j u s t f i x t u r e to support w e i g h t o f engine and raise
engine s l i g h t l y .
( 8 ) Remove crossmember to t o r s i o n bar support
bracket bolts. Remove t h e rear m o t o r support i n sulator bolts to support bracket, t h e n remove t h e
complete support assembly f r o m t h e crossmember.
W h e n using F i x t u r e , Tool C-3487, do not lower engine
more t h a n three inches f r o m floor pan to avoid dist u r b i n g the set position of w a t e r hoses and other
engine attachments.
( 9 ) Support transmission w i t h a suitable j a c k .
Remove the t w o upper transmission case to conv e r t e r housing screws and lockwasher. I n s t a l l guide
studs, Tool C-3276.
i
Fig. 10—Checking Transmission End Clearance
(10) Remove t h e t w o lower transmission case to
converter housing screws and lockwashers. Slide
j a c k and transmission s t r a i g h t back to avoid damagi n g the f r o n t pump d r i v e sleeve. A f t e r r e m o v i n g
transmission f r o m the vehicle, attach fixture, Tool
C-3280, and i n v e r t transmission assembly, as shown
i n F i g u r e 9.
8. DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECTION
( 1 ) Remove the f r o n t o i l pump d r i v e sleeve and
inspect. Check the d r i v e lugs and machined surfaces
for b u r r s and wear. Inspect seal r i n g f o r brittleness
and shredding.
( 2 ) Remove the bolts and lockwashers w h i c h hold
the engine rear support adapter t o extension housing.
( 3 ) Loosen the t h r o t t l e control lever assembly
locking screw. Slide the t h r o t t l e control lever assemb l y off the shaft and remove the f e l t retainer and
felt. Inspect t h r o t t l e control lever f o r wear.
( 4 ) Remove the oil pan bolts, o i l pan, and gasket.
( 5 ) Remove the o i l strainer support bolts and
washers. Inspect seal r i n g s located at b o t h outlets
of strainer.
( 6 ) Remove the five t r a n s f e r plate bolts and lockwashers. Remove the valve body and t r a n s f e r plate
assembly f r o m transmission case. Remove t h r o t t l e
valve camshaft sleeve " 0 " r i n g seal. Discard seal i f
t o r n or shredded. The valve body m a t i n g surfaces
are machined. W o r k carefully to avoid damaging
these surfaces. Place valve body i n stand, Tool C3294.
a. Checking Transmission End Play
Fig. 9—Transmission Inverted in Repair Stand
P r i o r to removal of propeller shaft flange and d r u m
assembly, check end clearance of f r o n t clutch piston
r e t a i n e r assembly using dial indicator, Tool C-3339,
as shown i n F i g u r e 10.
( 1 ) P r y f r o n t clutch f o r w a r d b y i n s e r t i n g screwd r i v e r between the direct c l u t c h assembly and pinion
c a r r i e r housing.
( 2 ) Remove s c r e w d r i v e r ; and w i t h dial indicator
point c o n t a c t i n g edge of direct clutch retainer, set
dial i n d i c a t o r to zero. P r y direct clutch assembly
r e a r w a r d against p i n i o n c a r r i e r housing, remove
screwdriver, and take i n d i c a t o r reading. Clearance
should be f r o m .026 to .052 inch. I f t h i s clearance
exceeds the specified l i m i t , p a r t i c u l a r a t t e n t i o n
should be shown to t h e condition of the direct clutch
r e t a i n e r t h r u s t washer w h e n disassembling transmission. Record the a m o u n t o f end clearance so t h a t
t h e proper thickness fiber t h r u s t washer can be i n stalled a t assembly. '
I f clearance exceeds .052 inch, i n s t a l l a t h i c k e r
direct c l u t c h p i s t o n r e t a i n e r t h r u s t washer ( f i b e r ) .
I f clearance is less t h a n .026 inch, i n s t a l l a t h i n n e r
washer. The t h r u s t washer is selectively fit and is
available i n the f o l l o w i n g thicknesses:
.078-.080,
.095-.097, .112-.114 inch.
b. Removal of Hand Brake Assembly
( 1 ) U s i n g w r e n c h , Tool C-3281, t o hold the m a i n shaft, as shown i n F i g u r e 1 1 , remove t h e t r a n s m i s sion flange n u t and washer.
( 2 ) I n s t a l l puller, Tool C-452, to remove brake
d r u m and flange assembly.
( 3 ) U s i n g a suitable d r i f t , remove p i n w h i c h
secures the brake shoe anchor i n extension. Remove
t h e brake support grease shield s p r i n g and remove
shield. I f a screwdriver or sharp i n s t r u m e n t is used
i n r e m o v i n g shield, care m u s t be exercised to avoid
d a m a g i n g t h e neoprene sealing surface at t h e b o t t o m
of t h e shield.
^
53x60
Fig. 12—Removal a n d Installation of
Speedometer Drive Pinion
( 4 ) Slide t h e hand brake assembly i n t a c t f r o m
extension housing.
c. Removal, Disassembly and Inspection of
Transmission Extension
( 1 ) Remove t h e speedometer drive p i n i o n and
sleeve assembly, as shown i n F i g u r e 12. The nylon
gear can be easily damaged if extension housing is
removed without first removing the speedometer
drive pinion.
( 2 ) Inspect the o u t p u t shaft rear b e a r i n g o i l seal
and remove, i f necessary, b y using puller, Tool C-748.
Remove any b u r r s f r o m counter-bore o f extension
housing.
( 3 ) Remove the seven t r a n s m i s s i o n extension to
case screws and lockwashers.
( 4 ) I n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C-3283, and remove
O J TP J T SHATT SUPPORT PCT/*-N N'G
SCRfcv.
GOVERNOR
;
•f
BODY
GOVERNOR
LOCATING
SCREW
TOOL
G O V E R N O R VALVE SHA-T ~
_—-r.*
GOVERNOR V A L V E — — ^
Fig. 11—Holding Output Shaft While Removing
.
57v98
Nut
Governor V a l v e a n d Shaft
53 13A
X
GOVERNOR B O D Y
REAR OIL PUMP HOUSING
G O V E R N O R BODY SUPPORT
GOVERNOR
BODY
GOVERNOR
^-WEIGHT
ASSEMBLY
GOVERNOR SUPPORT PISTON RINGS
53x73
53x14
Fig. 14—Removal and Installation of
Governor Weight Assembly
Governor Body and Support
extension assembly b y carefully t a p p i n g assembly
r e a r w a r d , using a soft hammer. Remove t r a n s m i s sion extension gasket and discard.
w e i g h t assembly snap r i n g (large one), and remove
the governor w e i g h t assembly f r o m the governor
body ( F i g . 1 4 ) . Remove governor secondary w e i g h t
snap r i n g ( F i g . 15) using pliers, Tool C-3229.
(4) Remove governor secondary w e i g h t and s p r i n g
and the intermediate w e i g h t . Inspect all parts ( F i g .
15) f o r b u r r s and wear. Check intermediate w e i g h t
for free movement i n p r i m a r y w e i g h t b y placing
intermediate w e i g h t i n p r i m a r y w e i g h t . I n t e r m e d i ate w e i g h t should f a l l freely w h e n b o t h parts are
clean and d r y . Inspect s p r i n g f o r d i s t o r t i o n and i n spect secondary w e i g h t .
( 5 ) Remove governor locating screw f r o m the
governor body and output shaft.
( 6 ) Slide governor body and support f r o m o u t p u t
shaft ( F i g . 1 6 ) . Remove and inspect the t w o governor support piston rings.
(7) Remove the f o u r governor body to support
OUTPUT SHAFT S U P P O R T
'PUMP PINION
(5) Do not remove extension bearing unless i n spection reveals i t is necessary. Never reuse a beari n g w h i c h has been removed. I f necessary to remove
bearing, remove the o u t p u t shaft rear bearing snap
r i n g . Inspect r i n g f o r d i s t o r t i o n . Use driver, Tool
C-3275, and drive b e a r i n g out o f extension housing.
d. Removal, Disassembly and Inspection of Governor
(1) Loosen governor body t o support screws t o
aid i n removal o f governor assembly.
(2) U s i n g a s h a r p i n s t r u m e n t , such as an ice pick,
remove the governor valve shaft snap r i n g ( w e i g h t
end) and remove the governor valve shaft and valve
f r o m governor valve body assembly ( F i g . 1 3 ) .
(3)
U s i n g pliers, Tool C-760, remove the governor
R
(CUTER) WEIGHT
INTERMEDIATE
f
c
A
R
Q
J
L
/OUTPUT SHAFT
REAR OIL
PUMP. HOUSING
WEIG.-T
S?.*ING
SECONDARY (INNER) WEIGHT •
SNAP I v G
.56x26
Fig. 15—Governor Weight Assembly (Exploded View)
wvm
'
'C-3283 GUIDE STUDS
Rear Oil Pump Housing
TOOL
^
53x66
Fig. 18—Checking Clearance Between
_ Pump Body and Gears
screws and lockwashers and separate body f r o m supp o r t . M a t i n g surfaces are machined and can be easily
damaged. Inspect o i l passages. Clean passages t h o r oughly w i t h compressed air. Inspect valve and governor body f o r scores. Check ball p l u g i n face o f
governor.
e. Removal, Disassembly and Inspection of Rear O i l
Pump
( 1 ) Remove the five rear oil p u m p housing to outp u t shaft support screws and lockwashers. Remove
rear o i l pump housing, as shown i n F i g u r e 17. Use
dye to m a r k f r o n t side o f gear i n housing. B o not use
scribe. Inspect machined surfaces f o r nicks and
b u r r s , the o i l p u m p gear and housing f o r scoring or
p i t t i n g and p u m p housing plugs f o r leaks.
( 2 ) Remove rear oil p u m p p i n i o n f r o m o u t p u t
shaft and m a r k f r o n t side w i t h dye.
The o i l p u m p p i n i o n is keyed to o u t p u t shaft b y a
small ball. W h e n r e m o v i n g p i n i o n , do n o t lose t h e
ball. Inspect k e y w a y i n pinion and ball pocket i n
o u t p u t shaft f o r ' w e a r , and also the gear f o r p i t t i n g
56 x "156
Fig. 20—Removing or installing Reverse Band
or scoring.
( 3 ) U s i n g straightedge, Tool C-3335, and feeler
gauge, check clearance between p u m p housing face
and face of gears as shown i n F i g u r e 18. Clearance
l i m i t s are f r o m .001 to .003 inch.
f. Removal of Output Shaft Support, Planet Pinion
Carriers, and Direct Clutch Assemblies
( 1 ) Remove o u t p u t shaft support t o transmission
case screw and washer ( F i g . 1 3 ) . Loosen reverse
band a d j u s t i n g screw and l o c k n u t to release any tension of reverse band on c a r r i e r housing. Grasping
o u t p u t shaft i n b o t h hands, carefully w o r k shaft,
planet p i n i o n carrier assemblies, housing and supp o r t , out o f transmission case, as shown i n F i g u r e
19. I f support is stuck to transmission case and cannot be removed as described, l i g h t l y t a p support w i t h
a soft hammer.
•K
GUIDE STUDS
56x171
Fig. 19—Removing Output Shaft, Carrier Housing
and Input Shaft Assemblies
56x157
Fig. 21—Removing ©r Installing Direct
Clutch Assembly
r
PLANET PINION CARRiHR
HOUSING THRUST WASH.!?
4
. KICKDOWN PLANET PINION
CARRIER THRUST WASHER
56x343A
Fig.
22—Transmission G e a r Train (Exploded V i e w )
( 2 ) Remove t h e large (tabbed) k i c k d o w n planet
p i n i o n c a r r i e r t h r u s t washer f r o m direct c l u t c h
p i s t o n r e t a i n e r assembly ( i f n o t removed w i t h gear
t r a i n ) . Inspect f o r cracks, b u r r s and wear.
(3) Because the diameter of t h e direct clutch ret a i n e r is greater t h a n the diameter of the reverse
band, i t is necessary to first remove t h e reverse band
before t h e direct clutch assembly can be w i t h d r a w n
f r o m t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n case.
To remove t h e reverse band, loosen the band adj u s t i n g screw and l o c k n u t and compress band suffic i e n t l y to remove band s t r u t . U n h o o k reverse band
f r o m l i n k assembly. Remove band b y r o t a t i n g i t
t h r o u g h t h e relieved area i n t r a n s m i s s i o n case, as
(4) To remove the direct c l u t c h assembly, loosen
k i c k d o w n band a d j u s t i n g screw l o c k n u t and back off
a d j u s t i n g screw sufficiently to provide clearance f o r
r e m o v a l o f c l u t c h retainer. Remove t h e direct c l u t c h
assembly f r o m t h e reaction shaft, as shown i n F i g u r e
2 1 . W r a p towel around sun gear t o protect hands.
Re sure to remove direct c l u t c h r e t a i n e r t h r u s t
washer (fiber) f r o m reaction shaft.
g. Removal and Inspection of Planet Carriers
(Refer to Fig. 22)
Fig. 23—Removing Kickdown Planet Pinion Carrier
Housing Snap Ring
-
•
'
57x42
Fig. 24—Removing or Installing Input Shaft a n d
Kickdown Planet Pinion Carrier Assembly
(1) U s i n g a feeler gauge, check clearance between
t h e planet pinion c a r r i e r housing snap r i n g and k i c k d o w n planet c a r r i e r assembly. T h i s clearance should
be f r o m .010 to .021 inch. Snap r i n g s are available
i n t h e f o l l o w i n g thicknesses: .062-.064, .072-.074, and
.082-.084 inch. I f t h i s selection of snap r i n g s fails to
p r o v i d e the necessary clearance, use one of the k i c k d o w n sun gear snap r i n g s ( p a r t number 1327729)
w h i c h w i l l p e r m i t a m i n i m u m of .058-.060 inch.
( 2 ) U s i n g a screwdriver, remove the planet pinion
c a r r i e r housing snap r i n g ( F i g . 2 3 ) . I d e n t i f y snap
r i n g t o aid i n reassembly.
( 3 ) Remove the i n p u t shaft, k i c k d o w n planet
p i n i o n c a r r i e r assembly and k i c k d o w n annulus gear
f r o m c a r r i e r housing, as shown i n F i g u r e 24.
(4) Remove the k i c k d o w n annulus gear after rem o v i n g snap r i n g ( F i g . 25) f r o m i n p u t shaft. Inspect
gear f o r w o r n , cracked, and b r o k e n teeth. Remove
Fig.
25—Removing or Installing Kickdown
Annulus G e a r Snap Ring
4
INPUT SHAFT
KICKDOWN P L A N E T /
PINION CARRIER ASSY
53xl6B
K I C K D O W N ANNULUS GEAR
Fig. 26—Input Shaft, Kickdown Planet Pinion
Carrier and Annulus Gear (Disassembled View)
the small (tabbed) t h r u s t washer and inspect f o r
cracks, b u r r s and wear.
( 5 ) Remove k i c k d o w n planet pinion c a r r i e r assembly f r o m i n p u t shaft. Check all o i l passages i n
b o t h the gear and shaft f o r obstructions. Inspect
splines and b e a r i n g surface on i n p u t shaft f o r b u r r s
and wear. Inspect snap r i n g groove ( F i g . 2 6 ) .
Inspect k i c k d o w n planet pinion c a r r i e r f o r scores
on t h r u s t surfaces and broken and w o r n gear teeth.
U s i n g a feeler gauge, check end clearance on i n d i vidual planet p i n i o n gears. Clearance should be .006
to .017 inch. Inspect pinion shafts f o r fit i n the carr i e r and make sure pinions are free to rotate. Inspect
r e t a i n i n g pins i n p i n i o n shaft. Inspect planet pinion
washers f o r scoring. Do not replace c a r r i e r unless
inspection reveals i t is necessary. The k i c k d o w n
planet pinion c a r r i e r assembly is serviced only as a
complete assembly.
53x56A
Fig. 28—Removing Kickdown Sun G e a r Snap Ring
( 6 ) Remove the reverse planet pinion c a r r i e r f r o m
the c a r r i e r housing, as shown i n F i g u r e 27. Remove
the o u t p u t shaft and reverse annulus gear assembly
and fiber t h r u s t washer f r o m the c a r r i e r housing.
U s i n g pliers, Tool C-3301, remove the reverse annulus
gear snap r i n g and remove annulus gear f r o m output
shaft. Inspect annulus gear f o r w o r n or broken teeth.
Inspect o u t p u t shaft r i n g grooves (seal and snap)
f o r b u r r s and inspect r i n g s f o r b r o k e n ends. Inspect
splines on b o t h shaft and annulus gear f o r b u r r s and
wear. Check speedometer gear f o r b u r r s . Check outp u t shaft bronze pilot b u s h i n g f o r wear, scoring.
The o u t p u t shaft is serviced only as an assembly.
N O T E : O u t p u t shaft b u s h i n g I . D . ( a f t e r m a c h i n i n g )
should be .752 to .753" w i t h m a x i m u m service l i m i t
of .0065" greater.
Inspect reverse planet pinion c a r r i e r housing fiber
t h r u s t washer f o r cracks and wear. Inspect planet
''mm
mm
57x40A
Fig. 27—Removal a n d installation of Reverse
Planet Pinion Carrier Assembly
Kickdown Sun G e a r
p i n i o n c a r r i e r housing and d r i v i n g l u g slots inside
housing f o r wear. Closely inspect band c o n t a c t i n g
surface f o r burned spots and scoring, especially i f
reverse band l i n i n g has become excessively w o r n .
Inspect reverse planet pinion c a r r i e r assembly i n
same manner as k i c k d o w n planet pinion c a r r i e r
assembly.
Inspect all oil passages i n o u t p u t shaft support f o r
obstructions. Check rear o i l p u m p m a t i n g surface
for b u r r s and score m a r k s . Check f o r s t r i p p e d
threads i n support. Inspect gasket surfaces f o r b u r r s
and d i r t . Inspect b o t h inside and outside bearing surfaces f o r wear and scoring.
h. Disassembly and Inspection of the Direct Clutch
Piston Retainer
(1) U s i n g a screwdriver, remove the k i c k d o w n
sun gear snap r i n g , as shown i n F i g u r e 28. The r i n g
is a select fit. I d e n t i f y to aid i n reassembly.
(2) L i f t out k i c k d o w n sun gear assembly ( F i g .
29). O i l passages i n f r o n t are to lubricate the k i c k down planet pinion c a r r i e r t h r u s t washer. Inspect
f o r clutch m a t e r i a l o b s t r u c t i n g o i l passages. Remove
foreign m a t e r i a l w h i c h m a y have accumulated on
f r o n t side. Inspect d r i v i n g disc contact surface f o r
evidence of b u r n i n g or scoring.
Inspect sun gear f o r cracked or b r o k e n t e e t h . L i f t
out direct clutch hub f r o m center of direct c l u t c h
piston retainer. O i l passages i n h u b are t o l u b r i c a t e
the clutch plates and d r i v i n g discs w h e n clutch is i n
released position. Inspect clutch h u b d r i v i n g lugs f o r
wear and remove m e t a l pickup w h i c h m a y have accum u l a t e d on e i t h e r side of t h e hub. Inspect h u b
splines f o r b u r r s and wear.
(3)
I n v e r t t h e direct clutch p i s t o n r e t a i n e r and
. DIRECT CLUTCH SPRING
' ^ .
:
DIRECT CLUTCH SPRING
R L T A I N E ? SNAP RING
DIRECT CLUTCH PISTON
RETAINER A S S Y
DIRECT CLUTCH
SPRING RETAINER
OOI.
53x121 A
Fig. 30—Removed arid Installation of Direct
Clutch Spring Retainer Snap Ring
remove t h e clutch plates (steel) and d r i v i n g disc assemblies. Inspect d r i v i n g discs f o r evidence of b u r n ing, glazing, and flaking off of facing m a t e r i a l . Check
discs b y s c r a t c h i n g facings w i t h finger n a i l ; i f mater i a l collects under nail, replace a l l d r i v i n g discs. Replace d r i v i n g discs i f splines have become damaged.
Inspect t h e steel clutch plates f o r evidence of b u r n ing, scoring, and damaged splines.
(4) U s i n g compressor, Tool C-3575 (or C-3533),
compress the direct clutch s p r i n g sufficiently t o u n seat the direct clutch s p r i n g r e t a i n e r snap r i n g w i t h
pliers, Tool C-3301, as shown i n F i g u r e 30. Release
compressor, Tool C-3575 (or C-3533), and remove the
direct clutch s p r i n g retainer snap r i n g , s p r i n g retainer and s p r i n g f r o m the clutch retainer. Check
spring, r e t a i n e r and snap r i n g f o r d i s t o r t i o n .
( 5 ) U s i n g a t w i s t i n g m o t i o n , remove t h e direct
clutch p i s t o n f r o m retainer. N o t e the ball check i n
clutch retainer housing. The ball check relieves
c e n t r i f u g a l o i l pressure w h e n transmission is i n
n e u t r a l and prevents clutch engagement w h e n engine
speeds are increased. M a k e sure ball operates freely
and seals properly. The bronze b u s h i n g used i n t h e
direct clutch piston r e t a i n e r is not replaceable.
N O T E : Particular attention should be paid to the inside diameter of the direct clutch retainer bushing.
Excessive clearance between the direct clutch retainer bushing and the reaction shaft, can permit the
retainer to wobble and reduce the effectiveness of
the reaction shaft seal. Accordingly, if this seal is
ineffective, clutch slippage may result due to loss of
clutch application pressure. Normal direct clutch
bushing inside diameter dimensions (after machining) are 1.8125 inches to 1.8135 inches. Maximum
useable service limit is .004 greater.
Inspect reaction shaft seal r i n g c o n t a c t i n g areas,
on retainer, f o r g r o o v i n g . Inspect the band contacti n g surface f o r deep scores and burns, especially i f
t h e k i c k d o w n band l i n i n g is w o r n to the p o i n t w h e r e
the steel band has been contacting the direct clutch
piston retainer. Do not turn the direct clutch piston
retainer in a lathe to remove score marks.
( 6 ) Inspect steel clutch plate contacting surfaces
f o r deep scores and b u r r s . Make sure clutch d r i v i n g
lugs w i l l slide freely i n t o retainer. Remove any m e t a l
pickup on h u b o f retainer. Inspect bore of t h e p i s t o n
for score m a r k s . I f score m a r k s are l i g h t , remove
w i t h crocus cloth. I f t h e y are heavy, replace the
piston. Remove t h e direct clutch p i s t o n r e t a i n e r
seal r i n g ( l i p type neoprene) f r o m r e t a i n e r hub,
u s i n g a suitable piece of w i r e . Remove t h e direct
c l u t c h p i s t o n seal r i n g (neoprene) f r o m outer circumference o f piston.
i. Removal and Inspection of Kickdown Band
( 1 ) Compress k i c k d o w n band ends sufficiently t o
remove the k i c k d o w n band s t r u t . Note t h a t s t r u t is
grooved to act as a guide to the k i c k d o w n band s t r u t
pin on band end. Remove a d j u s t i n g screw blade.
(2) Remove the k i c k d o w n band assembly b y r o t a t i n g band ends t h r o u g h rear opening i n t r a n s m i s sion case. B o t h reverse and k i c k d o w n bands have
bonded l i n i n g and no a t t e m p t should be made t o reline
t h e m . The k i c k d o w n band is n a r r o w e r , l a r g e r i n
diameter, and has a different l i n i n g m a t e r i a l . Make
visual inspection of l i n i n g f o r wear and bond. I f
l i n i n g is w o r n so t h a t grooves are no longer visible,
the band assembly m u s t be replaced. Inspect band
for d i s t o r t i o n and cracked ends.
j. Removal of the Reverse and Kickdown Band Levers
Inspect reverse band l i n k assembly f o r wear and
r i v e t i n g of assembly. Inspect levers f o r cracks and
wear. Make sure t h e y have side clearance and are
free to t u r n on shafts. Do not remove these assemblies unless inspection reveals i t is necessary to do so.
( 1 ) I n s e r t fingers i n back of reverse band and l i n k
assembly lever shaft. H o l d i n g the reverse band lever
and l i n k assembly w i t h the other hand, push shaft
out of rear opening i n case.
( 2 ) Remove k i c k d o w n band lever shaft p l u g i n
f r o n t of transmission case. Remove k i c k d o w n lever
b y i n s e r t i n g finger i n back o f k i c k d o w n lever shaft
and, holding the band lever w i t h the other hand, push
shaft out f r o n t of transmission case.
k. Removal of the Front Oil Pump
( 1 ) Remove the transmission r e g u l a t o r
s p r i n g retainer, gasket and "spring.
WmW
mmW'
( 2 ) Remove t h e torque converter control valve
s p r i n g retainer, gasket and s p r i n g . Do not remove
valves. To remove these valves w h e n transmission is
installed i n vehicle, use a mechanical r e t r i e v e r or a
piece of w e l d i n g r o d inserted i n end of valve. Valves
are so constructed t h a t t h e y w i l l not drop i n t o f r o n t
housing w h e n r e m o v i n g .
( 3 ) Remove the f r o n t o i l p u m p housing to transmission case bolts and washers.
( 4 ) U s i n g a soft hammer, tap on the circumference of the housing t o loosen. P u l l oil p u m p housing
assembly and gears f r o m the transmission case ( F i g .
3 1 ) . U s i n g dye, m a r k f r o n t side of gears. Do not use
scribe m a r k s .
( 5 ) Remove o i l p u m p gear f r o m f r o n t oil p u m p
housing. Remove the f r o n t o i l pump housing seal
(large neoprene) f r o m circumference o f housing.
( 6 ) U s i n g a brass d r i f t , d r i v e the f r o n t oil pump
housing oil seal f r o m f r o n t of housing. Inspect f r o n t
oil pump housing b u s h i n g f o r scores ( b u s h i n g is n o t
replaceable). B u s h i n g I . D . (after m a c h i n i n g ) should
be 1.878 t o 1.879 inches w i t h m a x i m u m service l i m i t
of .002 inch greater. T h i s bushing supports the f r o n t
oil p u m p d r i v e sleeve. S l i g h t scores m a y be removed
w i t h crocus cloth. Inspect p u m p housing and gears
f o r scores and wear.
( 7 ) U s i n g straightedge, Tool C-3335, and feeler
gauge, check clearance between pump housing face
and face o f gears. Clearance l i m i t s are .0012 to .0022
inch. Make sure a l l o i l passages are open b y b l o w i n g
t h e m out w i t h compressed air.
valve
L Removal of the Regulator Valve Body
( 1 ) I f r e g u l a t o r valve body cannot be removed b y
i n s t a l l i n g guide studs, Tool C-3283, i n tapped holes i n
body (and p u l l i n g o u t w a r d w i t h the hands, as shown
i n F i g u r e 32) use the t w o threaded holes provided i n
the r e g u l a t o r valve body to attach puller, Tool C3287, and i n s t a l l ( i f removed) guide studs, Tool C3288 ( F i g . 3 2 ) .
0mm?.
( 2 ) P u l l r e g u l a t o r valve body f r o m torque conv e r t e r reaction shaft and discard the gasket. Handle
the r e g u l a t o r valve body carefully.
FRONT O i l PLMP HOUSING
.56x627
Fig. 31—Removal of Front Oil Pump Housing
(Typical V i e w )
A
( 3 ) Place body and b o t h valves i n pan c o n t a i n i n g
a clean solvent, wash t h o r o u g h l y , and d r y w i t h compressed air. Inspect b o t h valves for free movement
i n valve body. T h e y should f a l l i n and o u t of bores
w h e n b o t h t h e valves and body are d r y . Crocus cloth
m a y be used to polish valves, p r o v i d i n g care is exercised n o t t o r o u n d the sharp edge p o r t i o n of the
t a i n e r may require g u i d i n g out of transmission case.
( 3 ) Remove the s p r i n g retainer, s p r i n g and servo
piston and p l u g assembly.
( 4 ) Remove the servo piston seal ( l i p type neoprene) f r o m piston.
( 5 ) Remove reverse servo piston p l u g snap r i n g .
6
mi ""'
Using Guide Studs (Top View)
( 6 ) Remove p l u g and cushion s p r i n g f r o m piston.
Inspect servo bore f o r scoring. L i g h t scores m a y be
removed w i t h crocus cloth. Check p l u g f o r scoring
and wear at lever contact point. Check p l u g snap
r i n g and groove f o r burrs, wear.
n. Removal of Kickdown Piston
( 1 ) U s i n g compressor, Tool C-3289 or C-3529,
apply sufficient pressure on the k i c k d o w n piston r o d
guide to remove the p i s t o n r o d guide r e t a i n i n g snap
ring.
( 2 ) Loosen compressing p o r t i o n of tool and remove tool f r o m transmission case. Remove p i s t o n r o d
guide, piston spring, and k i c k d o w n piston rod assembly. Inspect r i v e t i n g of the k i c k d o w n p i s t o n r o d to
k i c k d o w n s p r i n g retainer.
( 3 ) Remove seal r i n g f r o m guide. Inspect f o r l i g h t
scores and wear on piston r o d and guide.
TORQUE CONVERTER REACTION SHAFT
Fig. 32—Removing Regulator Valve B o d y Using Puller Tool (Bottom View)
valves. The sharp edge p o r t i o n prevents d i r t and
f o r e i g n m a t t e r f r o m g e t t i n g between the valve and
body, reducing the p o s s i b i l i t y of s t i c k i n g . Check all
fluid passages f o r obstructions and inspect all m a t i n g
surfaces f o r b u r r s and d i s t o r t i o n . I f r e g u l a t o r valve
body should have a s l i g h t nick or raised p o r t i o n on
m a t i n g surfaces, i t m a y be removed b y u s i n g a
surface plate and crocus cloth.
( 4 ) U s i n g lock r i n g pliers, Tool C-484, remove the
k i c k d o w n piston f r o m the transmission case.
( 5 ) Remove the three cast i r o n seal r i n g s f r o m the
k i c k d o w n piston. Inspect piston f o r l i g h t scores and
wear. Inspect r i n g s f o r broken ends.
o. Removal of Torque Converter Reaction Shaft
Inspect torque converter reaction shaft steel seal
r i n g s ( i n t e r l o c k i n g type) f o r broken ends. Make sure
( 4 ) Check r e g u l a t o r valve s p r i n g seat (snap r i n g ) .
A f t e r b o t h valves and r e g u l a t o r valve body have been
t h o r o u g h l y cleaned and inspected, place t h e m on
clean paper and cover w i t h clean paper u n t i l ready
f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n . Leave valves i n r e g u l a t o r body bores.
m. Removal of Reverse Servo Piston
( 1 ) I n s t a l l compressor, Tool C-3289 or C-3529, on
t r a n s m i s s i o n case (use o i l pan screws) and compress
reverse servo p i s t o n s p r i n g retainer.
( 2 ) U s i n g a screwdriver, remove the reverse servo
piston s p r i n g r e t a i n e r snap r i n g , as shown i n F i g u r e
33. Loosen compressing p o r t i o n of tool. S p r i n g re-
REVERSE
ASSY
SERVO
RETAINER
SNAP
RING
53x40
Fig. 33—Removal a n d Installation of Reverse Servo
Assembly Retainer Snap Ring
t h e y are free t o r o t a t e I n t h e lands. Inspect neoprene
seal r i n g f o r brittleness. Inspect splines on shaft f o r
b u r r s and wear. Inspect t h r u s t surfaces f o r wear
and s l i g h t scores. Remove t h e reaction shaft seal
(neoprene). Do not remove the torque converter reaction shaft unless inspection reveals i t is necessary
to do so.
REAR PUMP S U C T I O N
REVERSE PRESSURE
\
OTTLE
K I C K D O W N O N PRESSURE '
/
\ PRESSURE
\
i
K I C K D O W N O F F PRESSURE
/
/
• •'
' ' /
PRESSURE TO
/ REGULATOR VALVE
/
FRONT PUMP
,'
/SUCTION
7
-
FRONT PUMP
,' /
/
/CHECK VALVE
I f necessary to remove reaction shaft, follow these
steps:
( 1 ) Remove neoprene seal r i n g .
( 2 ) Remove the t h r e e t r a n s m i s s i o n case to reaction shaft screws and washers.
( 3 ) U s i n g Tool C-3297 or C-3521 press reaction
shaft out o f t r a n s m i s s i o n case, as shown i n F i g u r e
34.
( 4 ) Remove the t w o torque converter
shaft seal r i n g s ( i n t e r l o c k i n g ) .
reaction
\
UPSET PRESSURE TO
REGULATOR VALVE
\
DIRECT CLUTCH
PRESSURE
\
;
I
GOVERNOR
PRESSURE
TO PRESSURE GAUGE
(FOR SERVICE)
REAR PUMP CHECK VALVE
57x161
Fig. 35—Transmission Oil Passages
N O T E : Reaction shaft b u s h i n g I . D . ( a f t e r machini n g ) should be 1.063 t o 1.064 inches w i t h a m a x i m u m
of .0035 greater.
p. Removal of Kickdown, Band Adjusting Screw
Loosen l o c k i n g n u t and remove k i c k d o w n band adj u s t m e n t screw and l o c k n u t . W h e n l o c k n u t is loosened, the a d j u s t i n g screw m u s t be finger free. I f i t
is not, inspect screw and n u t f o r pulled threads or
f o r e i g n m a t e r i a l i n threads.
T h e transmission and i t s components have been
disasembled f o r inspection, cleaning and t h e replacem e n t o f w o r n or damaged parts.
Inspect t r a n s m i s s i o n case f o r cracks, sand holes,
and stripped threads. Check f o r b u r r s on m a t i n g
surfaces. B l o w compressed a i r t h r o u g h a l l passages
(refer t o F i g . 35) to make sure t h e y are open. Check
oil pressure take-off plugs f o r tightness. Check d r i v e
t y p e b r e a t h e r i n extension housing f o r being plugged
(under coating) and looseness.
9. ASSEMBLING THE TRANSMISSION
Before assembling the transmission, l u b r i c a t e each
p a r t w i t h clean A u t o m a t i c Transmission F l u i d , T y p e
" A " , Suffix " A " .
a. Installing Kickdown Band Adjusting Screw
I t is v i t a l l y i m p o r t a n t t h a t the a d j u s t i n g screw f i t
freely i n t o the t r a n s m i s s i o n case. I n s t a l l a d j u s t i n g
screw, w i t h l o c k i n g n u t attached, i n t o transmission
case u n t i l there is a p p r o x i m a t e l y 1 i n c h o f screw l e f t
on outside o f case. Do n o t lock screw i n t o p o s i t i o n at
this time.
b. Installing the Torque Converter Reaction Shaft
( 1 ) Coat the t w o steel torque converter reaction
shaft seal r i n g s w i t h t r a n s m i s s i o n fluid.
_,:y •.
( 2 ) I n s t a l l r i n g s on shaft. M a k e sure t h e y
interlocked and r o t a t e freely i n the r i n g lands.
are
( 3 ) Coat p o r t i o n o f reaction shaft ( t h a t presses
i n t o case) w i t h t r a n s m i s s i o n fluid. P o s i t i o n t o r q u e
converter reaction shaft i n t o t r a n s m i s s i o n case so
t h a t holes i n shaft a l i g n w i t h bolt holes i n case. I n stall Tool C-3297 ( o r Tool C-3531).
/
TOOL C-3297
TORQUE CONVERTER
R E A C T I O N SHAFT
Fig. 34—Removal o f T o r q u e C o n v e r t e r Reaction Shaft
( 4 ) Place t w o f r o n t o i l p u m p to t r a n s m i s s i o n case
screws (coarse t h r e a d ) t h r o u g h reaction s h a f t screw
holes i n transmission case u n t i l threads contact the
machine threads of r e a c t i o n shaft flange screw holes
!
!
;
compress the k i c k d o w n piston s p r i n g to the p o i n t
t h a t piston guide seal r i n g s l i g h t l y binds on case.
U s i n g a piece of brass r o d flattened on end, w o r k seal
r i n g i n t o position, gradually compressing s p r i n g u n t i l seal r i n g enters case.
REGULATOR V A L V E
I
TORQUE CONVERTER
CONTROL V A L V E
/
( 6 ) I n s t a l l the k i c k d o w n piston r o d guide r e t a i n i n g snap r i n g . Make sure snap r i n g is properly
seated.
d. Installing the Reverse Servo Piston
(1)
ton.
I n s t a l l cushion s p r i n g and p l u g i n servo pis-
GUIDE STUDS
( 2 ) I n s t a l l t h e reverse servo piston p l u g snap
r i n g . Make sure snap r i n g is properly seated.
J
56x159
Fig. 36—Installing Regulator Waive Body
(fine t h r e a d ) . Use v e r y l i g h t finger pressure
t i g h t e n ( a p p r o x i m a t e l y one t u r n ) .
to
I n t h i s position, the bolts w i l l serve as guides i n
a l i g n i n g the reaction shaft flange dowel hole w i t h
the dowel i n the t r a n s m i s s i o n case.
( 5 ) Press reaction shaft i n t o transmission case.
Eemove Tool C-3297 ( o r Tool C-3531).
( 6 ) Remove the t w o f r o n t p u m p screws ( g u i d e ) .
S t a r t the three t r a n s m i s s i o n case to reaction shaft
bolts and washers and t i g h t e n f r o m 10 to 15 footpounds torque. Coat new t o r q u e converter reaction
shaft seal r i n g (neoprene) w i t h transmission fluid
and install on shaft.
c. Installing the Kickdown Piston
( 3 ) Coat a new reverse servo piston r i n g (neoprene) w i t h transmission fluid and install ( l i p f a c i n g
down) on piston. I n s e r t reverse servo piston and
p l u g assembly i n t o transmission case i n a cocked position. Then, b y r o t a t i n g piston, t h e piston r i n g w i l l
enter case w i t h o u t being damaged.
( 4 ) Place reverse servo piston s p r i n g over piston
and position s p r i n g retainer over s p r i n g . Compress
s p r i n g w i t h compressor, Tool C-3289 (or Tool C3529), sufficiently t o i n s t a l l snap r i n g . The s p r i n g
retainer m a y require g u i d i n g i n t o case. Make sure
snap r i n g seats properly. Remove i n s t a l l i n g tool
f r o m transmission case.
e. Installing the Regulator Valve Body
Inspect r e g u l a t o r valve body and valves to make sure
t h a t no damage has occurred since first inspection
and cleaning. Blow out passages w i t h compressed a i r .
( 1 ) Coat the three k i c k d o w n piston r i n g s w i t h
transmission fluid ( t w o l o c k i n g and one open t y p e )
and install on piston. I n t e r l o c k the r i n g s and m a k e
sure t h e y are free t o r o t a t e i n lands.
( 2 ) Place k i c k d o w n p i s t o n assembly i n t o t r a n s mission case. Compress b o t t o m r i n g (large) w i t h a
piece of brass r o d . A f t e r b o t t o m r i n g has entered,
piston w i l l seem to h a n g at t w o different locations
w h i l e being pushed i n t o case. T h i s is due to r i n g s
e n t e r i n g cylinder. DO N O T H A M M E R .
( 3 ) Place k i c k d o w n p i s t o n r o d i n p i s t o n and slide
s p r i n g over k i c k d o w n p i s t o n r o d .
( 4 ) Coat a new k i c k d o w n p i s t o n r o d guide seal
r i n g w i t h transmission fluid and i n s t a l l on k i c k d o w n
piston r o d guide. M a k e sure r i n g rotates f r e e l y i n
land.
( 5 ) I n s t a l l compressor, Tool C-3289 (or Tool C3529), on t r a n s m i s s i o n case. U s i n g extreme care,
I
^ — T O O L
IF Wfcfef'
'
FRONT OIL
' PUMP H O U S I N G
53x28
Fig. 37—Installing Front Pump O i l Seal
M a k e sure torque converter reaction shaft seal (neoprene) is coated w i t h transmission fluid.
( 1 ) Place the transmission r e g u l a t o r valve and
torque converter c o n t r o l valve i n the regulator valve
body. (Refer to F i g . 36.)
( 2 ) I n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C-3288 ( i f r e m o v e d ) ,
i n f r o n t of transmission case, position new r e g u l a t o r
valve body gasket and valve body assembly ( w i t h o i l
passages to r e a r ) over torque converter reaction
shaft. -Seat firmly against gasket on f r o n t o f t r a n s mission case. Use extreme care w h e n placing r e g u l a t o r body i n position to prevent reaction shaft
screws f r o m damaging passages i n r e g u l a t o r body.
I . Installing the Front Oil Pump
( 1 ) P o s i t i o n f r o n t o i l p u m p housing o i l seal i n
f r o n t of oil p u m p housing ( m e t a l p o r t i o n o f seal
d o w n ) . U s i n g d r i v e r , Tool C-3278, b o t t o m seal i n t o
housing, as shown i n F i g u r e 37,
( 7 ) U s i n g a new gasket, i n s t a l l t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n
r e g u l a t o r valve s p r i n g and retainer. T i g h t e n f r o m
45 to 50 foot-pounds torque.
g. Installing the Kickdown Band and Levers
( 1 ) Place k i c k d o w n band lever assembly i n t o
t r a n s m i s s i o n case and slide the k i c k d o w n band lever
shaft i n t o position f r o m f r o n t of transmission case.
The lever should operate freely on shaft.
( 2 ) I n s t a l l k i c k d o w n band lever shaft p l u g i n f r o n t
of t r a n s m i s s i o n case and t i g h t e n 30 t o 35 foot-pounds
torque.
( 3 ) Place k i c k d o w n band assembly i n t o t r a n s m i s sion case b y r o t a t i n g ends of band t h r o u g h rear openi n g i n case. F i t either end o f t h e k i c k d o w n band over
a d j u s t i n g screw blade and compress t h e band lever.
Make sure the kickdown band strut slot engages with
k i c k d o w n strut pin i n the band end.
h . Assembling the Direct Clutch Piston Retainer
( 2 ) Coat new f r o n t o i l p u m p housing seal (neoprene) w i t h transmission fluid and i n s t a l l on housi n g . M a k e sure seal is p r o p e r l y seated i n groove ( l i p
f a c i n g down) and t h a t i t protrudes .010 inch above
circumference o f housing.
( 3 ) Place transmission f r o n t o i l p u m p gear and
p i n i o n ( d r i v i n g lugs of p i n i o n f a c i n g up) i n ' o i l p u m p
h o u s i n g and' check t h e m a r k i n g . Unless o i l p u m p
pinion is installed correctly, considerable damage w i l l
r e s u l t w h e n transmission is installed i n vehicle.
L u b r i c a t e o i l p u m p gears w t h A u t o m a t i c T r a n s m i s sion F l u i d , Type " A " , Suffix " A " .
( 4 ) Place f r o n t o i l p u m p housing assembly ( w i t h
oil d r a i n f a c i n g u p ) over torque converter reaction
s h a f t and slide i n t o position over guide studs and
up against r e g u l a t o r valve body. S t a r t five o f t h e
bolts and d r a w housing down evenly u n t i l i t is seated
i n t o t r a n s m i s s i o n case.
( 5 ) Remove guide studs and i n s t a l l the t w o rem a i n i n g bolts and washers. T i g h t e n to 17 footpounds torque. A f t e r a l l bolts have been installed
and p r o p e r l y torqued, engage the d r i v i n g lugs o f t h e
oil p u m p p i n i o n t o determine i f o i l p u m p p i n i o n t u r n s
freely. Use the o i l p u m p d r i v e sleeve f o r t h i s check.
I f p i n i o n does not t u r n freely, remove p u m p and
check f o r f o r e i g n m a t t e r between p u m p gears and
housing. L u g s o f d r i v e sleeve should extend n o t m o r e
t h a n f r o m y t o % i n c h beyond face o f o i l p u m p
housing.
( 1 ) Coat a new direct c l u t c h p i s t o n seal r i n g w i t h
transmission fluid and i n s t a l l on piston, w i t h l i p o f
seal f a c i n g away f r o m the flange.
( 2 ) Coat a new d i r e c t clutch p i s t o n retainer seal
r i n g w i t h transmission fluid and i n s t a l l ( l i p of seal
down) on retainer h u b .
( 3 ) Place piston assembly i n t h e d i r e c t c l u t c h ret a i n e r and, w i t h a t w i s t i n g m o t i o n , seat p i s t o n i n
b o t t o m of retainer. W o r k carefully t o avoid damagi n g l i p of seals.
( 4 ) Seat the direct c l u t c h spring- i n t o the d i r e c t
c l u t c h piston retainer. Place s p r i n g r e t a i n e r on s p r i n g
and snap r i n g on s p r i n g retainer.
( 5 ) U s i n g compressor, Tool C-3575 ( o r Tool C3533), compress t h e direct clutch s p r i n g sufficiently
to seat the snap r i n g i n i t s groove. M a k e sure snap
r i n g is p r o p e r l y seated.
( 6 ) Remove compressor, Tool C-3575 (or Tool C3533). Place the d i r e c t clutch h u b i n the center o f
t h e d i r e c t clutch piston retainer.
( 7 ) L u b r i c a t e t h e c l u t c h plates and d r i v i n g discs
w i t h A u t o m a t i c Transmission F l u i d ( T y p e " A " , Suffix
" A " ) . Place one o f t h e c l u t c h plates (steel) i n t h e
direct clutch piston retainer, followed b y a d r i v i n g
disc.
2
( 8 ) U s i n g a new gasket, i n s t a l l t h e torque conv e r t e r c o n t r o l valve s p r i n g and retainer. T i g h t e n 35
t o 40 foot-pounds torque.
( 8 ) Place t h e k i c k d o w n sun gear assembly i n t h e
direct clutch piston retainer.
( 9 ) U s i n g a feeler gauge, check the clearance
under the k i c k d o w n mn gear snap r i n g . Select a
snap r i n g t o give m i n i m u m clearance (close t o zero
as possible). M a k e sure snap r i n g seats p r o p e r l y .
Snap r i n g s are available i n the f o l l o w i n g t w o t h i c k nesses: .058 to .060 inch and .062 to .064 i n c h .
( 1 0 ) Place fiber t h r u s t washer (select fit, see
"Checking Transmission E n d P l a y , " P a r a g r a p h 9)
on reaction shaft and i n s t a l l direct c l u t c h assembly
i n transmission case, as shown i n F i g u r e 2 1 .
sonably tight on output shaft. E n d clearance is controlled by various snap rings which are available in
the following thicknesses: .078 to .080 i n c h ; .082 to
.084 inch, and .086 to .088 inch. Make sure snap r i n g
seats p r o p e r l y .
( 3 ) Coat o u t p u t shaft seal r i n g w i t h transmission
fluid and i n s t a l l on shaft. I n t e r l o c k the seal r i n g
i n t o position and make sure r i n g rotates freely i n
land.
i. Installing Reverse Band and Levers Assembly
( 1 ) Place t h e reverse band lever assembly i n t h e
reverse band l i n k assembly and place i n t r a n s m i s s i o n
case.
(2) A l i g n
blies to shaft
reverse band
transmission
t h e holes i n the lever and l i n k assemhole i n t h e transmission case. Slide t h e
lever shaft i n t o position f r o m r e a r o f
case.
( 3 ) Place reverse band assembly i n t o t r a n s m i s sion case b y r o t a t i n g ends of band t h r o u g h relieved
area i n t r a n s m i s s i o n case ( F i g . 2 0 ) . H o o k end o f
band i n l i n k assembly. Compress band sufficiently t o
i n s t a l l the s t r u t i n the slots of t h e band and lever
assembly. ( F i g u r e 38 illustrates assembly of reverse
band linkage a f t e r i n s t a l l a t i o n i n t r a n s m i s s i o n case.)
j . Installing the Panet Pinion Carriers in Housing
(Refer to Fig. 22)
( 1 ) L u b r i c a t e b e a r i n g surface o f planet p i n i o n
c a r r i e r housing, and place bearing surface o f h o u s i n g
over o u t p u t shaft support bearing surface.
( 2 ) Place t h e reverse annulus gear on t h e o u t p u t
shaft and i n s t a l l snap r i n g . O u t p u t s h a f t m a y be
placed i n a vise, p r o v i d i n g i t is clean and equipped
w i t h soft j a w s . Reverse annulus gear must fit rea- REVERSE BAND LEVER ADJUSTING SCREW
-REVERSE BAND LEVER
REVERSE BAND ASSY
y
REVERSE BAND
LEVER SHAFT
•
REVERSE BAND
LEVER ADJUSTING
SCREW NUT
i"
Fig. 38—Reverse Band Linkage
( 5 ) Place o u t p u t shaft and reverse annulus gear
i n t o position i n the planet c a r r i e r housing.
Be careful not t o damage the o u t p u t shaft seal r i n g
as i t enters the o u t p u t shaft support. Make sure t h e
fiber t h r u s t washer seats properly between the reverse annulus gear and t h e planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r
housing.
( 6 ) Coat reverse annulus gear teeth w i t h transmission fluid.
( 7 ) L u b r i c a t e t h r u s t surfaces and gear teeth of
the reverse planet pinion gears and c a r r i e r assembly.
Place c a r r i e r assembly*(Fig. 27) i n t h e reverse annulus gear. Make sure d r i v i n g lugs on c a r r i e r assembly p r o p e r l y engage t h e slots i n t h e planet pinion
c a r r i e r housing.
( 8 ) Coat i n p u t shaft bearing surfaces and gear
teeth on the k i c k d o w n planet p i n i o n gears and carrier assembly w i t h transmission fluid. Slide k i c k down planet pinion carrier assembly carefully d o w n
on rear end of i n p u t shaft.
( 9 ) L u b r i c a t e teeth and t h r u s t surfaces, t h e n slide
k i c k d o w n annulus gear over i n p u t shaft. I n s t a l l
k i c k d o w n annulus gear snap r i n g and make sure i t is
seated p r o p e r l y ( F i g . 2 5 ) . I n p u t shaft m a y be placed
i n a vise, p r o v i d i n g vise is clean and equipped w i t h
soft j a w s .
( 1 0 ) L u b r i c a t e t h e large k i c k d o w n planet p i n i o n
c a r r i e r t h r u s t washer (tabbed) w i t h l u b r i p l a t e and
i n s t a l l on k i c k d o w n planet p i n i o n carrier assembly.
( 1 1 ) Place the k i c k d o w n planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r assembly, k i c k d o w n annulus gear and i n p u t shaft i n t o
position i n planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r housing. M a k e sure
lugs on k i c k d o w n c a r r i e r assembly p r o p e r l y engage
t h e slots i n t h e planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r housing.
17)'
REVERSE B A N G ,
LINK ASSY
( 4 ) Coat the planet pinion c a r r i e r housing fiber
t h r u s t washer w i t h lubriplate, slide washer over outp u t shaft and against t h r u s t surface on reverse
annulus gear.
53x50
( 1 2 ) I n s t a l l planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r housing snap
r i n g (raise housing s l i g h t l y t o a i d i n i n s t a l l i n g snap
r i n g ) . Make sure snap r i n g is positioned and seated
properly.
and i n s t a l l the f o u r screws and lockwashers.
tighten screws at this time.
( 1 3 ) U s i n g feeler gauge, check the clearance bet w e e n the k i c k d o w n planet c a r r i e r h o u s i n g snap r i n g
and t h e k i c k d o w n planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r assembly.
L i m i t s are .010 to .021 inch. I f t h e clearance is n o t
w i t h i n these l i m i t s , select a new snap r i n g . Snapr i n g s are available i n the f o l l o w i n g thicknesses: .062
to .064 i n c h ; .072 to .074 inch, and .082 t o .084 inch.
I f t h i s selection o f snap r i n g s f a i l s to provide sufficient clearance, use a k i c k d o w n sun gear snap r i n g
( p a r t n u m b e r 1327729) w h i c h w i l l p e r m i t a m i n i m u m o f .058-.060 i n c h .
( 2 ) Slide governor support and body assembly over
o u t p u t shaft, as shown i n F i g u r e 16, and i n t o posit i o n i n r e a r oil p u m p housing. Compress governor
support p i s t o n r i n g s w i t h fingers as support enters
o i l p u m p housing.
k. Installing the Output Shaft Support, Planet Pinion
Carriers and Housing Assembly
( 1 ) I n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C-3283, i n r e a r of
t r a n s m i s s i o n case. Position new o u t p u t shaft supp o r t gasket over guide studs and against case.
( 2 ) I n s e r t i n p u t shaft, planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r housi n g , o u t p u t shaft support and o u t p u t shaft t h r o u g h
t h e r e a r o f t r a n s m i s s i o n case. M a k e sure large k i c k d o w n planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r t h r u s t washer (tabbed)
is positioned c o r r e c t l y against t h r u s t surface o f d i rect c l u t c h r e t a i n e r assembly.
( 3 ) I n s t a l l t h e one o u t p u t shaft support t o t r a n s mission case screw and lockwasher and t i g h t e n finger
tight.
1. Installing the Rear O i l Pump
( 1 ) Coat t r a n s m i s s i o n rear o i l p u m p p i n i o n b a l l
w i t h t r a n s m i s s i o n fluid and i n s e r t i n b a l l pocket i n
o u t p u t shaft.
( 2 ) L u b r i c a t e rear o i l p u m p d r i v e p i n i o n w i t h
t r a n s m i s s i o n fluid, place over o u t p u t shaft and slide
i n t o position. A l i g n k e y w a y i n p i n i o n w i t h ball shaft.
P i n i o n was m a r k e d w h e n removed i n disassembly, so
make sure i t is installed correctly. Check t h e m a r k ing.
( 3 ) Slide r e a r o i l p u m p h o u s i n g assembly over
o u t p u t shaft support bolts and lockwashers. D r a w
d o w n evenly and t i g h t e n f r o m 10 t o 12 foot-pounds
t o r q u e . After bolts have been properly tightened,
turn output shaft to make sure pump gears are free
to rotate. I f they are not, remove pump to determine
cause.
Do not
( 3 ) A l i g n l o c a t i n g hole i n o u t p u t shaft t o l o c a t i n g
screw hole i n governor body and i n s t a l l governor
l o c a t i n g screw. T i g h t e n 3 / t o 4 foot-pounds torque.
Holes can be easily aligned b y t u r n i n g o u t p u t shaft
and h o l d i n g governor body.
l
2
( 4 ) T i g h t e n t h e f o u r governor body screws f r o m
5 to 10 foot-pounds torque.
( 5 ) D r y governor p a r t s w i t h compressed a i r , b u t
do n o t lubricate w h e n assembling. Place governor
intermediate weight i n p r i m a r y weight.
( 6 ) I n s t a l l t h e secondary w e i g h t s p r i n g and
w e i g h t . Compress s p r i n g sufficiently t o i n s t a l l snap
r i n g . M a k e sure t h e s p r i n g seats properly and t h a t
snap r i n g is seated p r o p e r l y .
( 7 ) Place t h e governor w e i g h t assembly (seconda r y w e i g h t snap r i n g up) i n t o governor body ( F i g .
14) and i n s t a l l snap r i n g . M a k e sure t h e snap r i n g
seats p r o p e r l y .
( 8 ) Slide t h e governor valve shaft i n t o t h e governor body ( F i g . 13) t h r o u g h t h e o u t p u t shaft and
governor w e i g h t assembly. A t t h e same t i m e , posit i o n valve i n t o body.
( 9 ) I n s t a l l t h e governor valve shaft snap r i n g .
M a k e sure snap r i n g is positioned at outer end of
groove. (Refer t o F i g . 39.) I f positioned a t inner
end o f groove i t m a y l i m i t t r a v e l of governor valve.
Make sure r i n g is p r o p e r l y locked to shaft.
( 1 0 ) Check operation of governor w e i g h t assemb l y and valve b y t u r n i n g o u t p u t shaft. B o t h should
f a l l freely i n body.
n. Installing the Transmission Extension, O i l Seal and
Bearing
SNAP RINGS
m. Installing the Governor on the Output Shaft
( 1 ) Coat t h e t w o governor support p i s t o n r i n g s
w i t h t r a n s m i s s i o n fluid and i n s t a l l on t h e governor
support. Stagger r i n g gaps and make sure t h e y are
free t o r o t a t e i n lands. P o s i t i o n governor on s u p p o r t
57x37
Fig. 39—Positioning Governor V a l v e Snap Ring
100 —POWERFLITE
TRANSMISSION
i
§
If
C-3205
DRIVER-:-
OUTPUT SHAFT
REAR BEARING -<>•
OIL SEAL
REAR
EXTENSION
HOUSING
t i
Fig. 41—Removal of Output Shaft Support, Extension,
Handbrake Assembly and Pinion Carrier
Housing as an Assembly
-•
t
57x38
w i t h A u t o m a t i c Transmission F l u i d , Type " A " , Suffix
"A".
53x25
Fig. 40—Installation of Output Shaft Rear
Bearing Oil Seal
( 2 ) I n s t a l l o u t p u t shaft rear b e a r i n g snap r i n g .
Snap r i n g s are available i n t w o sizes. Select one to
eliminate all end play at bearing.
( 1 ) I n s t a l l the new o u t p u t shaft rear b e a r i n g i n
extension housing w i t h d r i v e r , Tool C-3204. M a k e
sure b e a r i n g is properly seated and t h e n lubricate
( 3 ) I n s t a l l extension oil seal w i t h d r i v e r , Tool
O-3205, as shown i n F i g u r e 40.
( 4 ) Place new transmission extension gasket over
SCREW (25 •
S C P P A ' (4)
LOC.C
LOCK WASHER (2) ^
W A S H LP
s
LO"
0)-—*"
WASHER
1
(4)
TRANSFER PLATE COVER
SCREW (3) AND LOCK WASHER (3)
SCREW ~
SERVO RESTRICTOR VALVE -TRANSFER PLATE
^
PUMP CHECK VALVE SPRING -
PUMP CHECK VALVE
V A L V E BODY PLATE
/m
liiJ
T H R O T T L E CONTROL CAM
THROTTLE PRESSURE
CHECK
SERVO BLEED VALVE .
SCREW—LONG
CONTROL CABLE RETAINER
, LOCK
SCREW-SHORT (1)
!
3)
it /
\
SHAFT
BALL
SHUTTLE
SPRING
M A N U A L VALVE LEVER
VAiVF
+ CABLE RETAINER -CLIP
ASSEMBL*'
- DRIVE SCREW >
mtSm
• REVERSE BLOCKER VALVE AND SPRING
, SHIFT VALVE A N D SPRING
SCREW—-SHORT 1
PLUG
END COVER
PLATE
END COVER
^
K I C K D O W N ROD,
BALL AND SPRING
^ - JJ i ^ l f e
.
^J^f^^jK^m
'
"^Ttrf^
l
VALVE BODY
COTTER P I N
/'
SLEEVE AND R N O
/
MANUAL
VALVE
. w
T
\
"
\
•
x
A?'UAL
\
" O " RING SEAL
ÊiAfNSNG
PING
View)
\
y
t
:
* '*
x
\\
I H . ' O n - L f VAiV=
AMD SPP'NG
Fig. 42—Valve Body and Transfer Plate Assembly
(Exploded
SCREW (2)
T H R O T T L E VALVE
— O P E R A T I N G LEVER
ArjEMBLY
guide studs, Tool C-3283, and i n t o position against
o u t p u t shaft support. Do not use sealing m a t e r i a l on
gasket. A v o i d d a m a g i n g the governor housing w h e n
placing t h e rear extension h o u s i n g over t h e o u t p u t
shaft and onto the guide studs.
( 5 ) Position housing b y t a p p i n g w i t h soft h a m mer. Remove guide studs and i n s t a l l t h e seven transmission extension to case bolts and lockwashers.
D r a w d o w n evenly and t i g h t e n 25 t o 30 foot-pounds
torque.
TRANSFER PLATE
ASSCAABLY
PUMP
CHECK
VALVE
GUIDE
o. Checking Transmission End Play
Before transmission end play is checked, i t is necessary t h a t t h e hand brake d r u m be installed and t i g h t ened to r e q u i r e d torque specifications (175 footpounds) . T h i s operation is necessary to a i d i n proper
seating on the extension rear b e a r i n g .
I f end p l a y does n o t f a l l w i t h i n specifications, t h e
t r a n s m i s s i o n will have t o be partially disassembled
t o allow a direct c l u t c h r e t a i n e r t h r u s t washer (fiber)
o f proper thickness to be installed. T h r u s t washers
are available i n the f o l l o w i n g t h r e e thicknesses:
.078-.080 i n c h ; .095-.097 inch, and .112-.114 i n c h .
STUD
' SERVO
-RESTR1CTOR
VALVE
OPERATING
PLUG • •
1
( 6 ) L i g h t e n t h e o u t p u t s h a f t support t o ease bolt
25 t o 30 foot-pounds torque. T u r n o u t p u t shaft t o
make sure i t t u r n s freely.
( 7 ) Coat n y l o n gear and threads on speedometer
d r i v e p i n i o n w i t h transmission fluid and i n s t a l l i n
t r a n s m i s s i o n extension, as s h o w n i n F i g u r e 12.
T i g h t e n 40 to, 45 foot-pounds torque.
^
VALVE BODY PLATE
Pig. 44—Removing Transfer Plate Assembly
( 1 ) Remove the screws and lockwashers f r o m the
t r a n s m i s s i o n extension and i n s t a l l guide studs, Tool
C-3283.
( 2 ) Remove the o u t p u t shaft support t o case
screw and washer and remove the extension housing
( w i t h brake assembly), o u t p u t shaft support and
planet p i n i o n c a r r i e r housing as one assembly as
shown i n Figure 41.
( 3 ) Slide t h e direct c l u t c h piston retainer f r o m
torque converter reaction shaft ( i t is unnecessary t o
remove i t f r o m t r a n s m i s s i o n case) and remove t h e
direct c l u t c h r e t a i n e r t h r u s t washer.
( 4 ) U s i n g a micrometer, measure t h e thickness of
t h e washer and select washer to give correct clearance. Assemble as previously i n s t r u c t e d .
p. Adjustment of Bands (Bench)
Kickdown (Front Band)
GUIDE STUDS
( 1 ) U s i n g a % i n c h open end wrench, loosen the
locknut.
( 2 ) Check t h e freeness o f t h e a d j u s t i n g screw i n
t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n . Refer to "Transmission and Cont r o l s — A d j u s t m e n t s , " P a r a g r a p h 6.
Reverse (Rear B a n d )
( 1 ) Loosen reverse band a d j u s t i n g screw l o c k n u t
and t i g h t e n a d j u s t i n g screw f r o m 20 to 25 i n c h pounds torque.
•••I
( 2 ) Back o u t a d j u s t i n g screw 12 t u r n s .
( 3 ) H o l d i n g t h e a d j u s t i n g screw i n t h i s location,
t i g h t e n t h e a d j u s t i n g screw l o c k n u t 30 t o 35 footpounds torque.
STAND _
(TOO; )
10. SERVICING THE V A L V E BODY A N D TRANSFER
PLATE
56x160
Fig. 43—Valve
.
'
<zns
2H Si a I i d
rie Assembly
a. Disassembling the Valve Body and Transfer Plate
To disassemble t h e valve body and t r a n s f e r plate f o r
CONTROL CABLE ADAPTER CLIP /
THROTTLE VALVE
( 8 ) Check the distance f r o m valve body to end of
t h r o t t l e valve operating a d j u s t i n g screw.
Using
wrench, Tool C-3279B, remove the t h r o t t l e valve adj u s t i n g screw lever assembly. N o r m a l l y , i t is not
necessary t o remove t h i s assembly unless damaged
p a r t s are t o be replaced.
( 9 ) H o l d i n g the manual valve lever detent plate
and sleeve securely, remove small retainer r i n g w h i c h
locks t h r o t t l e camshaft i n sleeve ( F i g . 4 7 ) . W h i l e
m a i n t a i n i n g constant t h u m b pressure on detent plate,
carefully w i t h d r a w sleeve f r o m valve body. Remove
t h r o t t l e valve cam assembly and manual valve lever
assembly. D e t e n t plate ball is s p r i n g loaded. Do not
lose the detent ball.
Fig. 45—Valve Body Assembly (Volve Body Plate
Removed)
cleaning, inspection, and overhaul, refer to F i g u r e
42, and proceed as f o l l o w s :
( 1 ) Place valve body and t r a n s f e r plate assembly
i n stand, Tool C-3294 ( i f not previously done so)
( F i g . 4 3 ) . Do n o t use vise t o h o l d valve body and
t r a n s f e r plate.
( 1 0 ) Remove detent ball and s p r i n g f r o m valve
body. Remove the manual valve b y slowly r o t a t i n g i t
out of i t s bore.
( 1 1 ) Remove reverse blocker valve cotter p i n ,
s p r i n g and valve. Remove valve b y r o t a t i n g i t out of
the bore. Do n o t remove push b u t t o n u n i t control
cable adapter, lock^ s p r i n g or cable adapter clip, u n less inspection reveals i t is necessary to do so ( F i g .
45).
( 2 ) Remove t w o of the l o n g t r a n s f e r plate cover
bolts and lockwashers and i n s t a l l guide studs, Tool
C-3295.
(12) Remove the f o u r (three long and one s h o r t )
valve body and cover plate bolts and lockwashers and
remove valve body and cover plate.
( 3 ) K e e p i n g finger pressure against t r a n s f e r plate,
remove t h e r e m a i n i n g t h r e e (2 l o n g and 1 s h o r t )
t r a n s f e r plate cover bolts, and remove t r a n s f e r plate
cover, as shown i n F i g u r e 43.
( 1 3 ) Remove valve body end cover screw and lockwasher (oval f i l l i s t e r ) . Keep pressure against valve
body and cover w h e n r e m o v i n g screws as t h e r e are
t h r e e springs behind cover. Do not disturb the setting.
Do n o t lose t h e servo r e s t r i c t o r valve o p e r a t i n g
p l u g f r o m t r a n s f e r plate w h e n r e m o v i n g t r a n s f e r
plate f r o m valve body plate ( F i g . 4 4 ) .
( 4 ) Remove valve body plate f r o m valve body.
T h e servo pressure bleed valve m a y s t i c k t o valve
body plate w h e n i t is removed. N o t e position of servo
pressure bleed valve and pressure check valve b a l l .
(Refer to F i g . 45.)
b. Cleaning and Inspecting the Valve Body and
Transfer Plate
A f t e r each p a r t has been t h o r o u g h l y cleaned and i n -
( 5 ) Remove valve body f r o m stand, Tool C-3294,
and remove guide studs. Remove servo pressure
bleed valve and pressure check valve ball, and place
i n clean container.
( 6 ) Remove t h e t h r o t t l e valve cam r e t u r n s p r i n g
f r o m cam and t h r o t t l e o p e r a t i n g lever.
( 7 ) Compressing t h e t h r o t t l e valve o p e r a t i n g lever
assembly against t h r o t t l e valve s p r i n g , as shown i n
F i g u r e 46, r o t a t e t h e t h r o t t l e valve o p e r a t i n g assemb l y o u t w a r d f r o m the t h r o t t l e valve cam. S w i n g
t h r o t t l e valve o p e r a t i n g lever out o f the w a y and remove t h e t h r o t t l e valve s p r i n g f r o m t h r o t t l e valve.
Remove t h e t h r o t t l e valve f r o m t h e valve bore.
56x161
Fig. 46—Compressing Throttle V a l v e Operating Lever
RETAINER RING
Fig. 47—Removing Throttle Camshaft Retaining Ring
spected, place on clean paper u n t i l ready f o r assembly. Make sure all p a r t s are free f r o m obstructions,
and inspect a l l m a t i n g surfaces f o r b u r r s , nicks and
grooves. Small nicks, etc. m a y be removed w i t h
crocus c l o t h ; otherwise, damaged p a r t s m u s t be replaced. U s i n g straightedge, Tool C-3335, check all
m a t i n g surfaces f o r d i s t o r t i o n . Inspect bores i n valve
body f o r score m a r k s , p i t s and i r r e g u l a r i t i e s . Inspect
all springs f o r d i s t o r t i o n and collapsed coils.
Inspect a l l valves and plugs f o r b u r r s , nicks and
scores. Small b u r r s , nicks, etc., m a y be removed w i t h
crocus cloth, p r o v i d i n g extreme care is t a k e n to avoid
r o u n d i n g off the s h a r p edge p o r t i o n of t h e valve
w h i c h helps to prevent d i r t and f o r e i g n m a t t e r f r o m
g e t t i n g between valves and body, r e d u c i n g t h e poss i b i l i t y of s t i c k i n g . Check valves and plugs ( d r y )
f o r free operation i n bores. A l l m u s t f a l l freely i n
t h e bores w h e n the valves, plugs and bores are clean
and d r y . Inspect detent portions on m a n u a l valve
lever assembly f o r wear. Inspect detent ball f o r
wear and make sure i t slides freely i n t o valve body.
Fig. 49—Holding M a n u a l Valve Lever Detent Ball
Inspect s t a k i n g of c o n t r o l cable adapter t o detent
plate and cable adapter clip t o valve body. Inspect
t h e .staking of valve lever and t h r o t t l e valve cam t o
t h e i r respective shafts. Inspect the t h r o t t l e valve
o p e r a t i n g lever roller t o make sure i t rolls freely.
Inspect t h r o t t l e valve o p e r a t i n g lever a d j u s t i n g
screw and p i n f o r wear. Make sure a d j u s t i n g screw
rotates f r e e l y i n the t h r o t t l e valve operating lever.
Inspect k i c k d o w n valve r o d f o r w e a r and scoring
and also inspect f o r wear at e n t e r i n g p o i n t i n valve
body. Inspect servo r e s t r i c t o r valve ( F i g . 48) i n
t h e t r a n s f e r plate to make sure valve is seating
p r o p e r l y . I f valve is d i s t o r t e d , carefully remove t h e
d r i v e screw. I n s t a l l new valve and new d r i v e screw.
Make sure t h e d r i v e screw is t i g h t . A v o i d d i s t o r t i n g
t r a n s f e r plate w h e n p e r f o r m i n g t h i s operation. I n spect valve body plate f o r b u r r s and make sure t h e
five small m e t e r i n g holes are open. V i s u a l l y i n spect p u m p check valve springs i n the t r a n s f e r plate.
Make sure r a d i a l grooves i n check valves are free of
obstructions.
c. Assembling the Valve Body and Transfer Plate
DETENT
Fig. 48—Servo Restrictor Valve
Fig. 50—Aligning M a n u a l V a l v e Lever A s s e m b l y
. N O T E : Three steel balls are used I n t h e valve body
and each m u s t be installed i n i t s correct position.
Each is i d e n t i i e i b y i t s size as f o l l o w s :
Tf
K i c k d o w n r o d ball—large
M a n u a l valve lever detent b a l l — m e d i u m
0 :
T h r o t t l e pressure check ball—-small
(1) I n s t a l l reverse blocker valve and s p r i n g .
new cotter p i n .
(2)
Use
Place manual valve i n i t s bore.
( 3 ) I n s t a l l s h i f t valve. I n s t a l l s h i f t valve p l u g and
t i g h t e n screws securely.
( 4 ) Place m a n u a l valve lever detent s p r i n g and
ball i n valve body and hold i n position, as shown i n
F i g u r e 49. W h i l e h o l d i n g the detent ball, position the
m a n u a l valve lever assembly so t h a t t h e lever a r m
engages t h e manual valve (manual valve m a y be
positioned t o -assist i n t h i s a l i g n m e n t ) and the push
b u t t o n c o n t r o l cable adapter i n d i r e c t a l i g n m e n t w i t h
t h e c o n t r o l cable adapter clip. (Eefer t o F i g . 50.)
A t t h e same t i m e , a l i g n t h e shoulder on the m a n u a l
valve lever w i t h the sleeve bore i n t h e valve body so
t h a t t h e detent b a l l w i l l engage t h e detent plate
w h e n finger pressure on .detent ball is released.
( 5 ) W i t h finger pressure h o l d i n g m a n u a l valve
shoulder i n bore, i n s e r t sleeve ( s h o r t end) i n bore
(up to stop r i n g ) .
( 6 ) Position t h r o t t l e valve cam in. sleeve, as shown
i n F i g u r e 5 1 , and lock i n place w i t h retainer. I f ret a i n e r is not placed i n p o s i t i o n a t t h i s t i m e , t h e
56x163
Fig. 52—Indexing Throttle Valve Cam Shaft w i t h
Throttle Valve Operating lever
detent plate m a y move out o f position, a l l o w i n g the
detent ball to escape f r o m i t s bore.
(7)
Place valve body i n stand, Tool C-3294.
( 8 ) Place k i c k d o w n r o d i n t o position i n valve
body.
(9)
I n s t a l l the s h i f t valve s p r i n g i n valve body.
(10) I n s t a l l t h e s h u t t l e valve i n valve body. Coat
stop r i n g l i g h t l y w i t h transmission f l u i d and place
i n t o recess i n valve body.
(11)
Place shuttle valve s p r i n g i n valve body.
(12)
Place k i c k d o w n valve ball i n t o valve body.
(13) Place valve body and cover plate on end
cover. I n s t a l l the one short screw and lockwasher
and t i g h t e n snugly.
(14)
Place adjustable s h u t t l e valve p l u g i n t o posiS E R V O RESTRICTOR V A L V E O P E R A T I N G P L U G
/
TRANSFER
PLATE
.
;
y ^
mm
Sg|||
MM
mm
56x176
Fig. 51—Placing Throttle Valve Cam Shaft in Sleeve
Fig. 53—Installing Servo Restrictor Plug
t i o n i n valve body end cover. P l u g m u s t fit to f u l l
depth of bore.
(15) I n s t a l l the k i c k d o w n valve s p r i n g i n place i n
end cover.
(16) I n s t a l l valve body end cover to valve body.
Make sure t h e s h i f t valve, s h u t t l e valve and k i c k down valve springs are p r o p e r l y seated i n position
w h e n cover is being installed.
(17) I n s t a l l t h e valve body end cover screw and
lockwasher b u t do n o t torque.
(18) I n s t a l l the three (long) valve body end cover
plate screws and lockwashers. D r a w down evenly
and t i g h t e n to 24 to 30 inch-pounds torque.
(19) Remove valve body f r o m r e p a i r stand. U s i n g
wrench, Tool C-32798, i n s t a l l t h r o t t l e valve a d j u s t i n g
screw and t h r o t t l e valve o p e r a t i n g lever assembly.
A d j u s t to a p p r o x i m a t e l y 1-11/16" distance between
t h e valve body and end of t h r o t t l e valve a d j u s t i n g
screw.
(20) I n s t a l l t h r o t t l e valve ( p o i n t o u t w a r d ) i n
valve body. Place t h r o t t l e valve s p r i n g over t h r o t t l e
valve. S w i n g t h r o t t l e valve o p e r a t i n g lever over
spring. Compressing t h e t h r o t t l e operating lever
assembly against t h e t h r o t t l e valve s p r i n g , slide t h e
t h r o t t l e valve cam assembly i n t o t h r o t t l e valve opera t i n g lever, i n d e x i n g t h e cam p o r t i o n i n slot o f
o p e r a t i n g lever, as shown i n F i g u r e 52. Replace
t h r o t t l e valve cam assembly r e t u r n s p r i n g and replace valve body i n stand.
(21) I n s t a l l servo bleed valve and t h r o t t l e pressure check valve ball i n t o p o s i t i o n i n valve body
and i n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C-3295.
(22) I n s t a l l t h e servo r e s t r i c t o r valve o p e r a t i n g
p l u g (long end f i r s t ) i n t o t r a n s f e r plate ( F i g . 5 3 ) .
M a k e sure the pump check valves and springs are
p r o p e r l y positioned i n t r a n s f e r plate. The p u m p
check valve w i t h the m e t e r i n g hole should be positioned i n end of t r a n s f e r plate t h a t lies n e x t t o t h e
m a n u a l valve.
(23) Place the valve body plate flush i n t o p o s i t i o n
on valve plate b y compressing p u m p check "valve
springs. M a k e sure p u m p check valves enter t r a n s fer p l a t e ; otherwise, t h e valve body plate w i l l be
damaged w h e n assembly is d r a w n d o w n onto valve
body.
(24) Keep sufficient pressure on t r a n s f e r plate
and valve body plate t o hold t h e m together. Place
t h e m over t h e guide studs and i n t o position on v a l v e
body.
(25) Place t r a n s f e r plate cover i n t o position and
i n s t a l l t w o of t h e t r a n s f e r plate cover screws and
lockwashers (one each side) finger t i g h t . M a k e sure
p u m p check valves r e m a i n i n position i n body plate.
(26) Remove guide studs and i n s t a l l the r e m a i n i n g t r a n s f e r plate cover bolts and lockwashers. T i g h t en t h e bolts 45 t o 50 inch-pounds torque. A v o i d overt i g h t e n i n g as t h i s w i l l d i s t o r t valve body, r e s u l t i n g i n
s t i c k y valves. Operate p u m p check valves t o make
sure t h e y can be unseated before final t i g h t e n i n g .
d. Installing the Valve Body and Transfer Plate
( 1 ) Place " 0 " r i n g seal on t h r o t t l e camshaft
sleeve, t h e n place valve body and t r a n s f e r plate i n t o
position on transmission case. I n s t a l l the five t r a n s fer plate bolts and lockwashers. T w o bolts are 1 %
inches l o n g and go t h r o u g h the t r a n s f e r plate cover
on valve body. T h e other three are 1 % inches long.
D r a w bolts d o w n evenly and t i g h t e n 12 to 17 footpounds torque.
( 2 ) M a k e sure the t w o o i l s t r a i n e r tube seals are
i n position on o i l s t r a i n e r and place o i l s t r a i n e r assembly i n t o p o s i t i o n on valve body. I n s t a l l the t w o
oil s t r a i n e r support bolts ( 1 % inches long) and
lockwashers.' T i g h t e n 12 t o 17 foot-pounds torque.
( 3 ) Replace o i l pan and gasket ( n e w ) . T i g h t e n
oil pan bolts 12 t o 17 foot-pounds torque.
( 4 ) Replace f e l t and felt r e t a i n e r on t h r o t t l e camshaft, t h e n i n s t a l l t h r o t t l e control lever assembly.
T i g h t e n lock screw securely.
( 5 ) Place engine rear support adapter i n t o posit i o n on extension h o u s i n g and i n s t a l l bolts and lockwashers. T i g h t e n t o 50 foot-pounds torque.
( 6 ) Remove t r a n s m i s s i o n assembly f r o m
Tool C-3280.
stand,
11. INSTALLING THE TRANSMISSION I N VEHICLE'
N O T E : Before installing transmission in vehicle,
check torque converter hub runout and housing
a l i g n m e n t a s outlined i n the T o r q u e C o n v e r t e r
Group 2 1 .
(1) I n s t a l l guide studs, Tool C-3276, i n t h e t w o
upper transmission case to converter housing bolt
holes.
( 2 ) L u b r i c a t e f r o n t o i l p u m p drive sleeve seal
r i n g and bearing surface w i t h transmission fluid.
( 3 ) I n s t a l l d r i v e sleeve i n f r o n t o i l p u m p housing
( i f n o t previously installed) making sure driving lugs
are properly engaged i n front oil pump pinion gear.
N o t e position of d r i v i n g lugs on f r o n t o i l pump d r i v e
sleeve and position accordingly, to aid i n proper
engagement w i t h torque converter hub w h e n transmission is installed.
( 4 ) M o u n t transmission i n suitable j a c k . Raise
and a l i g n transmission w i t h pilot bore i n t o r q u e
converter housing. Slide transmission over guide
studs and i n t o position against torque converter
housing. To avoid damage to f r o n t o i l pump, t h e
transmission m u s t be p r o p e r l y aligned. Do n o t
a t t e m p t to use transmission t o converter housing
bolts to b r i n g t r a n s m i s s i o n and converter h o u s i n g
together. I f oil p u m p d r i v e sleeve and i n p u t shaft
have been p r o p e r l y aligned, transmission should slide
i n t o position r e l a t i v e l y easy. Do n o t force i t i n t o
position.
( 5 ) I n s t a l l t h e t w o lower transmission case to
converter housing bolts and lockwashers, b u t do
not t i g h t e n . Remove guide studs and i n s t a l l the
t w o upper t r a n s m i s s i o n case to converter h o u s i n g
bolts and lockwashers. D r a w a l l bolts down evenly
and t i g h t e n 45 t o 50 foot-pounds torque.
( 6 ) Place crossmember i n t o position and i n s t a l l
crossmember to t o r s i o n bar s p r i n g bracket bolts.
T i g h t e n bolts securely.
( 7 ) I n s t a l l the r e a r engine m o u n t to the
trans-
mission and t i g h t e n bolts to 35 foot-pounds torque.
I n s t a l l rear engine crossmember t o frame and t i g h t en bolts to 75 foot-pounds torque. Remove the transmission 'jack. I n s t a l l the rear engine m o u n t t o crossmember bolts and t i g h t e n to 35 foot-pounds torque.
L o w e r the ear and remove h o l d i n g fixture Tool C3487.
( 8 ) Connect t h r o t t l e linkage to t h r o t t l e lever, i n sert gearshift control cable i n t o transmission and
adjust as outlined i n "Transmission and Controls —
A d j u s t m e n t s , " Paragraph 6. I n s t a l l n e u t r a l s t a r t i n g
s w i t c h . Connect speedometer cable housing to drive
pinion.
Engage ball end o f brake cable w i t h brake opera t i n g lever, secure to support and t i g h t e n support
screw securely (refer t o Brakes, Group 4) of t h i s
manual f o r method o f a d j u s t i n g p a r k i n g b r a k e ) . Connect propeller shaft and t i g h t e n nuts 33 to 37 footpounds torque.
Connect oil pan filler tube and refill transmission
to proper level (refer to L u b r i c a t i o n , Group 0 of t h i s
m a n u a l ) . Connect b a t t e r y and make a l l necessary
adjustments and tests, as outlined i n "Transmission
and Controls — A d j u s t m e n t s / ' Paragraph 6.
WHEELS, BEARINGS AND TIRES — 1
Group 22
W H E E L S , BEARINGS AND T I R E S
CONTENTS
Page
Paragraph
Care of Tires
Wheel Balance
12
5
15
8
8
4
13
6
14
7
1
2
10
5
9
4
11
5
DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
MODELS
D E S O T O (PS-1, PS-3)
W I N D S O R (PC-1)
WHEELS
Type
_
Steel Disc
Rim
D r o p Center—Safety Wheel
Size
14 x 5 i / K
14 x 5 y K
2
2
14 x GK ( T o w n and C o u n t r y )
N u m b e r of Wheel N u t s
5
S t u d Hole Circle
W
S t u d Size
y "-20
2
TIRES
Type
Super Cushion Tubeless
Size
8 x 14
8.00 x 14
8.50 x 14 Optional
8.50 x 14 ( T o w n and C o u n t r y )
Ply
4 Standard
Tread
Twin Grip
TIRE
PRESSURES-COLD
Pounds—Rear
Rear
Front
24—Town and C o u n t r y *
22
24
22
* W i t h T o w n & C o u n t r y f u l l y loaded, increase rear t i r e cold pressure to 28 pounds.
C a p t i v e - A i r tires are optional equipment on T o w n & C o u n t r y Wagons 3-seat Models only.
(8.50 x 14 on Model PC-1 and 9.00 x 14 on Model PC-3.)

TORQUEFLITE TRANSMISSION

Transcription

Similar documents

View Dr van Niekerk`s presentation

Structure Of August Srew Air Compressor

TWO-PIECE VALVE COVERS

deuter Streamer 2.0 Liter

AODE, 4R70W, 4R75W

Teckpak A74741QA TCC Valve Repair Instruction Sheet Fixes

HP1217R – TF 727 Manual Reverse Pattern Valve Body

make semgas your new year`s resolution

ZF 6HP26

The Murzan PI 50 Sanitary Pump Gently Handles the Widest Range